AManualofOccultism 10843503 PDF

M A N UA L O F
O C C UL T I S M
’
SEP HA R I AL
AU THO R OF
A ST RO L O G Y, T T R OLO G Y,
“ ” “
T HE M ANU A L OF KABAL I S I C AS
“ ”
THE KABA L A OF NU M BE RS , ET C .
, ET C .
L O ND O N
WI LLI A M RI D E R SO N , LT D .
1
9 14
S o rc e ry has c alle d Magic : b ut
M agic is an d the re is nO Wisdo m
in S orcery .
P A R A OE LS U S .
I NTR O D U C T I O N
IT is not my intention in these pages to attempt

an exposition of the deeper arcana in connection
with the various subj ects treated of ; but rather to
place before the lay reader a number of methods
by means of which he will be able to demon strate
to his o wn sat isfaction and that of others that
, ,
there is a deep substratum O f truth in what is usu ally

”
called Occultism and that the occult arts are
,
sure and de fi nite means O f exploring them .
The ancient Hermetic philosophers were well

aware of a certain subtile correspon dence or anal ogy
existing between the superior and inferior worlds ,
the worl d of c au s ation and that of effects They .
traced a connection between the noumenal and the

ph enomenal between the mind of man and his
,
'
bodily condition between the spiritual and the

,
natural Th e y affirme d all th is in a trite axiom :

.
A s a b o v e so b e low
, This philosophy e xtended to
.
concrete observations and became a scienc e which

,
they embodied in the Doctrine O f C orrespondences .
The hiero glyphic writings of t he Chinese E gyptians

,
and Assyrians are the outcome of this science ,
portions of which are current in our o w n though t

a n d lang uage . Thu s when we speak of commer ce ,
vi INT R ODU C TION
the merchant and the market we are going back ,
to traditional knowledge which associated the

winge d messenger O f the g ods with the ship in
f ull sail ; the word m e rz (trade ) bein g at the roo t
of the name Mercury and the s ymbol O the hiero
,
g lyph for all that the name imports We call the .
“ ”
S un he and the Moon she tracing unconsciously
“ ”
,
a subtile correspondence between the day and the

ac t ive male function in nature and between the ,
ni ght and the passive female function We speak .
O f j ovial men and infer their connection with t h e
planet Jupiter ; and all our destructive and hurtful

”
ideas are embodied in such W ords as to mar ,
martial ,
”
murder etc linking them to their
,
”
.
,
source in the root ma m a (to strike ) because the ,
destruc tive element in nature is represented in our

system b y the planet Mars .
This Doctrine of C orrespondences is at the root

Of all occult interpretation It is our human .
presentation of the Univer sal Law which binds

the Microcosm to the Macrocosm as an effect to its
ante cedent cause The mystic the poet and the
.
,
creative artist are all un conscious interpreters of

thi s universal law . They have in some degree
the universal sense b y which their souls are rendered
responsive to the pulsations O f Nature s o wn heart ’
beat . The s ybil t h e diviner and the seer are in

,
even closer touch with the G reat Life wh ile theyhave ,
less conscious enj oyment O f that intimacy Others .
there are who reach to the heart of thin gs by a clear

and conscious intellection understanding what they
I N T RO D UC TI O N vi i
see analyzing and interpreting what th ey feel
,
.
These are the Occultists the true masters of the ,
secret knowledge Here it is perhaps necessary to

.
mark the distinction which exists between occult

ismand mediumism between the voluntary conscious
,
effort O f the trained intellect and the automatic

functioning O f the natural sensitive in th eir ,
respective relations to the occult world .
The Occultist is one who intelligently and c on

t in u o u sly applies himself to the understandin g of
the h idden forces in nature and to the laws O f the
in terior world to the end that he may consciously
,
c O O perate with nature and the spiritual intelligences

-
in the production of e ff ects O f service to himself

and to his f e llow bein gs This entails upon him
-
.
a close study O f the mystery and power of sound ,
number colour form ; the psychological laws

, ,
underlying all expression of faculty ; the laws of

s ympathy and antipathy ; the law of vibration ; of
spiritual a nd n atural a ffinity ; the law O f periodicity ,
of cosmic energy planetary action ; occult correspond

,
e n c e s etc
,
To these labours he must bring a na tural
.
g ift of understan di ng an unusual de g ree

,
of p atience
and devotion and a keen perception O f natu ral facts
, .
The Me di um or natural sensitive is one who holds

, ,
hi mself in negative relations to the interior worlds ,
and submits himself to the operation O f influences

proceeding from things and persons as well as ,
to that O f discarnate intelli gences The medi u m .
c ul tivates an unusual degree of responsiveness to

envi ronment and to the emanations (atomic mag ,
viii I N T ROD UC TI O N
netic or ps ychic ) and su ggestions O f other persons .
The phenomena developed by this process O f

mediumism include a u to ma tism (temporary loss
of control over the motor nerves ) as in the pheno ,
mena O f involuntary speech and automatic writing ;

hyp e rmsthe s ia as in the function of clairvoyance
, ,
clairaudience psychometry etc ; tra nc e with its

, ,
.
,
attendant phenomena O f unconscious cerebration ,
obsession and a variety O f physical effects of a

,
supernormal character In its hi ghest manifesta

.
”
tion followin g upon the crucifyin g O f the flesh
, ,
the s ubj ugation of the passions and a process O f ,
intense reli gious aspiration mediumism is frequently

,
followed b y spiritual revelation and spontaneous

prophecy . B u t this sort cometh not but b y
fasting and prayer .
The various forms O f divination to which recourse

is had in s o called occult circles rest largely upon
-
the exercise O f a faculty which is compounded of

occ u ltism and mediumism They are seen to employ
.
the automatic faculty in conj unction with an em

iric al knowled e f certain occult methods of
p g O
interpretation .
The following pages are intended to place the lay

reader in possession O f some O f the principal methods
of the occultists and mediums ; and althou gh nothing
of a purely esoteric nature is divul ged it will never ,
t h e le ss be found that every thin g necessary to an

initial understandin g and practice O f the various
occult arts is included in this work It is within .
'
the au th o r s p u rp o se to place so much information

’
I N T RO DUC TI O N
at the disposal of the student as will e ff ectually
debar h im fr om any excuse of ignorance concern ing
the psychic powers latent in man and t he verity
of the occult sciences It is within the power O f
.
everybody to b e convin ced and to convince others

, ,
while he w h o perseveres to the point Of perfection in

the exercise of his faculty may j ustly be dignified
by the name O f Adept Th e Magi of anc ient times
.
were astrologers diviners and prophets all and he

, ,
who would aspire to their high degree must pursue

their methods and live their life They have
.
committed to us the following maxims which are

,
still preserved in the schools

K NO W WILL D ARE — K E E P S I L E NT ;
— —
and as to the rfile of life they enj oin

R IGHT T HO U GHT— R I GHT FE E L I NG
—
RI GHT S P EE CH R I G HT A CTION
R I GHT LI V I NG
.
C O NTE NTS
PAR T I
TH E OCCU LT SC IENCE S
C R AP . P AG E
A S TR OL OGY—S ECTI ON I
TH E AL PHA B ET
,
E TC .
A SPECTS
S I GN S
TH E H OU SES
AS TR —
OI J OGY S m mn II
I MA K I N G A H O R O SC O PE
II FO REI G N H O R O SC O PES
A S TR OL OG Y— S ECT I ON III
I PERS ONAL A PPE A RAN CE
II TH E C ON STITUTI ON
III HE ALTH
Iv CH A RA CTER
v A CCI D E NTS
VI T H E FO RT UN ES
vu TH E P O SI TI ON
x ii CO N T E N T S
C HA P . P AG E
VIII O C C U PATI O N
TH E
IX MA RRI AG E
X PR O G E NY
X I TRAVE L L I N G
X II F RIE ND S AND E N E M IES
X III K I ND OF D EA TH
A S T R O L O GY—S ECTI ON I V
I TH E M E AS U RE OF TI M E .
II E X AM P L E OF D IRECTI ON S
III SEC ONDAR Y D IRECTI ON S
IV TRANSITS AND EC L IPSES ,
E TC .
V MUNDAN E A STR OLO G Y

VI O THER M ETH OD S
P A L MI S T R Y
I T Y PES OF H AND S
II MOUN TS O R C U SHI ONS
III TH E PH ALAN G ES
IV TH E L I N ES
V N I N E PRI N C IPAL L I N ES
VI I N CI D EN TAL MA R K S
T H AU MAT UR GI C
I TH E ABALA
H
II TH E C A L C ULA T O R Y A RT
III O F EVI L SPIRITS
MAN S SPIRIT UAL F REE DOM

’
Iv
CO NT E N T S xiii
CH AR . P AG E
ON TAL IS MAN S
V
VI NUM ER OLO GY
H YP NOT I S M A ND ME S ME R I S M
P A RT II
’
TH E O CCU L T
I D IVI NATI ON .
II T H E TA R OT
III C A RT OMAN C Y
Iv V A RI OU S M ETH OD S
V C R Y ST AL G AZI N G
-
VI PRE L I M I NARIES AND PR A CTICE

VII VISI ON S AND I N TERPRET ATI ON S
VIII S OM E E X PE RIE N CES
IX G E OMAN C Y
X C ASTI N G AND J UD G I N G TH E F I G U RE
X I S YM BOL S I N TH E T WE LVE H OU SES
X II P S Y CH OM ETR Y
X III D RE AM S
X IV S O RTI L E G ES
A L C HE MY
P A RT I
TH E O C C U L T S C I E NC E S
TH E V O L I T I O NA L F A C UL T Y— TH E WI LL AND
I MA G I NA T I O N A D E P TS H I P A ST R O L O GY
— K A B A L I S M— T A L I S MA NS — NUME R O L O G Y
P A L M I ST R Y— H YP NOT I S M
E TC ,
E TC .
A M A NUA L O F O C C ULT I S M
S E C TI O N 1
C H AP T ER I
E RRATA .
re a d
7 — 1in e s 14 1 5 fo r s pe c ific it ie s
“
P a ge -
: g r a v
a t o m ic w e igh t s .
— fo r s p e c ifi c v it ie s r e ad
P a ge 8 1in e 3 ci se q : g r a
”
at o m ic w e igh t s .
of t he zodiac an d the pl a
”
S I gn s nets the aspects ,
and some other parts of the groundwork of astr o lo gy ,
have come down t o us from times immemorial ; b u t

the methods of computin g the p e riods the exact ,
times of events to gether with s o me methods of in

,
t e rp re t at io n are O f modern or comparatively recent

,
ori gi n Of course all that is known of Neptune

.
,
and Uranus i s the re sult of modern discovery .
3 B 2
4 A MAN U AL OF OCCU L TI S M
The sub j ect before us can be divided into three
parts
1 The alphabet
. .
2 The reading
. .
3 Time measures
. .
I will deal in this chapter with
THE A LPHA B E T
This includes the symbols and names of the planets
and the S igns their group ings and dominions
, .
The PL AN E T S (including for convenience of ,
phrasing the S un and Moon ) are nine in n u mber

, .
S tated in the order O f their distances from the earth

they are as follow s
D Th e M oo n which returns to the same place
,
in the zodi a c in about 27 day s and to its conjunction ,
with the S un in about 29 days E very 1 9 years .
the New Moons fall in the same part O f the zodiac .
Th e Moon s characteristic is cha nge or mo b ility

’
.
3 V e nus which returns to the same part of the

,
zodiac about the same date in 8 yea rs It is at its .
nearest to the earth when in inferior conj unction

with the S un Its characteristic is p lac idity or
.
p e ac e. It is called b y the G reeks Aphrodite .
25 M e rc u ry when
, in inferior conjun ction with
the S un is next in distance from the earth It
, .
returns t o the same lon gitude on the same date

in 7 9 years Its characteristic is a ctiv ity
. .
G) Th e S un is the c h ro n o c ra t e r of our system ,
and all time is measured b y its apparent movements .
It has an apparent motion round the earth in 24

A S T RO L O GY 5
hours and 4 minutes and an annual motion through

,
the zodiac in 3 6 5 day s 5 hours 4 8 minutes 4 9 seconds .
The earth is nearer the sun than it used to be the ,
day is S horter and the precession O f the e q uin oxes

,
is greater The e q ui noxes pass through each S ign

.
in about years The vernal equinox is now in

.
the constellation P isces and in a b out 7 0 0 years will be

,
in Aquari us The characteristic O f the S u n is v ita lity

. .
3 M a rs returns to the same part O f the zodiac

‘
ab out the same time at the end O f 7 9 years Gonse .
q uently it forms its conjunction with é in the same

part of the zodiac at the end of that perio d Its .
characteristic is e n e rgy .
11 J u p ite r returns to the same longitude about
the same dat e every 83 years It is called the .
Greater F ortu ne Its characteristic is e xp a ns io n

. .
b S a turn has a period O f 5 9 years after which ,
it comes to the same lon gitude about the same date .
It is called the Greater Infortune Its characteristic .
is p rivation .
151 Ura nus has a synodic period O f 8 4 years Its .
characteristic is disrup tio n .
Ne p tun e has a period of about 1 6 5 years and

its characteristic is chaos .
The periods O f the pla nets according to the

Chaldeans are
D 4 years 65 1 0 years 52 8 years 6 1 9 years 3
, , , ,
‘
1 5 years,
1 2 years and j? 3 0 years
, Thus the .
5) ru les the life from birth to 4 years of age and is

succeeded b y C5 up to 1 4 then Q to the age O f 22 ,
,
f ollowe d b y the S un fro m 22 to 4 1 to wh i ch 7) , (

6 A MAN UAL OF O CCU L TI S M
succeeds until 5 6 and is followed b y 14 who rules , ,
the life up to the a ge O f 6 8 the last 30 years up to , ,
the age O f 9 8 bein g dominated b y S aturn

, .
These are t h e periods recited b y S hakespeare in

his famous passa ge in A s Yo u L ike I t beginnin g ,
All the w orld s a sta ge an d all the men and women

’
merely players Thu s the D is t h e babe mewlin g

.
”
,
“
and pukin g in its nurse s arms is the ’

.
"
scholar 2,
2 the lover 3 the soldier u the jud ge ,
with good capon lined and I, the lean and slip ,
pered pantaloon The last stage of all is that of

(disr u ption ) the paral y tic
, senility of which condition
is S O aptly described b y the B ard .
P la n e ta ry C o lo u rs .
Ne p tun e — M auve
lilac heliotrope (admixtures , ,
O f pale bl ue and scarlet ) .
Ura n us — Gre y black and white mixed in checks , ,
or stripes .
S a tu r n — Dark brown black , .
J u p ite r — Violet purple

. .
,
—
M a s S carlet crimson
r .
, .
S n
u — Orange gold ,
.
V e n us — P ale blue turquoise ,

.
M e r c u ry — Indigo dark blue

.
,
.
M o o n Opal iridescent sheens yellow and in

.
-
, , ,
watery signs (25 111 36 ) sea green , ,

-
.
P la n e tary Nu mb e rs .
The followin g numbers tran smitted by John

Heydon in the S ixteenth c e n t urv have been proved
correct
A S T RO L O G Y 7
8 , 21 3 ,
6 9, 6, 5 ;
b 9 9
negative
Q) ( ) (
4 positive,) 1 .
D 7 7
“
.
,
P la ne ta ry M e ta ls .
(un kno w n )
‘
d iron
uranium 9 copper
le ad Q quicksilver
tin D S i lve r
G) gold .
The atomic weig h ts O f the ancient metals are not

presumed to have been know n to the ancient ast ro lo
g ers
, yet we find the y named the planets and ascribed
their dominions in the mineral world in exact accord
ance with the facts of modern science The specific .
g ravities O f the v ario u s p u re metals kn own to them

are contained in the following glyph
8 A MAN U AL OF O CCU L TI S M
This se v en pointed star is read from the ray
-
.
marked d towards the left The result is

‘
.
6 iron specific
, gra v it v 5 6 ;
9 copper 6 3 ;
D S ilver 1 08 ;
2; tin 118 ;
Q g old 1 9 6 ;
Q quicksil ver 20 0 ;
I) lead 20 7 .
R ead alternately in the reverse order we have

Q) ruling S unda y ,
D Monday ,
Ci
Tuesday ,
g Wednesday ,
2; Thursday ,
9 F riday ,
I;
S aturday .
If we read from point to point S O as to make a

h e p t ag ram or seven pointed star or a star O f seven
-
an gles we ha v e the order of the planets according

,
to the Chaldean s ystem

b ll d O SP Q D
S ymp a tlt ie s .
The followin g glyph (see page 9 ) exhibits at a

glance the sympathies and antipathies of the
planets
Thus S aturn is O pposed to the S un and Moon ,
Jupiter to Mercury and Venus to Mars

, .
This is ex h ibited in detail by reference to the

A S T RO L O G Y 9
D o min ion s
of the planets which are set forth in
, t he followin g
schedule
5 governs and V5
opp osed to
g overning g) and
‘
governs 1 and
opposed to
governin g 1] and rm
governs T and 111
opposed to
govern in g and 5
The Dominions are sometimes called Houses

from domus a h ouse but as oth er division s of th e
, ,
heavens are so call ed I prefer to use the term
,
dominions to describe the S igns O f the zodiac

r uled over b y the p lanets.
In a general sense and havin g re gard to the

,
specific nature of each planet S aturn is in sympathy

,
with Mars Mars with the S un Jupiter with the

, ,
Moon and Venus ; Whi le Mercury is variable taking ,
its radical tincture from that planet to which it is

in closest aspect at bir th .
The follo w in g fi gure shows at a glance the S i gns

owned or ruled by the planets and the luminari e s
It will be O bserved that each planet has two si gns ,
the S un and Moon one each Nep tune is found to

.
have a ffinity w ith the s ign 5 P is ces and Uranus

, ,
with is: Aquarius ; but t hese are modern empiricisms

and for some time must be received with caution .
12 A MAN U AL OF OCCU LTI S M
The opposition 8 of 1 80 which makes for dis

union and inharmonio us results .
The [Q sesquiquadrate or square and a half

aspect O f 1 3 5 is powerful for evil
°
.
The [1 squ are or q ua drature of whi ch is only

a degree less evil than the d irect opposition .
The A sem is q uare of w hich is similarly but ,
in less degree evil

,
.
To these are added the conjunctions of g Igl b

fi }
, ,
and 6 together with Q5 w hen in bad aspect to

,
another body ; for 2 5 is the interpreter of the

g ods,
an d brin g s to us the messag e of t hat sp here
with which it is found in association at any time we

m ay consult t h e heavens .
The astrological aspects are fo u nd to be those

angles at wh ich the s uperior metals crystallize .
Water crystallizes at an an gle of Again the ,
an gles or com plemental angles Of an y regular poly

g o n which m ay be inscribed in a circle will be found
to be comprehended b y the astrological aspects .
Thus our earliest progenitors a re found to h ave

been both metallurgis ts and geometers .
The evil aspects are all included in this ancient

TH E A SPE C T S 13
and similarly the good aspects a re included in

the followi n g s ymbol kn own as
,
the se al of
S olomon
Ke y .
4 9 2
3 5 7
8 1 6
The fo und engraved on the back of the

Great Tortoise discovered b y Yaou the Chinese
, ,
patriarch and ruler in the Yellow R iver about

, ,
B C
. It forms the basis of interpretation to the
.
oldest book in the world known as the Yilt K ing or

, ,
B ook of Transformations It is used by the Chinese

.
for all p u rposes of divination and is the basis of

,
their astrological system .
B esides these there are many o t her p oints of

in terest vested in the astrological aspects and as I ,
S hall ha v e occasion to refer to them in the next
chapter of this section I will pass them for the

,
moment .
C H APT ER III
TH E S I GN S
TH E si gn s of the zodiac are the s ymbols of those
livin g form s which amon g the ancients stood for
certain cosmic principles and evolutional processes .
I n the z odiacal scro ll the gift e d interpreter of

sym bols will fi n d the history of t h e human race
already depicted The typical forms represent
.
v a riou s sta ges of human evolution as well individual ,
as racial .B ut w e are not now concerned with these

e soteric matters but rather wi t h the exposition
,
of astrological principle s Observe then th a t the .

, ,
zod iac is composed of asterism s which in the year ,
B C .c orresponded
.
,
with t h e solar signs
bearin g the s ame names The signs are counted .
from the vern al e quino x or that po int where the .
sun s path c rosses the earth s equator The line ’

.
travers e d b y the sun in its annual path throu gh the

asterism s is called The E clip tic .
This eclipt ic circle is divided into twelve eq ual

parts called S i gn s which counted from the vernal
, , ,
e quino x are as follows : T Aries 8 Ta u rus 11

,
( )
, ,
Gemini 5 , C ancer 31 Leo TU Z Vir

, g o 1L L ib ra fl fl , , ,
S c orpio i S a gittarius l0 C apricornus if: Aquarius

, ,
°
, ,
P i ces
‘
Tg s .
TH E S I GN S 15
T hey h ave the following relations hips and group

in gs :
P
C is opposed by 11
5
[I
a
“1
2 it
The E le me nta l Na ture s of the sign s with their ,
hu m an correspondences are S hown in the following

,
tabular scheme
E le me n t . S ign . P r in cip le . P ro p e rty .
Fiery T g 1 S pirit Inspira tion

‘
A signs ( )
Aerial Ll R eason
V Watery il
T S oul E motion
E arthy 8 112 V5 B ody S ensation .
The maj or ity of the p lanets being in the F ir e

S igns shows that the life is expressed c hiefl y in the
,
inspirational aspirational and intuitive fac ul ties

, .
In Air signs the intellectual life will be dominant

, .
In Wa te r si gns the passional emotional and imagi ,
native qu alities are more pronounced ; While if the

maj ority of the planets are in E a rth signs the more ,
material matter o f fact and sordid aspects of the

,
- -
nature absorb the vital powers These groups are .
otherwise known as the i gneous gaseous fluidic

.
, ,
and mineral analogous to the u pward evolution

,
o f the material universe which is cou n terbalanced ,

by the downward involution of the correspondin g
immaterial principles .
The an alysis of the S ign groupin gs shows that the

A and S i gn s are related to the formless or superior
uni verse while the V and

,
signs relate to the
in ferior or formative world Again it will be noticed
.
,
the air and fire are mutually conformable i gnition ,
depending on atmosphere ; while similarly water

is necessary to the earth for its fertili z ation These .
sets of S i gns are in mut ual sextile to one another .
Thus
1
(0
is
5 to O
j a n d X ;
H is X t o Wan d gi
- -
an d ga is > < to
j 5 and mg .
The C o ns titu tio na l Na tu re s of the S igns are derived

from an other groupin g They are kno wn as the
.
E] F ixedor B asic
m C ommon or Flexed ;
A Movable or Cardin al .
They may very appropriately be expressed as the

acute A the grave El and the circumflex m
, .
Th e group ing for this di vision of the signs is

thus
Acute (
T
,
3
g VS (rm ac
)
Grave 5,
C irc um fle x , I 56 II 102
When the maj ority of the planets are found at the

birth of a person to be in
F ixe d S ig ns—the natur e will be independent ,
TH E S I GN S 17
self reliant pivotal self centred original cautious

-
, ,
-
, , ,
firm and steadfast .
C ommo n S igns — The nature is versatile flexible , ,
complacent sympathetic suave and capable of

, , ,
adaptin g itself to chan ges of company and environ

ment .
—
M ovab le S igns The nature shows ambition
.
,
aptitude executive ab ili ty capable of cutting out

, ,
a line in life for itself and making headway in the

face of O bstacles .
The driving power is represented b y th e fixed

signs the S harp instrument by the cardin al or acute
,
signs and the body that is riven or S haped is denoted

,
by the common or flexed S igns .
The thinkers p hil osophers in ventors and origina

, ,
tors are of the b asic or fixed typ e The pioneers .

,
the executive the partisans and zealots are of the

,
acute or car di nal type The common populace the .

,
p assive crowd ; the n umerous agents fetchers and ,
carriers of business ; and whomso/ever works at the

di rection and under the leadership of others all and ,
sundry are of the flexed type .
The hand of the archer is fixe d the arro w is di rect ,
and acute and the bow is fle xe d These correspond

, .
e n ce s are the keys to the interpretat ion of many
occult mysteries .
S ex o f S igns .
The S igns are alternately male and female ,
namely
18 A MANU A L OF OCCU L T I S M
m
i
"1
V5 )
56
-
Th e signs are divided

into three parts each of ,
called de c an at e s These are related to the superior

.
,
middl e and lower regions of the zones g overned b y

them or to which they correspond The ancients
,
.
had a conception of the macrocosm under the

image of a man which they called the Grand Man
,
or Adam K admo n and to which the microcosm or

,
in dividual corresponded more or less perfectly at all

points The zones of the body covered by the S i gns
.
are in this scheme as follows

, ,
I the head ;
( )
the loins ;
{5 the neck ; In the e x c re t o rs
[I the arms ; I the thighs ;
the breast ; Vj the
’
kn e es ;
51 the heart ; the shins ;
Tm the bowels ; the feet .
From what has been said above it will be seen

°
that if a planet is in T 5 it has its location in t he
( )
superior region of the head while one in the 1 7th

,
degree of TQ w ould be located in the middle region

of the b owels As to w h ether it be upon the right
.
o r left side of t h e body Will depend on the location

20 A MAN UA L OF OCCU LTI S M
° ° °
P 51 1
C
0 13 26
5 V
g j m
’
10
°
°
°
H 6 20
m 94 3
°
There thus nine divisions or Mansions in each

a re
The Hindus ascribe a specific planetary

infl uence to each of them an d give to each a period
,
of dominion over the life (S e e Hindu Astrology

.
,
in the M an ua l of A stro logy b y S e p h arial )

, .
The st udent will do well to consult also the system

which divides the zodiac into 28 parts each qu adrant,
being subj ect to a sevenfold division .

CH A P T E R I V
TH E HO U SES
IF you face the south where the sun is at no on ,
there is a point on your h ori z on to the left o n e ,
immedi ately over your head an d another on your

horizon to the right An imaginary circle drawn .
through these three points and continued round the

earth is called the P rime Ve rtica l An equal division .
of this circle into 12 part s give srise to what are called

the Twelve Ho uses They are numb ered for pur
.
,
poses o f reference from the east h ori z on below the

,
earth to the west hori z on and thence through the ,
zenith to the east horizon again The diagram on .
the next p age will perhaps convey the idea bette r

than words .
The hori z on east forms the cusp of the 1st House ,
the upper meridian forms the cusp of the l oth

House the west horizon forms the cusp of the
,
7 th House and t h e lower meri dian that of the

,
4t h House .
The 1st and 7 t h Houses are also c alled the

”
Ascendant and Descendant respectively .
The l st l 0 th 4t h and 7th are called the A ngle s

, , .
Th e 2n d 1 l t h 5 t h and 8th are called S u cce e de n t

, , .
The 3rd 6 th 9th and 1 2th are called C a de n t Houses

, , .
21
22 A MAN UAL OF OCCU L TI S M
P lanetsin the Angle s of a horoscope are by that

position rendered more powerf ul in their action
and are more conspic uous in the life of one born
w hen they are so placed .Many planets in C ade nt
Houses will render th e career inconspicuous and in a

measure servile Many planets in S ucce e de nt H ouses
.
are an indication of a career that is helped by

persistent endeavour .
Thus the an gular Houses correspond with the

cardinal signs the s u c c e e de n t with the fixed s igns
, ,
and the cadent with the flexed signs ; and this

TH E H OUSES 23
correspondence may be traced th rough out th e

circle T with the 1 st House 5 with th e 2md
( )
, , ,
[1 with the 3 rd and so on ,

.
TH E K AB AL A OF TH E H O U SE S
s h o w s th em to be divided into four group s vi z ‘
, .
I ndividua l, 1st , 5 th , 9 t h ;
P o sse ssive , 2nd, 6 th , l 0t h
R e la tive , 3 rd, 7t h , 1 1t h ;
Te rminal, 4t h , 8th , 1 2th .
Of these among t h e Individu al group the 1st is

, ,
e xte rna l and relates to the person or bo dy of the
man ; the 5 th is in te rme dia te and has relation to t h e

'
psychic n atu re o r soul ; and the 9 th is inte rnal and is

related to the spirit ual nature or in di viduality .
Hence all the House s are either physical (1st 2n d , .
3 rd and 4th ) psychic (5 t h 6 t h 7 th and 8th ) or

, , , ,
spiritual (9th l oth 1 1 th and 1 2th )

, ,
.
The close study of these intimate relationships of

i
th e H o u se s an d t h eir corresponden ce with the signs

of the zodiac is the mo st profound work of the
astrologer It is th e found ation of th e wh ole art of
.
correct forek no wledg e .
Fo r practical purpose s w e may brief th e domina

“
tions and Signifi c at io ns o f the House s as fo llo ws
S IG NIFICATION S o r TH E H O U SE S
Th e 1s t House governs the body personal appear ,
ance physical well being

, and accidents h app enin g
-
,
to the p erson .
24 A MAN UA L OF O CCU L TI S M
The 2nd House governs the personal property ,
money in hand personal effects ,

.
The 3rd House rules the personal relations the tie ,
of consanguinity brothers and sisters ; also means of

,
communication whether b y vehi cle letter post

, , ,
telegraph or other means wh atsoever It denotes .
cables bridges telegrap h wires viad u cts and other

, , ,
means of connection ; writin gs letters ,

.
The 4th House g overns the end of the physical

lif e the grave ; mate ri al products mines farming
, , ,
produce ; land houses freeholds leases tenancies

, , , ,
and hence lan dl ords .
The 5 th House is the extension of the 1st and

governs the psychic nature ; pro geny ; passio ns ,
pleasures love a ffairs ; hence theatres places of

, ,
amusement sport etc ; the younger generation

, ,
.
and such thin gs and persons as tend to their well

being .
The 6 th House is an extension of the 2n d ; it

g overns the food clothi ng servants
, personal com , ,
forts relative possessions generally ; also th e work

,
o r prof e ssion in w hich the subj ect enga ges ; what
ever contributes to the well b eing of the subj ect s -

’
possessions .
The 7th House is an extension of the 3rd it

governs the tie of conjugality the marn age ,
partner ; persons in contract ; rivals (as opposing

the 1st House ) .
The 8th House is an extension of the 4th ; it

g overns the dissolution of the vital forces ; death ,
matters relating to the dead ; w ills legacies etc and , , .

,
TH E H OUSES 25
being the 2nd from the 7 th ) do w ry or personalty

(
of the marriage partner .
The 9 th House is an extension of th e 5 t h ; it

”
governs the spiritual nature ; the far off land -
,
whether it be that across the ocean or beyond

the veil teleological s ubj ects theology p h ilosophy ;
, , ,
publications ; the law lawyers ; insurances ; dreams

, ,
visions and other world experiences -

.
Th e l oth House is an extension of the 6 th ; it

denotes the ambitions success attain ments of the , ,
subj ect ; honour cre di t public esteem ; the father

, ,
or mother (The l 0th is always of the same sex

.
as the 1 st and in a female horoscope denotes the

,
mother ) .
The 1 1 th House is an exte nsion of the 7th and ,
denotes the tie Of friendshi p ; con geners ; associate s ;

syndicates companies leagues clubs associations
, , , ,
of which the subj ect is a member ; his confederates

and supporters .
The l 2th H o u se is an e xtension of the 8 th and

~
denote s privation confinement restraint ; the hos

, ,
pital prison or other place of detention ; seques

,
t rat io n exile ; ambushes plots secret enemies ; t h e

, , ,
occult .
It will be seen that many other interpretations

apply to the House by re fle c tion Thus the 1s t being .
the subj ect of the horoscope and the 7 th his wife ;

the 3rd his relatives and t h e 9th his wife s relatives ’
the latter house comes to mean brothers and sister s

in law i 6 marriage relatives
-
,
. . .
The l 0 t h being the father and the 4t h the mother
(in a male horoscope ) , the 7 t h is the maternal
g ra n df a th e r and the l s t the maternal g a ndmo the r
r .
The 6 t h being the uncles or aunts on the mother s ’
side (i e ma ternal a un ts or uncles ) the relatives of

. .
,
the mother the 5 th (progeny ) from the 6 th (i e

, . .
the l 0th Ho use ) will denote maternal co usins .
S imilarly with all those relations which a man

m ay not marry as expo unded in the B ook of
,
C ommon P rayer .
We have now before us the whole of the a lp hab e t

of astrology and m ay now proceed to frame a
,
horoscope and read it by the language of the

heav e ns .
It is important that the whole of the planetary

natur es shoul d be learned together with those of
,
the si gns and the sign ifi c at ion s of the Houses ,
before the next step is taken When the alphabet.
has become a language that languag e may b e

,
interpreted Until then we are faced only by dead

.
sym bols .
28 A MAN U AL OF OCCUL TI S M
the whole tree of life It represents the environ

.
ment of the new lif e the con di tions under whi ch the
,
incomin g soul will be required to express itself develop ,
its powers and gain its new load of experience

, .
That which as environment presses it most

, ,
closely is the physical body with all its hereditary

,
tendencies and acquired habits B eyond this there

.
are the wills of other units of life all strivin g towards

,
the satisfaction of common human needs and ,
spurred by indi vidual ambitions The horoscope of .
birth is in this sense accidental and n o t incidental ,
and cann ot be consulted in any matter prior to

the act of birth nor in regard to the essential
,
nature origin power and motive of the soul

, , .
There is a system of horoscopy which claims to g o

deeper and to concern itself wholly with the e v o lu
,
tion of the soul and its migrations ; but this has no

part in m y present scheme and may be conveniently
ig nored .
In order to draw a horoscope of the birth it will ,
be necessary to O btain (1 ) an E phemeris of the

planets places for the year of birth ; (2) a Table of
’
Houses for the place of birth or an approximate,
latitude ; (3 ) a set of Transit Tables extending over

a hundred years .
An E p he me ris is an astronomical calendar S how

in g the positions of the celestial bodies at noon each
day throu ghout the year This information is
.
extracted from the Nautical A lmana c or the French

contemporary C o nna issa nce de Te mp s It gives the .
geocentric longitudes and th e latitudes and declin a

MA K I NG A H OROS COPE 29
tions of the bodies the S idereal time of the day

,
corresp onding to the S un s true R ight Ascension at

’
noon ; and the aspects formed between the planets

called Mutual aspects and also the o lar and
”
( ) s
lunar aspects S ome of these terms need explana

.
tion to the lay reader .
Ge o ce n tr ic lo ngitude is the position of a body in

the ecliptic as seen from the centre of the earth .
H e lio ce n tric lo ngitude from which geocentric longi

,
tude I s converted is the ecliptic position as seen

,
from the S un In astrology we use the geocentric

.
longitudes because we are considering the action

of the planets upon the earth and its inhabitants .
If we lived on Mars we S h ould have to take the

positions as seen from Mars The ignorant c ont e n .
tion that the diSc o v e ry of the heliocentricity of the

system invalidates astrology is of course without
rational foundation .
D e c lina tio n is di stance from the equator north
o r south I t corresponds to eo
g g rap h ical latitude
'
. .
Th e line app arently traversed b y a star or planet

in its di urnal passage round the earth is called
"
“ ”
the parall e l of d e clin ation .
La titude of a celestial body is distance north or

south of the ecliptic .
S ide re al time is the S un s true R ight Ascension at

’
noon measured on the equ ator from the vernal

,
equinox and corrected b y the di fference between

R ight Ascension and mean or clock time It may .
b e exp ressed in or in s the C i rcle of .

,
the equator bein g equal to 24 hours .

30 A MAN U AL OF OC CU L TI S M
Ta b le s f o H o us e s
are computed for various
latitudes (as for New York P aris London Liver , , ,
pool ,
and serve for all places of the same or
approximate latitude as these town s wheth er north ,
or south of the equator The Tables S how the poin ts .
of the ecliptic cut b y the cusps of the Houses ; thus

the cusp of the l 0th House is the same as the
meridian of lon gitude and the point of the ecliptic ,
thereon at the time for which the calculation is

,
I
made will be that which is on the meridian and

,
culminatin g .
Lo ca l time is t he time correspon di ng to Green

wich time at an y moment The correction to be .
applied to Greenwich time in order to find the

local time is 4 mins for every degree of longitude .
eas t or west If east a dd to Greenwich time ; if

.
,
west s ub tract from Greenwich time in order to ge t

,
the local time .
With the ephemeris in hand turn now to the ,
date of the birth .
Against this date in the left hand column you will

,
-
fin d the S idereal t im e at noon

‘
To this S idereal time a dd the local time elaps ed

S ince the p r e c e din n to ether with an equation
‘
g n o o g ,
at the rate of 1 0 secs for each hour . .
The sum will be the S idereal time on the mid

heaven at t h e time of b irth .
Next turn to the Tables of Ho uses for the latitude

of the place of birth and find thi s S idereal ti m e .
Against it under the column marked 1 0 (l oth

,
House ) you will find the deg ree of the ecliptic whi ch
,
is on the meridian This is techn ically c alled th e

.
M A K I NG A H OROS CO PE 31
midh eaven In the next column (1 1 ) you will

.
find the degree of the zodiac which is on the cusp

of the 1 1th House In the next column that which
.
is on the cusp of the 1 2th House In the next

‘
column marked Ascendant or

,
you have
the degree which is rising in the east ; the next
‘
column g ives the de gree on the cu s p of the 2n d

House and the last column that which is on the
,
cusp of the 3rd House .
The 4th House will hold th e same degree of the

o pposite S ign to that which is on the l 0th cusp .
The 5 th cusp holds the O pposite to the 1 l th and the ,
6 t h the opposite to the 1 2th and so on to the 7 t h ,
8 th and 9 th cusps The skele ton figure is then

.
complete .
The planets p la Oe s m ust next be inserted and as

’
the ephemeris is constructed for Greenwich mea n

time the Greenwich time of the birth must be used
,
instead of the local time The places being given .
for each day at noon th e lon gitudes can readi ly be

,
found by proportion for any intermedi ate hour .
Fo r the purpose of il lustr ation we may take the

horoscope of K in g George V The K ing was born .
on the 3rd of June 186 5 in London at 1 hr 18 min

, , , . .
a m . In the ephemeris for 186 5 we find against

the 2nd of June at noon precedin g the birth
,
H . M . s .
S idereal t ime 4 43 52
To which add time since 13 18 0
And equation at 10 per hour ”
2 13
ST . on midh eaven at birth 18 4 5

32 A MA NUA L OF O CCU LTI S M
This S idereal time corresponds with the 1s t degree of
C apricorn which therefore occupies the midheaven
, .
The skeleton is then completed from the Tables of .
Houses for London ; and the planets places and those ’
of the luminaries are taken from the ephemeris

for the 3r d of June at
, a m and in e ffect we
. .
,
have the horoscope as follows
A s p e cts , e tc .
It is to be observed that the planets are in

aspect to one another when at birth they are
within 5 degrees of the exact angle ; and the lumi
°
naries are in aspect at a distance of 7 from the
exact angle ; and that angle to which they are
severally nearest must be taken as the aspect then
°
in operation Thus with the S un in Y0 and g in
.
,
‘‘
MA K I NG A H OROS COPE 33
8 the an gle is which is nearest the semi

square of The S un is then semisquare Mars .
B ut if with the G) in m 0 Mars S hould be in 5

°
"
at an angle of then the n e are st asp e ct is the

of and th e S un is then said to be in sextile
to Mars .
It is to be ob serve d that th e groupings of the

S igns already given in C hap II will be of much
.
use in the computation of the aspects ; for all S igns

of the same E le me n ta l nature are in trine to one
another ; those of the sam e C o ns titutio na l nature
are in square aspec t to one another .
Any form o f horoscopical figure may be used ,
and each has its advanta g es . That given ab ove

disp e nses with the c ircle and consists of a series of
straight lines representing the celestial sphere on
,
a Mercatorial proj ection .

CH AP T ER II
FO RE I G N R S
H O O COP ES
S UPPO SE that the birth took place abroad let us ,
s ay in B erlin The skeleton is set for the local

.
tim e and the planets place are taken from the

,
’
Greenwich ephemeris for the correspondin g Green

,
wic h time The Tabl es of Houses used must be

.
those for t h e latitude of B erlin .
In all cases the Mi dh eaven is calculated for lo ca l

time and the Tables for the Houses must be those
due to the latitude of the place An d in all cases .
where the Greenwich e p he m e rl s 1 s used the corre ,
sp o n ding G reenwich time is employed when c al cula

’
ting the planets places .
S O UTH LATIT UD E
When the figure is to be set f o r p lac e s south of
‘
the E quator calculate the Midheaven for local time

,
as b e fore Then add 1 2 hours to the S idereal tim e

.
.
on the Midheaven refer to the tables for the cor

,
respondin g Nor th latitude and take the o p p os ite ,
s igns to those found on the cusps of the Houses ,
retaining however the same degree s

, ,
.
34
36 A M A NU A L OF O CCU L TI S M
published in the text books manuals and guides
-
, ,
which are very plentiful and moderate in price .
C e s t le p re mie r p as gu i w rite it is true but once t he

’
, ,
in itial stages of Astrology are passed successfully ,
a world of fasc inating study will reward the careful

and patient worker .
No te should be observe d that the Midh eaven

. It
-
and Ascendant are the onl y points wh ich are

mathematically determ ined by the calculation of a
horoscope The deg rees on the cusps of the other
.
Houses may conveniently and indeed rationally

, ,
be allotted by dividin g the entire degrees contained

in each quadrant by three and adding the result
to the degree on the Mid heaven or the Ascendant
, ,
accordi ng to quadrant involved This is the .
method I myself use in practice .

S E CT I O N I I I
RE A DI NG TH E HOROSCOPE
C H AP T ER I
P ERS ONAL E R
APP A ANC E
personal appearance at maturity I s to
TH E
be judged from a combination of the followin g
elements
1 The rising S ign
. .
2 The sign occupied by its ruler

. .
3 P lanets I n the rising S ign

. .
4 Those planets in exact aspect t o the rising

.
degree .
Note that S aturn ri s i ng makes the complexion

darker and the face thinner Jupiter rising gives .
a f uller habit Mars rising disposes to more

.
colour or ruddiness and increases the stature .
Thus a c h ild born on the 7 th of July 1 9 0 9 at , ,
p.m w ith
. the
, Moon and Mars rising in P isces S howed
giant proportions before she was a year o ld being ,
then of dimensions equal to a well nourished child -
of four years The S un rising gives a fair complexion

.
but ofte n freckled or sunburnt in appearance .
37
Venus gives a beautiful and florid type Mercury .
give s an alert look w ith rather small wizened , ,
features The Moon gives fuln ess and disposes to

.
lym phatic pallor Mars rising generally gives a .
red mark scar cut or mole upon the face Chaucer

, , .
the poet who w as born with the risin g of Mars in

,
Taurus says of himself

,
Yet have I Martes mark
”
upon my face .
There are usually to be found moles o r marks

upon that part of the body which is ruled b y t h e
rising S i gn ; that whi ch is on the cusp of the 6 t h
House ; and the S i gn occupied by the Moon This is .
so generally the case that I have frequently used

th ese marks successfully in planni n g a horoscop e
where the time of birth was in doub t .
Neptune risin g usually gives blue eyes with a ,
mystical expression When this is absent the .

,
deportment is often limp and the expression drowsy

and dazed .
Uranus rising gives angularity and slenderness

to the body tog ether With a marked b ru sque rie or
,
eccentricity of action .
TH E TYPAL FO R M S
due to the risin g of the twelve S i gns are briefly
as follows
A rie s —.S lender figure lean body long neck , , ,
broad forehead narrow chin curling hair either

, , ,
sandy or black .
Ta ur s
u — F ull body strong shoulders f ull neck , , ,
w avin g brown hair .

PER S O N A L A PPE AR A N CE 39
Ge mini .
—Tall
well formed ; long limbs slender , ,
hands long nose rather wide mouth brow n hair

, , , ,
generally fi ne and straight :

C ance r S hort stature broad chest
.
-
rounded , ,
features b ro wn hair usually o f a light tinge ; full

, , ,
fleshy body ; small hands and feet .
Le o Tall well developed and upri gh t figure

.
-
,
-
curling or w avy hair florid complexion and la rge ,
grey e yes .
V g
ir o —
Lean body large forehead h igh c h ee k
.
~
, ,
'
bones squa re j aw s long upp e r lip brow n hair , ,

.
—
,
b
Li r a E leg ant figure oval f ace neat feature s , , ,
good complexion ; rich brown h air goo d teeth an d ,
n afls .
S co rp io — Thic k s e t figure sturdy appearance s

, ,
stvarth ycomplexion w a vy or curlin g hair ; glittering ,
brigh t eyes .
S agittar ius — Tall well develope d figure ; h igh ,

-
forehead long features ; full expressive eyes : brown

, ,
hair.
C aprico rnus prominent features mode

.
,
rate or small stature ; dusky complexion dark hai r , .
A quarius —
Well de veloped and full figure ; fine
.
-
complexion ; blue eyes ; flaxen or ligh t bro w n h air ; -
defective teeth .
P isce s — S mall but full fi gure small hands and ,
feet ; full eyes ; pale dusky complexion ; black , ,
straight hair .
It is to be observed that pure types are seldom met

with but when a planet rises in its own S ign it may
,
be regarded as astrologically p ure if at the same —

,
time no planet is in close aspect to the I l S lI l g degree
'
.
There remains however the fact of heredity which

, , ,
will alway s operate towards the reproduction of the

family type ; so that it becomes a matter of great
experience and skill to correctly depict a person
from the horoscope alone It is a fact however
.
, ,
that astrologers learn to recognize the various

zodiacal types with gre at facility K ing George V
.
,
it will be seen is of the Aries type blended with that

,
of Leo in which Mars is posited Neptune is risin g

.
,
and the K in g e arly espoused the naval profession .
Many of the K in g s portraits reflect the drowsy

’
look peculiar t o the planet Neptune .

C H A P TER II
TH E C ON TIT S U TION
is gove rned by the S un and th e rising S ign The .
vital signs are I 51 i the airy signs are less

C 3
vital ; while the weakest E i re 5 Vj 1112and ’
The Q well aspected shows a strong constitution ,
with freedom from hereditary taint or organic

disease Wh en badly aspected it shows organic
.
troubles which in favouring circumstances will

readily develop Hereditary disorders are also thus
.
discovered .
The affliction being from fixe d s igns S hows diseases

of the heart throat blood and excretory system ;
, ,
fle xe d s igns the lun gs b o w e ls and nervous system ;

, , _
cardin a l s igns , the head loin s stomach and skin , , .
S a turn denotes obstructions defects privations ; , ,
J up ite r enlargements and congestion ; M a rs in flam

mat o ry action lesions and remedies by the knife ;
,
Ura nu s shows paralysis and rupture ; Ne p tun e hyper

ae sthesia and neuropathic c onditions hysteria etc , .
, ,
and all insidious wasting diseases V e nu s S h o w s .
defects of the mucous membrane and effects of

poisonous elements ; M e rcu ry nervous disorders ,
especially of the voluntary ar e of nerves and the

cerebrum The M o on disposes to irregularities and
.
lac k of c o ordination in the system .
41
C H A P T ER III
E
H ALTH
TH E D is the chief factor denotin g the fun ctional

,
powers Wh en badly aspected it shows functional

.
di sorders in the same way that the S un denotes

organic disor ders The S un shows in cidental and
.
the Moon accidental effec ts The one is inherited .
and the other acquired A functional derangement

.
may excite an organic disorder and become a chronic

illness
.
When the constitution is weak and the health

good the person may live to a g ood age but the first ,
serious illn ess may kill Wh en the constitution is

.
strong and the health bad much sickness may be

endured without fatal e ff ect .
C onsider then the S u n fi rst of all in regard to the

, , ,
constitution ; and next the Moon in regard to the ,
health When the Ascendant is weak and both

.
,
the luminaries a fflicted predict a short life When

, .
the rising S i gn is strong and both S un and Moon well

,
supported predict a long life Moderate years are

, .
the result of mixed influences .
When maladies are indicated by a plane t affl ictin g

the (9 or D by e v il asp e c t the malady will be of
’
42
C H AP TER IV
TH E R
CHA ACT ER
T A K E the grouping s of the si gns
c o n s titu tio n a l
(S ection I chap,
iii )
. and see whether the maj orit y
of the bodies are in fixed flexed or cardinal signs
,
.
Judg e of the mental type accordin gly .
Next observe the e le me n ta l groupings and note

that which c o n t a m s the maj ority of the b odies ;
and from this you wi ll know whether the character
will be expressed on S piritual mental psychic or , ,
physical lines The relative groupings will there

.
fore work out to one of the following types
These symbols have already been explained

(S ection I chap,iii ) together
, with their
,
applica
tions so that there is no need to repeat them
,
here.
Thus if the maj ority of the planets are in airy

,
44
TH E C HA R ACTE R 45
Signs and next in watery signs the typ e will be of

, ,
the mental psychic ; and if the maj ority are also in

-
acute or cardi nal S igns you will get the pioneer , ,
with the initiative and progressive tendency working

along intellectual and social lin es ; the intellect
having however control over the emotions
, , .
The individual ch aracteristics are contribu ted by

those planets whic h are in aspect to Q in the D
for Q governs the rational faculty and the D the
natural as P tolemy affirms
, .
Thus the manner and disposition the expression ,
of feeling and t h e domestic and social traits are

,
chiefly shown b y the planetary aspects to the Moon ;

while the intellectual and business faculties are
shown by the condition of Mercury .
Those planet s w hich at birth happen to be on

or near the Ascendant or in the 9 th or 3rd Houses
, ,
will greatly characteri z e t he individual on acco unt ,
of the great influence these parts of the h eavens

exert upon the mind .
Th e S pecific c h aracteristics of t h e planets an d

luminaries are as foll ows
Ne p tune : subtle ty planning and sch eming A
, .
tortuous mind but suave manner C lever at plot

, .
and counterplot A diplomat Disposed to the

. .
drug nicotine or other insidious habit

,
F ond of .
mysterious and detective w ork Frequently touched .
with a mani a for something A possible genius . .
Uranus inventive fac ul ty originality w ay w ard , ,
ne ss independence of spirit abruptness

, , .
S a turn se cretiveness caution reserve self , , ,

control ,
temperance sob erness ; philosophical
, ,
thoughtful brooding melancholic faithful A good

, , ,
.
staunch friend and an u n re le n tin g enemy

,
'
.
J up ite r : generous just s ympathetic ; possessin g

, ,
a knowledge of human nature ; j oviality a good ,
j ud gment fruitful intellect ; confidence ; sometimes

,
too optimistic and even bombastic .
M a rs courageous darin g energetic ; fond of

, ,
exploits ; enterprising ; frank outspoken petulant , , ,
zealous and fond of freedom

,
.
The S u n : proud dignified ; possessed of self

,
c o n fi de n c e ,
generosity and magnanimity ; disposed
to the grandiose and magnificent ; sometimes vain
and hau ghty yet free from m e anness and lovin g
, ,
fair play and transparency ; generally honest and

opposed to all cliques and cabals .
V e nus gentle kind docile an d persuasive ; lovin g

, ,
music and the fine arts bright and j oyous scenes , ,
j ewels and flowers ; fond of pleasure and frequently ,
self indulgent
-
.
M e rcury active business like and capable in

,
-
aff airs ; of voluble speech ; attentive to d etails ;

pun ctili ous and easily irritated ; loving knowledge
for its own sake ; accessible and communicative .
The M con chan geful vacillating ; versatile ,
imaginative ; romantic ; loving travel and change of

sc ene ; sensitive and whimsical .
Judgment as to character is first made by the

g rouping of the signs in order to get the t yp e to which
the subject bel o ngs and then by the aspect s of the
,
Moon and Mercu ry to determine the spec ific traits

TH E C HARA CT E R 47
or characteristics P lanets in t h e l st 9 th and 3f d

.
,
Houses have a very marked influence on the expres

sion of character .
It is here to be observed that the same indication

“
and its corresponding trait of character will work
out di ff erently in persons of the various types

‘
Thus 6 d 5 in a purely emotional type is liable

to produce danger o u s and destructive passions ,
which in an I ntellectual type would find expression

in critical diatribe and free thought while in the -
i
spiritual typ e it w ould beget a zealot ; and in the
i
material type a v io le n t and unscrupulous fi rebrand ,
a maniac .
There is one axiom which cannot be too strongly

emphasized and the student will do well to keep
,
it always before him The p lan e ts act up o n us o nly

in te rms o f o urs e lve s .
Mental derangement is sho wn by the aff liction

of 5 or D in H
,
]
, l
g or 111
2,Acute mania is‘
S hown .
by 5 5 or g t o and epilepsy by 8 afflicted

by h Bu t in such case there will b e no remedial
aspect from the b e n e fi c planets and none betw een
the D i? and the ascending de gre e
, .
C H A P TER V
A C CI D E NT S
D I S PO S ITION to ac cidents is shown b y the a ffliction
of the Ascendant or the D by the adverse aspects of
the violent planets 131 h and 3 If both the S u n
, .
and Moon are so afflicted and the afflicting planet

be elevated above the luminaries there is liability ,
of a fatal termination which only the In tervening

,
good aspect of LI o r 9 can prevent .
Note that a planet intervenes only when its aspect

is formed b e fo re that of the afflictin g body .
Ma rs when so aff licting the Ascendant or luminaries

disposes to accidents by fire ; also cuts bleeding ,
wounds and abrasions In human signs H m

m
.
, ,
it ay bring operations or hurts by human hands .
In watery signs scalds ; in fiery S igns b urns ; in

, ,
earthy S igns abrasions

,
.
S a turn thus afflicting denotes falls fractures , ,
bruises blows from falling obj ects etc In earthy

, ,
.
signs by falls earth q uak es explosions of mines etc ;

, , , .
in watery signs drowning ; in airy S igns by falls

, ,
from a height ; in fiery signs by explosive missiles

, ,
etc.
Ura nus similarly afflicting denotes ruptures ,
48
A CC I D E N T S 49
broken bones compound fractures accidents by

, ,
machinery and all extraordinary casualties

,
.
Ne p tun e S hows danger of po isoning by drugs ,
noxious gases etc

,
.
The source from which danger emanates is to be

seen from the position of the afflicti ng planet as if 3 ,
‘
be in the 6 th House the hurt will come from physi

,
c ian s ( surgeons ) or servants ; in the 3rd on short ,
j ourneys ; in the 9 th in foreign lands ; in the 5 th

, ,
by sport or play etc The a ff liction bein g from the

, .
8 th House is especially sinister as it threatens a ,
fatality.
It may perhaps be well to note in these days of

extended means of locomotion that 111 has special ,
reference to hurts proceeding from defective

machinery b reak downs etc b denotes collisions
,
’
, .
,
‘
3 firing or ignition and when
,
t h ese planets a f flict
the Ascendant or lumin arI e S from aerial signs the ,
danger of aviation is increased ; in watery signs ,
aquatics should /
be avoided ; and in earthy si gns
motoring w ill add to the pe culiar dangers to which

the subj ect will be liable .
CH AP TE R VI
TH E FO RT UN ES
TH E luminaries bein g in mutual good aspects and ,
the Dotherwise well supported in the horoscope by

b e n e fi c aspects shows a successful career
,
If the .
planets are chiefly under the horizon or bel o w the

earth as it is otherwise called then succ ess comes
,
”
,
after marriage or late in life as the case m ay be

, , .
B u t if above the horizon then success is speedily

,
achieved E vil planets in the 4th House near the

.
lower meridian S how a poor termination to the career ,
even after a life of much success S aturn in the .
Midheaven will bring a person to a good position

and afterwards denude him of all benefits .
Impediments come from those sources indicate d

by the Houses occupied by the m ale fi c planets or
those badly aspecting the D as if in the 7t h b y ,
marriage or c ontracts ; in the 8 th by legacies ; in the

4t h b y minin g farming and real estate ; and s o of
,
the rest To be exceptionally fortunate the planet

.
L} should be in good aspect to one of the lumin aries

.
and angular especially in the l st or l 0th

,
A b e n e fi c planet in the 4t h House not afflicted by ,
adverse aspect S h ows a successful fi nish to t h e care e r

, .
50
C H A P T ER VII
TH E PO ITIONS
TH E maj ority of the planets ri sin g between the
4t h and l 0th eastward S how an ambitious and
,
aspirin g nature a candidate for responsibility one

, ,
”
who will be independent a free lance and restless
, ,
under the y oke of servitude Thus placed the

.
,
planets denote e ff ort and ambition which will result

accordin g to that planet which is nearest the Mid
heaven and on the oriental side of it .
The more planets there are in angles the l s t , ,
l 0t h 7 th or 4t h the more conspicuous will be the

, ,
subj ect in his sphere of life If at the same time in

.
cardinal signs he will be an epoch making man or

,
-
remarkable pioneer .
P lanets ab ove the horizon show responsibilit y and

some degree of eminence .
B elow the horizon and occidental th ere is less ,
prominence in the life .
B e n e fi c planets in the l 0 t h H o use (which g overns

the credit honour and esteem ) will contribute their
,
a id in brin ging the subj ect to a position of influence
in his sphere of life .
The end of life is shown b y the 4th House Male fi c .
52
TH E POS ITI O N 53
planets in the 1 0th bring a m an e a rly to a downfall ,
but if in the 4t h House the end of life will b e passed

in tribulation or obscurity .
If a man rises by patronage there will b e indica

tions of it in the 1 1th House ; and the horoscope of
the benefactor will S how marked sympathy with
that of his beneficiar y .
The mundane aspects are of some c onsiderable

significance in this matter for planets on the cusps
,
of the Houses will materially a ffect the position for

g ood
,
inasmuch as they are then in or A to the
Mi dheaven or As cendant P erhaps not enough has
.
been made of these mundane aspec ts and it is well ,
that they S hould not be overlooked P lac idu s de .
Titus in his P rimu m M o b ile mak es them the basis

, ,
of his system of P rognostics .
S imilarly it has been ob served that when planets

are on th e cusps of the Lunar Mansions the person ,
then born rises to eminence (S ection I chap , .
/
‘
The maj o ritiy of planets in or near any such

de grees vi z the 1 st 1 3th and 25 th of the c ar di nal
,
.
,
S i gns the 9 t h and 22n d of the fixed si ns or the

, g ,
4th and 1 7 th of the common signs denotes one ,
born to distin ction K ing Geor ge V has 5 planets

.
,
as well as the Midheave n and Ascendant clos e to ,
S uch degree s .
CHAPTER V III
TH E O CC U PATIO N
THI S is to b e j ud ged from the House and the 6 th
planets therein together with the S i gn on its cusp
, .
The S i gns have affinity with those thing s r uled

b y the Houses to which they correspond as [I to ,
the 3 rd House 3) to the 5 th etc, , .
The planets have their own sign ifi c a tio n s

S a tu rn has relation to minerals and heavy bodies ,
lead etc
, .
J u p ite r to legal affairs ecclesiastical matters , .
M a rs to fire and iron fightin g the military pro , ,
f e ssio n .
The S un to gold ; civic di gnitaries the C ro wn and ,
its officers ambassadors etc

, ,
.
V e nus to a r t m u sic a n d m a tt e rs of adornment

‘
.
, .
M e rcury to literature mercantile pursuits and ,
aff airs of traffic .
The M oo n to public employment c atering retail , ,
business etc ,
.
Ura nus to electrical and scientific pursuits and ,
also to a ff airs of propaganda ; the civil service and

positions of civic authority .
Ne p tun e to psycholo gical and mysterious pursuits ,
also travelling and seafarin g .
54
TH E OCCUP A TI O N 55
These are of course but loose and general S ignifi

, ,
cations The position of the maj ority of the planet s

.
will indicate wheth er t h e life work S hould be along -
spiritual mental social or mercantile lines and

, , ,
‘
the S ign on th e 6 th H ouse the position of its ruler ,
and the nature of any planet in th e 6 th House will ,
guide to a specific occupation .
F ixe d s ign s show inventors and producers ,
manufacturers .
Fle xe d signs purveyors and factors importers , ,
travellers .
C ardina l s igns retailers di spens e rs organi z er s , ,
and directors ; managers and th ose in prominent

positions .
S ome illustrations of k no wn cases may serve to

illus trate the m anhe r of interpretation
1 .
D in In the 6 t h House — a dairy company
manager .
in o n 6 t h House accountant in a
8 an -
large tea importer s: ’
3 on 6 t h and 5 — w riter on occult

.
II I n a
p hiloso p hy .
LI in 8 in the 6 t h—an e state agent .
A
in t h e 6 th w ith Q in 8 a stockb ro k er
,
-
.
;l
‘
on t h e 6 t h and L] in — a co m
.
p any
promoter
—
.
7 . on 6 th and 8 in g an exploration
p romoter .
10 . on the 6 t h w it h h in 8 —a coal m erc h a nt

—
.
,
i in h e 6 th rt i st
9 n
Q t
;
~a n a .
56 A MAN UAL OF OCCU L TI S M
Judgment on the choice of occupation must of
necessity be guided by a number of considerations ,
questions of aptitude education training sex etc

, , , , .
,
being all largely involved .
Taking all the planets in all the S igns we have

but 10 8 possible signifi c at io n s while there are ,
obviously more than that number of distinct occupa

tions It must therefore su ffi ce if the astrologer
.
can give some hint of the line along which the -

s
occupation may be found .
Thus fie ry sign s may denote S piritual thin gs

equally with those in which the element is the chief
agent .
A iry sign s all mental occupations from the clerk

to the professor of philosophy as well as all those
,
trades and occupations in which the pneumatic or

air force is employed even the lately developed
,
pursuit of aviation and aeronautics generally .
Wa te ry s igns may denote the social or emotional

side of business and all trades in which the watery
,
element is chiefly employ ed as in navi gation laundry

, ,
work the manufacture and sale of beverages paint

, ,
ing etc
, .
E a r thy s ign s m ay denote the manual and practical

occupations equally with those I n which the products
,
of the earth mining agriculture estate development

, , ,
and S imilar occupation s are concerned .

C H A PT ER IX
MA RR IA GE
ON this most important of all questions depen d

many very vital issues Not only is the moral and
.
spiritual welfare of the contracting parties involved ,
but that also of successive generations .
It is not w ithin the scope of this treatise to con

sider questions of expediency or fitness or the deeper ,
psychological qu e st ions of fascination attraction ,
and destiny .
S uffice it to say that all horoscopes present them

selve s to the expert as either marriageable or
misogynous .
The in dic at iOn s of marriage are as follows

In a male horoscope the Moon (in a female the
S un ) being oriental i e in the S E or N W quadrant
,
. . . . .
,
and increasin g in distance from th e oth er lumina ry ,
shows an early marriage Oriental and decreasing

.
,
or occidental and increasing marriage at a more ,
mature age .
Bu t if occidental and decreas i ng I n di stance from

the other luminary marriag e will be deferred to a
,
period past t he prime of life .
V enus at a male nativity (Mars at that of a female )

57
58 A MAN UAL OF OCCU LTI S M
being afflicted by S a tu rn S h ows disap p o in
tions in early attachments ; by Uranus ,
attachment followed by enf orced breach ,
estrangement and rupture of relationsh ip

exceptional incidents ; by M a rs (V enus in a fem
case ) impulsive attachments of a passionate and
,
d angerous orde r ; by Ne p tune deceptions and se duc

,
tions impositions and fraudulent representations

, .
The lum inaries being in s quare or oppos ition to

one anothe r and V enus aff licted there will be no
, ,
marriage .
The 5 th House g overns all c onsiderations of love

affairs ; the 7 th House those of marriage .
S aturn brings about l oss of the partner by death ,
or it militates against happiness in marriage by

defects of nature by j ealousy coldness and su spicion
, ,
.
Uranus produces rupture of the marriage tie ,
divorce or separation and b y marked eccentricity

, ,
of the partner tends to disturb the relationship

,
.
Mars shows licence freedom f requent quarrels

, ,
and lack of forbearance and self control It f re -

.
quently leads to violence and fatality .
Neptune deception and in sidious hurt The .
partner is a ffl icted mentally or has unnatural a n d

perverted appetites and desires The partner may .
have a legal tie already and generally has a h istory

,
.
In female horoscopes w e substitute the (9 for the

D and Mars for V enu s ; but in other respects
,
j udgment is made for both sexes alike .
Happiness in marriage is shown by the 6) being

96 0 1 A D ; and by 2 o r L1 w ell aspected being
‘
, ,
C H A P T ER X
P O R GE N Y
TH E 5 th House and the 1 1t h (bein g the 5 th from
the 7 t h ) the 4th House and the l 0 th are re garded
, ,
in this matter The Moon g overns the maternal

.
capacity and the 4 t h and 5 th Houses are those

,
which give succession .
In a male horoscope the 5 th 7 th 9 th 1 1t h r e p re , , ,
sent the succession o n the male side ; the 4 th 6 th , ,
8 th l 0 t h on the fe m ale side

, .
In a female horoscope the 5 th 7 th etc denote , ,

.
,
dau ghters and the 4th 6 th etc sons

, , ,
.
,
The s e poin ts bein g duly noted see if the 4th 5 th , , ,
l 0 t h and 1 1t h are free from m ale fi c planets If s o .

,
and the Moon is in a prolific sign 5 lTL TU Z then there , , ,
wi ll be pro geny B u t if the m ale fi c s occupy any of

.
these Houses there w il l be some loss of progeny .
A b e n e fi c or the D well aspected in a fruitful

,
S ign lTL and

,
in the 5 t h House shows a large ,
family .
Lack of pro geny is shown by S aturn Uranus or ,
Mars in the 5 th House in a sterile si gn (T SI C )

, ,
or the D so placed in any House and afflicted b y

S aturn ; and usually S aturn denies succession alon g
60
P R O GENY 61
those lines indicated by its House according to the,
sex of the horoscope .
It has been argued that when children are born at

the same time the p otential of the horoscopes of
,
the respective parents operates for a difference of

fortune Thus if two women give b irth t o progeny
'
.
,
at the same time and one parent has 21 in the 5 t h

,
House while the other parent has b there at birth

, ,
the result may w ell be that one child will be properly

developed and nourished while t he other under the
, ,
maternal tradition of an evil S aturn will b e puny ,
and of weak vitality B u t this is an argument

.
which by the premises is not in fact in accord with

, ,
nature for when this diversity of fortune as re gards

,
progeny 1s shown in the horoscopes of di fferent

parents it will b e f ou n d that the pro geny are b orn
,
at times which develop influences in accord with

t h e p o t e n t ia l of the parental horoscopes .
Twins are generated by those in whose horoscopes

the D i s m a double bo di ed si gn H
-
or a ,
planet is in such a sign in the 5 th House at birth .
The phenomenon of twin births is a c omplete

argument for the truth of Astrology We have the .
cases of the Cloughs of P udsey the Webbs who

.
,
played the two Dro m io s in the C om e dy o f E rro rs ;

the famous Morrell twins and many others whose
,
lives were exactly parallel from birth onwards .
The case of John Hemming the ironmonger s son ’
who was born at the same time and in the same

parish of S t Martins le Fields as K ing George III
.
- -
,
proves that planetary influence is more significant

62 A MANUAL OF O C CULTI S M
than heredity F o r John Hemming s fath er died
.
’
and he succeeded to the b usiness at the same time

that George II died and George III came to the
throne They were both similarly afflicted by tem
.
p o ra r
y loss of mental fac ul ty ,the y had the same
number of children and they died on the same day
,
and nearly at the same hour .
It is to be observed that there are two kinds of

twins : m o n o v a t e s an d b io v a t e s Mo n o v a t e s are
.
born from a double fertilization within the same

'
amnion while b io v a t e s are born from two distinct

,
ova In the latter case we may look for a great

.
diversity of faculty and development .
The fact that two children born at di ff erent ti mes

of the same parents brought up under exactly
,
similar conditions and fed at the same board

, ,
develop along widely divergent line s goes to show ,
that heredity may count for something but that ,
p lanetary influence counts for a g reat deal more .

C HAP TE R XI
TR A V E L L I NG
TH E signs of travelling are as follows

The maj ority of the planets in cardinal and com
mon signs (otherwise called movable and flexed ) ,
or alternatively many planets ln an gles and cadent

, ,
Houses show travelling

,
.
The c irc um st anc e o f travelling is j udged from the

’
3rd House for s hort (inland ) j ourneys and from the -
9 th House for voyages and long j ourneys .
If the m ale fi c planets are in these Houses j udge ,
evils w ill befall of the nature of the planet as S a turn ,
delays impediments privations M a rs hurts and

, ,
disputes fighting fires etc ; Ura nu s a breakdown

, , , ,
sudden calamities mechanical defects etc ; Ne p tun e

, ,
ambushes plots betray als frauds treacheries

, , , ,
.
Wh en m ale fi c planets occupy these Houses it is ,
not good for the subj ect to travel .
By re garding the threatening planet and the

nature of the sign it is in (fire air water earth ) you , , , ,
may predict the exact nature of the danger B u t .
if the b e n e fi c planets are in t h e 9 th House benefits ,
will arise from foreign travel .
63
64 A M ANUAL OF O CC ULTI S M
Wh ere there are no planets placed regard the so ,
nature of the rulers of the signs on their cusps the ,
aspects they receive and j udge as if that ruler were

,
actually in the House itself Thus if no planet is .
in the 9 th and the sign on the cusp is Vj C ap

,
’
then look to S aturn s position and aspects

’
.
the 8 th House and afflicted there is dan ger of de ,
in the 2n d well aspected gain will follow a lon g

, ,
dence abroad ; and so of the rest .
Observe that S a turn always demands the time

consideration He does nothin g quickly but he
.
,
rewards patience Ura n u s on the other hand acts

.
, ,
without warning either in rewarding or despoilin g .
M a rs alway s exacts a tussle and yo u must w ,
strenuously and fi ght hard for his best g ifts Ne p t .
favours a scheme or plot and dearly loves ,
diplomat .
These interpretations m ay be read into 0

s e ctions of the book of life They do not spec .
or solely apply to travellin g .
P lanets well aspected especially b e n e fi c pl

,
in the 1 st 4t h or l oth Houses promise success

, ,
land of one s birth Th e allurements of f

’
.
travelling should in such case be ignored T .
matter has much bearing upon the question

emigration .
C HA P T ER x11
F R I E ND S A ND E NE M I E S
TH E Moon or Mercury well aspecte d will give

many friends ; b e n e fi c planets in the 1 1t h House ,
or the ruler of the l 1 th House well aspected the ,
same . The G) in good aspect to the D alway s gives

many favours and general success throu gh friends .
The case is quite otherwise if yo u find these sign ifi

.
c at o rs badly aspect d or m ale fi c planets i n the 1 1t h

e
H o use Judge of the e ffects b y the nature of the
.
planets involved as well as their aspects

,
.
The 7 th House shows rivals and open enemies ,
opponents in business etc ; but the 1 2th House

,
.
shows secret ene mies .
Male fi c planets in the angles of the horoscope

show many contentions and fatal disputes B e n e fi c s .
there denote abundant success through the support

of adherents and friends .
S Y M P ATH Y A NTI P A TH Y
A ND
It will be found that persons whose horoscope s

are in disagreement wi ll inevitably quarrel or oppose
’
one another s interests ; wh ile those whose horoscopes
are in agreement will mutually assist one another
and evince consistent good will -
.
65
A MANUAL OF O CC ULTI S M
S ome of these relationships m ay be loc alized by
reference to the positions of the b e n e fi c and m ale fi c
planets in a horoscope Thus if 72 be in W
.
’
it
will follow that any person born on or near the l st
of April in any year will have the G) S un at his or
her birth in the same place as this S aturn and this
,
is quite su fficient cause for him w hose S aturn it is

to avoid all persons born on the 1 st of April .
The Q in one horoscope on or in g ood aspect to

the in another will warrant a close friendship
, .
When 3 in one horosc ope is on Q in another and ,
they are of opposite sexes a dangerous passion may

,
be developed .
Nothing perh aps in the whole sy stem of astrology

, ,
can answer more clearly and satisfactorily to the

test of experiment than this matter of sympathy
and antipathy as shown b y the relative positions in
two horoscopes Did space permit it would be
.
,
possible to display the foundations of ev e ry great

feud or war whic h has set man a gainst man and
involved the fate of whole empir es and the lives of
thousands of men It is significant that everythin g
.
is to be traced back to the r e lative positions of

the planets in the horoscopes of the rival kings
or rulers .
68 A MANUAL OF O C C ULTI S M
As re gar ds the nat ur e of the si gns : F ie ry s ign s
have relation to electrical heat and other pheno
,
mena Airy sign s are related to human ag ency

.
,
atmospheric phenomena gaseous e ffects Wa te ry

, .
s ign s have relation to the passional phases of human
life and to the watery element as well as to in flam

, ,
mable oils petrol etc E a rthy s igns have relation

, , .
to mining disasters matters relatin g to the earth

,
and its products coal and o ther minerals earth

, ,
quakes and seismic e ffects generally .
A violent death is not to be predicted when the ,
Q) or D b ein g thus a mic t e d b y the m a le fi c s there

,
is
an interposin g ray from one of the b e n e fi c planets
4 or $3 for
,
then there will be in tervention and
succour An in terposing r ay proceeds from any
.
planet which throws a b e n e fi c aspect to the luminary

so that it falls between the m ale fi c aspect and the
l um inary This is called abscission b y the old
.
authors It is too often overlooked b y modern

.
exp onents .
S E C TI O N I V
TH E ME AS U RE O F TI ME
C HA P TE R I
O N D I R E C TI O NS
A V AR I E TY of methods have been employed by

astrologers at diff erent periods and in various
countries to ascertain the precise time at which the
port ents of the horoscope will find fulfi lment .
The Hin dus divide the whole life into p e rigds

called da sha s and these are a gain divided in to b u k
,
this and these again into a n ta ra rn s ; so that a very

,
close calculation may b e made by this means The .
method however is based upon the S ayana system

, ,
of astronomy which reckons from the fixed s tar

,
R e v ati F omalhaut ) and ignores the precession o f

the equinoxes The system is perfectly consistent
.
,
but it cann ot readily be applied to the E uropean

zodiac ; and it may be omitted fr om the exposition
without hurt to its integrity Th e student is referred
.
to the work of P arash ara kno wn as P aras ha ra

Hora for full instruction as to the methods of this
system and some account of it will be found in
,
my M a nua l of A stro logy .
The Chaldeans — and after them the Arabians

69
took account of the progress of the planets and the

lumin aries aft er birth accounting each day after
,
birth as a year of lif e ; and from the asp ects formed

between the celesti al bodies b y their progress am on g
themselves and as re gards their positions at the
birth they j ud ged of the course of events This
, .
system is the one most in vo gue among astrolo gers

to day and rightly regarded it is undoubtedly a
-
, , ,
ready means to a correct forecast of the time and

nature of events .
Claudius P tolemy took account chiefly of the

risin g and culmination of the bodies b y the rotation
of the earth on its axis whereby the bodies are
,
carried round the earth forming aspects to the

radical positions The measure of time used by him
.
w as that of R ight Ascension accoun tin g 4 mins or , .
1 degree to each yea r of life .
The analo gy between this system and that of t h e

Arabians is that the S un s pro gress in the z odiac
’
after birth is at the approxim ate rate of 1 d e gree

per day which is accounted as 1 year of life while
, ,
1 degre e of R i ght Ascension is also equal to 1 year

of life .
P lac idu s confirmed this system and added th e

mundane aspects bringin g the b odies to the cusps
,
of the Houses to form directions to the Ascendant

and Midheaven and to proport ionate distances
,
from the meri dian or horizon to form mundane

aspects to other bodies not at birth upon the cusps .
In this syste m o ne third o f the semi arc of a planet
- -
was accounted equal to one House and half the ,

TH E ME A S UR E OF TIM E 71
semi arc was equal to an aspect of

-
the semi
square .
The method I have advocated for many years "
and have consistently used in practice is as follows

Fo r each year of l if e add one day to that of birth
and set the figure for the hour and place of birth .
This w ill give the progressed Midheaven the pro ,
r e sse d Ascendant and the progress e d place of

g
,
the S un The aspects formed by these to the

.
plan e ts at birth and in the progress will constitute

P RI MAR Y DI R E C TI O N S and the aspects formed by the
,
progressed planets to the Midheaven Ascendant , ,
S un and Moon in the R adix will also b e included in

this category .
This system h as t h e advantage of calculating the

Arcs of Dire c tio n an d equatin g them b y the S un s
‘ ’
tru e motion at the sam e time If it be contended.
that the arcs thus obtained are not as exact as those

obtained b y spherical trig onometry inasmuch as ,
they only measure to the nearest ye ar of fulfi lment ,
I would ask how many Arcs calculated by the latter

method fi n d fulfilment at the fractional p art o f the
'
year represented b y the minutes of a degree 2

Zadkiel (C ommander Morrison R N ) frankly
,
. .
admitted that the influence o f an Arc of Direction

extended over a considerable p erio d and that it w as
brought into eff ect b y th e concurre nce of S ec o ndary
or L un a r Dir e ctions transits an d eclipses
l , .
Hence the experiences of Zadkiel and myself are

entirely in accord and I have no hesitation in saying
,
that all th e pe rio dic ch anges in lif e may be a cc urately

foretold b y reference to the P rimary Arcs for med b y
the diurnal progress of the planets ; while the precise
time of the crises and the specific nature of events
may be known by reference to the radical import
of the planets involved and to the aspe cts formed
,
b y the Moon in it s pro gress .
The P R I M A R Y D I R E C TI O NS therefore will c om

, ,
prise
1 Aspects formed by the progressed M idhe a v e n
.
to the radical and progressed places of the

planets .
2 S im ilar aspects formed b y the progressed

.
A sce n da n t .
3 . S imilar
aspects formed b y the progressed S un .
Aspects formed b y the progressed planets to

the Midheaven Ascendant S un and Moon in
, ,
the R adix .
It is thus possible at any time to determine the

influences operatin g in a horoscope Let us take .
those of K ing George V in the year 1 9 1 1 .

C HAP T E R II
E X A MP L E OF D I R E C TI O NS
P rimary Directions in Horoscope 3rd June , ,

1865
at a m . London .
,
.
Arc for 19 1 1 46 days or July ,

19 , 186 5 .
h m s
. . .
Midheaven at noon ,
18 7 -
7 49 10
Time S ince noon 13 18 0
E quation for 1 3 h 1 8 m at . . 10 2 12
Midheaven progressed 21 9 22
Thi s gives the Mi dh eaven in m 1 5 and reference to °
the Tables of the Houses for London S hows the

Ascendant then to be in II The S un s progressed ’
position is 5
We thus h ave the following p ositions
Midhe ave n P
°
— ab X (D R P — ad
. 15 -
g Q
D Q R , ad tgl DR .
Asce ndant P II 21 —a b
— ad A R R R
b
°
. A g ,
z.
Q , g .
S un P
°
—A " R a b G R
.
<
5 27 b ,
.
S un R H l2
.
°
—ad $ P, ab z
XQ P
- - .
N
[ o te . P rogressed p
-
‘
sit io n s are marked P, and

R adical positions R ] .
It will be seen then that the M idhe a v e n is d e part
, ,
ing from a good aspect of the Q R and in 1 9 1 1 will

be exactly in O pposition to Q P .
Observe that 2 5 at birth was on the cusp of the

2n d House and has a distinctly financial bearin g
,
on the destiny Here it opposes the Midheaven

. .
Hence there w ill be disquietin g developments in

financial circles and the fiscal position will be such
,
‘
as to create anxiety throughout the country .
Taurus w h e re in Me rc u ry was at birth rules Ireland

, , ,
and Leo where the planet is situate in the progress

, ,
rules Australia We may thus expect many govern

.
mental anxieties to arise from these parts of the

K in g s dominions
’
The A S C E ND ANT is approachin g the good aspect

of S aturn which wil l contribute to the a dvantage
,
of the Q ueen at a near date The semi square .

-
—
of Venus about the same time namely three years ,
—
hence will brin g a bereavement ; while the opposi
tion o f Jupiter a year later will produce lo sses through
the interference of a forei gn P ower and troubles
in S pain (ruled b y S a gittarius ) .
The S U N is in semi square aspect to its own place

-
,
which disposes to discord in the capital and threatens

some unpleasant incidents in the course of short
j ourneys There m ay also be dissensions among
.
the K ing s relatives B u t the approach of Venus

’
.
to the radical place of the S u n will largely operate

to forfend a gainst all evils of health or estate and ,
will in due course c ontribute to the K ing s revenue ’

.
Th e P R I MA R Y D I R E C TI O NS are the refore main ly

C HAP T E R III
S E C O N D AR Y D I R E C TI O NS
has been seen that the P rimary Directions

IT
g ive the g eneral tone of the life at a n y specified peri o d

without definition of time or circumstance The .
features are lacking ; we have only the general out

lin e It is to the Lunar Directions the aspects
.
,
formed month b y month in the Moon s pro gress ’
after birth that we must look for the details o r at

,
—
least some considerable part of them .
The method emp loyed in calculati n g the S ec ond

a ry or Lunar arcs is as follows
Take the a ge of the subj ect at the commencement

of any secular year in y ears months and days
, , .
C all the years da ys multiply the months by 2 and

,
call them ho urs and the days b y 4 and call them

,
m inute s Thus
.
y rs mths . da y s .
19 1 1 1 1 l st Jan 19 1 1 .
, .
1 865 6 3 3rd June 1 86 5 , .
45 6 28 45 y . 6m . 28d .
2 4
1 3h . 5 2m .
Add birth time 1 18 a . m .
1
15 10 a . m .
To convert 12 0
3 10 p . m .
1
Wh e n this amo un t e xc e e ds 24 h o u rs , s ub t r a c t 24 h o urs a nd
a dd o n e day t o t h e fi rs t c o lu mn
S E C O NDAR Y D I R E C TIO NS 77
We therefore add 45 day s to t h e date of birth ,
m
’
and take the Moon s place at p on that day . . .
From 3rd to end of June 1 8 6 5 27 day s and ,
1 8 more will make 4 5 days 1 8th July .
The D s longitude on this day at m H

’
p . .
°
The D s diurnal motion at this t ime is 1 3 4 5
’ ’
° ’
which we divide by 1 2 1 9 nearly S ince 1 day ,
1 year and 2 hours

,
1 month The D s dir ectional .
’
°
motion is therefore 1
We can now prepare a table for the whole year ,
as follows filling in the D s aspect s to the radioal

,
’
and progressed places of the planets thus ,
19 1 1 .
° ’
Jan . 4 [1 14
Fe b . 5 , 23 9( -
$ R
March 6 32
/
7 41
/ /
May 8 5 0 Q ] 72 R T P fi
Q 2
[ G
—
/
June 9 59 A Q RT
TJ
l d s P IT 1 2
July 11 8 P
/
®
A 9
5 3
Aug . 12 17 6 6 R B 3 I
S ept . 13 26 96 8 P
Oct . 14 35
Nov 15 44
Dec 16 53
The positions of the planets are marked R (ra di cal )

and P (progressive ) t ogether with the si gns they are,
in and th e House they occu py in the R adix or P ro

gress,as t h e case may be .
It w ill be ob served that th e D completes its ‘

course and comes again to its o wn pla ce at the
nativity after 27 days when it begins again to form
,
the same series of aspects to the radical places of t h e

planets as in the preceding revolution B ut the
, .
solar aspects will have changed entirely and do not

repeat themselves for 3 6 5 y ears Meanwh ile the
.
P ro gress has carried the planets into di ff erent S i gns ,
and in some cases into di f ferent Houses also ; givin g

them new meaning s and sign ifi c at io n s and bringing
them into play under entirely different relative
conditions .
The interpretation of the above directions must

h ave reference to the nature of the planet the House ,
and the S ign it is in Thus .
F e b rua ry will be li kely to develop martial stimulus ;

increase of military stren gth ; success in arms if
eng aged at this time ; successful proj ects and enter
prises ; colonial expansion and development ; mili tary
honours m ay be given to a P rince of the R oyal
House .
M a y bring s some dan ger of indisposition to the

Q ueen At this time treaties are rescinded or
.
impeded .
J u n e brings naval honours development of the

,
marine interests ; favourable interventions ; some

pageants festivities or celebrations ; a prosperou s
,
and enj oy able period ; felicitations and pleasures .
J u ly is unfortuna te for j ourney s by short sea

pa ssage The health of H is Maj esty may show
.
S igns of reaction ,
inducing a feverish habit and
s o me passin g derangem e nt of t h e di gest ive organs .
S E CO NDA R Y D I R E C TION S 79
August give s O pportunity for beneficial changes

and j ourneys honours e cla t c onventions etc in
'
.
, , , , ,
the c ap ital .
S e p te mb e r gives activity chang e of v e nu e success , ,
ful j ourneys beneficial administration of property

,
.
It is particularly to be noted that the Lunar

Directions are subsidiary t o the P rimary Directions
in force and can only O perate to produce marked
,
{
effects when in agreement Wh en c ontrary to the .
P rimaries they may pass without appreciab le varia

(
tion of the fortu nes The tendency indicated by

.
the Lunar Directions will however be suf ficiently in , ,
evidence to warrant at t ention even when at variance ,
with the P ri maries A good period under P rimary

.
influences cannot ho w ever b e ne gatived b y S econd

, ,
aries but only temp orarily interrupte d during the

,
sway of the adverse Lunar c onfiguration .
Thus in the R oyal Horoscope we find 2 c omin g

’
t o the S un s radic al pl ce and in June 1 9 1 1 D <5 5 2
a ,
.
The summer s eason will there f ore in every w ay

comport with the auspicious influence of the planet
Venus .
Ob serve also that in e very case what is not

, ,
potential cannot be expressed from the horoscope ;

nor can the planets dispose after a manner that is
unnatural to the subj ect but in all cases t he planet
,
evoke that which is potential in the ch aracter and

possible in the circumstances It is in this sense .
that character and environment S hape our destiny

under the action of the celestial modifiers .
CHAP TE R IV
TR A N S I T S A ND E C LI P S E S
TH E Transits of the maj or planets 213 P51 h 4 3 , , , ,
are of great importance They are capable of in ter

.
f e rin g with the fulfi lment of any measure of goo d

or ill fortune in dicated by the Direction s The .
”
most marked e ffects follow upon transits that are

in agreement with the nature of current directions .
The word effects is of course privile ged a better

term is indications The reason for this is that
.
a planetary transit or direction m ay operate in the

horoscope of a man to indicate the death of his
father but it cannot be said with any S how of reason
,
that it caused the death and it is an open question

,
whether similar positions in the horoscope of the

parent can be said to cause his demise It is .
,
at all events a point on which I am not prepared

,
to dogmatize .
B e that as it may it is certainly the fact that the

,
transits of the maj or planets are of S in gular value

in this system of pro gnostics .
The points of the horoscope to be regarded in

this connection are the longitudes of the Midheaven ,
Ascendant S u n and Moon both in the R a di x and

, ,
80
T R AN S IT S AND E C LI P S E S 81
P rogress .The portent of such a transit must be

derived fro m the House in which the planet may be
found : (a ) in the R adix when the transit is over a ,
radical point ; (6 ) in the P rogress when it is over a ,
progressive point .
The sta tio nary p o sition s of the planets when

coinciding with the significant poin ts of the horo
scope are of special S ignificance and have in the ,
estimation of most astrolo gers a value equal to ,
P rimary Directions .
The transits in the R oyal Horoscope for 1 9 1 1 are

as shown in the f o llo w m g schedule
Jan .
Fe b .
‘
3 <5 MC
.
— Ig1 3 G P
. .
March
April 72 R — LI R
3
6 Q . .
3 G .
May
June 3 ‘
5
< Asc .
Aug . Igl
(9 G P .
S ept .
Oct .
6 stationary 6 GR .
Nov 131
(9 G
P
Dec
The most important of these are IgI (g) Q P which ,
is in operation more or less throughout the year ,
and the stationary position of Mars close to the Q) R

in October These will undoubte dly have a disturb
.
ing e ffect on t h e aff airs of the E mpire and as f is

h ,
C
in apricorn it is to be judged that India will be
G
82 A MANUAL O F O C C ULTI S M
the scene of many political upheavals A ff airs .
S tate will not go smoothly in the P eninsula ,
the political insurgent will be to the fore F oreign .
a ffairs denoted b y the 9t h House of the P rogress

, ,
will give rise to many Surprisin g developments .
The transits of Mars are less S

of short duration but the s ta tio nary position is
,
critical and disposes to strained relationships and

frequently threatens war .
In the interpretation of planetary positions in a

R oyal Horoscope it will be found that a more than
personal signification must be given to them ; for the
horoscope of a king is repres entative and focal as
much as personal .
E CL I P S E S
Th e lunations or conjunctions and of syzyge s
the luminaries recur on the s ame day every 1 9 years .
During the course of the year the lunations gain

from 1 0 to 1 1 day s upon the calendar B u t whether .
a new Moon constitutes an eclipse of the Q) or a full ,
Moon an eclipse of the Moon will depend upon the

,
near ness of the Moon to its Node at the time The .
node is that point where the D s path crosses the

’
ecliptic or path of t h e S un .
From most ancient times I t has been known that

eclipses recur after a period of 1 8 years and 1 0 to 1 1
days C onsequently we know that the eclipse
.
,
cycle is carried forward throu gh th e zodiac at

the rate of about 1 0 in 1 8 years and that th e
°
,
same eclipse recurs after an interval o f 6 5 1 years ,

84 A MANUAL O F O C CULTI S M
l unation falling in good aspect to the radica l
of the planets S hows a successful month the h e n ,
comin g from the source indicated by the Ho

in which the planet was at birth .
The positions of the planets at a lunation in r e g

to the positions of its S ign ifi c at o rs (M
Ascendant S u n and Moon ) at birth are of
, ,
importance and can freely be used as in di c at

,
of events during the succeedin g month .
TH E D I UR NA L H O R O S C O P E
This scheme is set each day for the hour an
m I n u t e of the birth so that the S un i s alway
,
the same distance from the meridian as at the

nativity .
The day s on which the m ale fi c planets cross the

angl e s of the fi gure and those on which the radical
,
places of the m ale fi c s S imilarly a ff ect the meridian

and horizon m ay be regarded as of evil import
, .
Thus on the 6 th May 1 9 1 0 the diurnal horoscope

, ,
of K in g Geor ge V S howed 1 5 on the Midheaven ‘ °
and at : 5 rising Mercury on that day was in I I

°
.
and therefore in opposition to the Midheaven ,
°
while the place of Mars at birth in at 5 was setting
in opposition therefore to the Ascendant
, ,
diurnal horoscope At the birth of K in g

.
3 was in the 5 th House which is the 8 th fr ,
l ot h
,
showin g the death of the father .
E dw ard died near midni ght of that day ,
sad event was very clearly anticipated

In K ing E dward s di urnal horoscope for this date

’
1
2
was culminating and the radical place of g}
fi
(Neptune ) was settin g .
The diurnal horoscope may often be used to correct

the time of birth when it is not accurately known
, ,
providin g that the exact date of some important

event is given .
Thus on the 24t h June 1 9 02 when K ing E dward , ,
was suddenly taken ill on the eve of the proj ected

Coronation ceremony Mars in the diurnal horoscope
,
occupied the Midheaven and from this circumstance ,
— taken in conj unction with the recent eclipse of the

’
S un in Opposition to the S un s place at the nativity
the opinion was freely expressed that the intended
ceremony would not take place then .
P L A NE TA R Y C O NJ U NC TI O N S
Great importance is attached to the c onjunctions

of the maj or plan ets and it may be said that n o
,
phenomenon of this kind ever happens but it i s

attended b y great mutations and upheavals in the
political reli gious and physical worlds
, .
The conj unctions of Uranus with Neptune rec ur

in about 1 7 0 years the last bein g that in C apricornu s
,
in 1 821 and t h e next which will occur in the S ame

, ,
sign does not happen until 1 9 9 1

, .
The conjunctions of IR and 12 occur every 4 6 t h

,
—
year havin g taken place in 1 80 6 8 5 1 5 2 and 1 89 7
1 , ,
the next being in t he S ign H in 1 9 4 2 .
Those of S aturn an d Jupiter occur eve ry 2ot h

year e g 1 8 21 1 8 4 2 1 8 6 1 1 88 1 1 90 1 1 9 21
, . .
, , , , , .
The conjunctions of t h e t w o m ale fi c planet s 5
‘
and 3 which being of oppos ite nature appear to

,
produce very remarkab le and violent effects are ,
worth more than cursory notice They almost .
constitute c hr onometric or historical pointers .
Thus in November 1 8 9 7 the re was a conj unc tion

O f 72 and 3 in g the rulin g s ign o f S pain and in
‘
l
'
April of the followin g y ear S pain was involved in

the disastrous war with the United S tates of Americ a ,
by which S pain lost th e last of its forei gn possessions

in the P hilippines and was heavily indemnified .
In December of 1 8 9 9 another conjunction occurred

and the follow ing year K ing Humboldt of Italy
was assassin ated P redictions of the Hispano
.
American War and of the R e d Hand in Italy may be

found in C oming E vents for the years 1 89 7 and
1 89 9
. At the end of 1 9 0 1 there was a conjunction
in the sig n C apricornus .
In December 1 9 0 3 the conjunction took

in Aquarius the rulin g S ign of R ussia and
, ,
immediately followed by the R usso Japanese -
in which R ussia represented by Aquarius w

,
“
defeated .
In Decemb er 1 9 0 5 the conj unction again fell

Aquarius and was followed b y the terrible m
,
on R e d S unday at Moscow .
In December 1 90 7 the conj unction was in P isc

the rul in g si gn of P ortug al which was followed
,
the assassinati on of the K ing and C rown P rince

P ortugal o n Feb ru ary 3rd 1 90 8 , .
In December 1 9 09 the conjunction t

.
for killed and prisoners In Holland .
,
also ruled b y C ancer there were at this time terrible

,
inundations predicted b y Mr C ulpepper

,
. .
Dating back to 1 6 44 when the conj unction fell

,
in Aries the rulin g s ign of E n gland we find the

, ,
decisive battle of Marston Moor the bloodiest of the ,

‘
whole R evolution in E n gland in conformity with the,
canons of astrolo gy and the re p u t at io h of the m ale fi c

planets .
It will be seen that the conjunctions of the two

m ale fi c s produce sharp and sudden calamities ,
and as c h ro n o c ra t e rs t h e v form a valuable

feature in celesti al revolutions After 26 5 years .
t h e conjunction occurs about the same place in the

zodiac Thus in parallel we have the following
.
1 6 4 4—1 9 0 9 C onjunction in Aries

1 6 4 6 —1 9 1 1 Taurus
1 6 4 8—1 9 1 3 G em ini
1 6 5 0 19 15
-
C ancer
etc .
The effects o f the conj unctions of S aturn and

Jupiter last for 20 years those of S aturn and Mars
,
only two years ; ye t the latter are mostly to be feared ,
because of their calamitous nature their swiftness ,
and violence Great mutations and reforms are

.
inau gurated under the influence of h 5 L1 reli gious ( ,
and sectarian strife generally follows upon LL3 and

the e ffects are seldom prolonged beyond two years
in any one place while the influence of b ; 3 is of C
‘
a violent revolutionary and san guinary nature

,
.
It is rather in the hope of stimulating research

than of presenting a complete case for astrology that
the fore going notes have been introduced to thes e
pages Michael Nostradamus was a master of
.
planetary periods and his prophecies are among the

,
most remarkab le on record .
C O NC L U S I O N
The doctrine of nativities as outlined in the fore
oing pa es will be found one of the most f a s c m a t in g
g g
and instructive studies to which the mind of man can
be directed Needless to s ay the conviction of
.
,
the fact of interplanetary action and that of planet

a ry action in human life cannot fail to open up
new views of life and to stimulate deeper thought
concernin g the nature origin and destiny of the
,
soul of man .
Other aspects of the same subj ect are to be found

in S ta te A s tro logy which concerns the destiny of
,
nations and kin gdoms the condition of the people

, ,
and matters of a general or public interest This .
phase of astrolo gy is chiefly con fin ed to the wr iters

of almanacs .
As tro me te o ro lo gy is now in a position to success

-
fully compete with any system of weather prediction

based upon observations Althou gh inadequate to
.
an unerring forecast of the daily changes of weat h er ,
it can with great accuracy afford remarkable predic

tion of sto rm p e r io ds and e a rthqu a ke s and has the ,
advantage of not bein g limited to current observa

tions The s to rm and earthquake periods are given
.
90 A MANUAL O F O CC ULTI S M
in the almanacs a year in advance of the event .
The general condition of the w eather over any period

can also be given with much accuracy .
H o ra ry A s tro lo gy is a method of divin ation based

upon the fact of planetary influence and the sym,
pathy existin g between the constituent s of the

system to which we belong A fi gure is set for the
.
moment of a discovery the receipt of a letter or

,
message the ori gination of any a ffair whatsoever

, ,
or the moment of an impression concernin g whic h

the mind may be anxious The positions and aspects
.
of the planets are then consulted with a view to

determine the outcome of such a matter It was .
used as a system b y William Lilly with much success ,
and is still in vogue to some extent among modern

astrologers .
’
To know the measure of one s soul in the unive rse ,
to see the end from the beginning and to follow the

,
line of least resistance— this is in brief the purport

, ,
of Astrology .
92 A MANUAL O F O CCULTI S M
been addicted to drink Thus it is said .
that time Hi and Ho corrupted their pri

and abandoned themselves to wine ; they n e gle c
their offices forsook their posts began to conf
, ,
the celestial laws and i gnored their functions .
The eclipse w hich took place on the 1 2th

,
21 5 4 B C at about
. .
,
a m at P ekin is of
. .
,
able astronomical interest bein g probably t ,
phenomenon of the kind on record It is confirm .
by Tan g in the K a ng— M u h The E arl of Yin .

,
this ti m e proclaimed the virtue of ancient rulers

observing celestial portents and it is evident t h ,
they re gulated their affairs b y astro

They reco gnized the scientific importance of eclipses
and made extensiv e O bservations of the effects which
followed them They argued from physical e ffects
.
to moral causes and from physical causes to moral

,
e ffects and held a rational astrology as an essential

,
part of their system of government In the B abylon .
ian E mpire also and in India under the s ss the

, ,
astrologer held an important position in the affairs

of state ; and even at this day when civilization pre ,
tends to be above the need of such instruction we ,
find the R aj as still retain their court astrologers .
A capable people can deal with difficulties as they

arise but a wise nation would already be prepared
,
.
The day cannot be far distant when this fact w ill

be b rought home to us for as the astute Lord
, ,
B e ac o n sfi e ld once said Nothing is so likely to

,
happen as t he unexpected .
In Mundane Astrology judgment is made from the

MUNDAN E A S T R OLO GY 93
positions of the celestial bodies in relation to any

‘
place or centre of government at the time of an

eclipse a great planetary conjunction a lunation
, , ,
or a solar ingress .
The Houses bear the same general si gnificance

as in the horoscope of an individual t h e l s t House ,
being representative of the people and the 1 0 th of the

government ; the other Houses being in similar man
ner related to the same thin g s as are denoted in the
individual case Thus .
The l st House denotes the p e o p le and their general

condition and mood .
The 2nd House home trade the money market

‘
.
,
The 3rd House : railways bridges canals postal , , ,
service .
The 4th House : farming and mining interests ,
the crops coal pits quarries etc ; the Opposition

, , ,
party in P arliament .
The 5 th House the rising generation playhouses ,
sports speculative interests the S tock E xchange ,
dependencies colonies etc

, ,
.
The 6 th House : the public health sanitation , ,
food stuffs ; the national service army navy and

-
, ,
police .
The 7th House : foreign relations ; belligerent

p owers ; treaties .
The 8th House : deaths probates losses , , .
The 9 th House : foreign lands ; the high seas ;

ecclesiastical and le gal professions ; religious a ffairs .
The l oth House the K in g and his g overnment ;

the prestige of the country .
The 1 l t h House : the E xchequer ; allies of the
country .
The 1 2th House prisons asylums and h ospi tals , ,
places of detention the enemies within the camp .
If the fi gure is drawn for a solar in gress the posi ,
tion and aspects of the S un must be taken chief

notice of especially those aspects about to be
,
formed If a lunation the Moon s place is the centre

.
,
’
of influence as also at an eclipse At a planetary

, .
conj unction the position and aspects of the con

j oined bodies must be taken chief notice of .
All eclipses fulfil their portents within a year , but

the e ffects are frequently endurin g According to .
ancient writers the effect of a solar eclipse will

,
endure for as many y ears as there are digits of the

solar disc obscured the totality bein g 1 0 digits
, .
The mag nitude of a solar eclipse being 7 5 0 the effects ‘
will b y this computation endur e for seven and

, ,
a half years S im ilarly the magnitude of a lunar

.
eclipse will determine the number of mo n ths the

e ffects will endure .
B u t I have found that a crisis directly due to t he

eclipse and signified b y it will take place at a point
, ,
of time denoted b y the distance of the luminary

from the horizon it last crossed The time of sun .
rise bein g known and als o the time of a visible

, ,
eclipse the di fference in hours and minutes divided

,
b y 2 will g ive the number of months and day s from

the date of eclipse when t h e crisis occurs If the .
eclipse be invisible because of it takin g place at

night the time of sunset must be taken from the
,
events in the hi story of our times have been
accurately predicted by modern astrolo gers . The
present writer is responsible for the successful
prediction of the followin g amon g other events
within recent times — The Chino Japanese War and
-
the outbreak in K orea ; the R usso Japanese War

-
:
the Hispano American War ; the Leiter Wheat C o r

-
ner ; the R ussian insurrection ; the S outh African

War ; the P ortu guese R ebellion and the revolution
a ry attempt to end the dynasty by the assassinatio n
of the K in g of P ortu g al and the Crown P rince ; the

General E lection in the United K in gdom and the
Tariff R eform e ff ort in 1 9 1 0 ; the death of K ing
E dward VII .It is within our experience also
that the prin ciples of astrology have been success
fully applied to S tock E xchange fluctuations
other speculative matters ; and indeed there are
‘
departments of life in which astrology cann ot

employed with conspicuous success .
H O RA R Y A S TR O L O G Y
THE name horary (ho ra an hour ) is given to that
,
section of the science which 1s applied to the resolu

ion of questions which may ari se l n the mind .
A figure of the heavens/

is erected for the time at
hich news comes tO h an d concernin g which the
,
mind is troubled and anxious to know the upshot ;

or the time a proposal is made ; or that at which a
p erson sets forth upon a j ourney or a S hip sets sail ;

the moment a thin g is discovered to be lost and ,
similar contin gencies In all these schemes

.
e l st House and the risin g S ign denote the querent

consultant and the matter inquired ab out must
,
e referred to its proper House as set forth in the

,
recedin g first section .
The position and aspects of the ruler of the S ign

cc upyin that House and its relations to the ruler
g ,
f the Ascendant enable us to determine what

,
s the disposition and course of the matter and how
t will affect the consultant .
In the pursuit of this branch of astrology ,
ume ro us boo k s have been w ritten since the days
97 H
of William Lilly who wrote in the 1 7t h century
, ,
under the patronage of S ir E lias Ashmole his ,
famous work C hristia n A s tro lo gy S uch works being

.
always accessible to the student there is no need

,
to enter fully into an exposition of the principle s

of Horary Astrolo gy . The term s peculiar to this
s ystem clearl y indicate an Arabian origin and there ,
can be little doubt that the art was extensively

followed b y them to the exclusion of Genethli ac al
Astrolo gy which be gan to assume a coherent form
,
under the hand of Claudius P tolem y the famous ,
g geo rapher and astronomer of Alexandria who wrote ,
his Te tra b ib lo s (or Four B ooks on the Influence of

the S tars in the 3rd century A D Many exponents
. .
of astrolo gy prefer the horary method because it ,
allows fuller play to the intuitive faculty and is ,
less constrained b y the ri gid rules of art than the

more precise and scientific doctrine of nativitie s .
The whole s ystem of Horary Astrolo gy rests upon the

occult s ympath y existin g between man and nature ,
so that the same influences which dispose the mind

to the formulation of a question m ay be said to
determ ine its answer I am quite convinced from
.
experience that there is m uch that is both fictitious

and erroneous in Horary Astrology as expounded ,
and likewise that there is much truth in the

g en e ral statement that a fi gure of the heavens se t
for the moment of an initiation will de termine the

result
,
10 0 A MANUAL O F O C CULTI S M
CH I N E S E
A S TR O L O G Y
The Chinese divide the heavens into eight sections .
They draw lots b y means of reeds after the manner ,
of the g eomantic system there bein g twelve lots

, ,
eight of which are included in the fi gure and four are

stationed at the cardinal points They then judge .
the fi gure according to the principles of astrolo gy ,
inasmuch as each of the s ymbols represents a certain

planetary influence and each section of the figure
has relation to certain departments of civil and
political life The more modern practitioners divide
.
the heavens into twelve parts correspondin g to the

twelve asterisms of the zodiac and employ also ,
the planetary bodies At best the method amounts

.
to little more than a process of divination with the ,
S igns and symbols as pointers to guide the intuition .
HI ND U A S TR O L O G Y
The Hindus employ the same signs and planets
as ourselves but they add al s o R ahu and K etu
, ,
’
the Dra gon s Head and Tail investing them with ,
S pecific influences and ascribin g a periodic rule to
them .
The si gns althou gh bearin g th e names equivalent

,
to ours are counted b y the natural asterisms and

,
not from the vernal equinox The S un s entry .

’
into Aries (M e sham of their zodiac ) takes place

about 20 day s after our equinox which is the ,
amoun t due to prece ssion since the two zodiacs

coincided in the year A D 4 9 8 . .
OTH E R M E THOD S 10 1
The signs and planets are as follows
m Me sh am J) ; Tul am
8 V rish a b h a IL
T V risc h ika
H Mith u n a 1 Dhan
‘
u
K at akam 10 Maka ra m °
g S imha K umbha
111
2 K anya Mina
S Guru or B rihaspati , K uj a or
‘
1
2 ani ,
Ll g
‘
S B udhan
‘
A ngarika , Q S urya , 2
5 ukra , C "
D Chandra , 52 R ahu , 23 K etu .
The measure of time is e ffected by counting from

the asterism or n a ksha tram occupied by the Moon at
birth E ach asterism is under the rule o f one of the -
nine planets and the 27 lunar st ations are thus

,
”
apportioned to them at the rate of three n aksh a t ram s

° '
of 1 3 20 each to every planet The whole circle .
is d ivided into 1 20 years the su c c e ss1v e periods ,
of the planets being $2 1 8 years L1 1 6 years 72 1 9 ,

.
,
years C 1 7 years 25 7 years

,
20 years 6 6 years
, , , ,
—
D 10 years 3 7 years in all 1 20 years Thus
‘
.
,
if one were born when the Moon was in the middle

of the asterism ruled by 52 which has a period Of
18 years he would continue under that
,
star for
9 years and in his 1 0th year would enter the period
,
of Lt (Jupiter ) under whose influence he would

,
continue for 1 6 years and then pass to S aturn .
There are many ramifications of this sy stem and ,
those who would study it more closely are re c o m

mended to read B riha t J dta ka by Varab a Mih ira , ,
P ardshara hora and the other works o f P arash ara and

-
,
102 A M ANUAL O F O C CULTI S M
the B riha t S amhita together with other works more
,
or less accessible to E n glish readers and on sale ,
at most Indian booksellers ’

.
ALER I D A R I E S
There are Alf ridarie s of all sorts in existence each ,
adapted to the system from which it is evolved .
An example of one from the Hebraic s ystem is

appended The idea involved is that the celestial
.
b odies rule the life in rotatio n beginnin g with the

,
D. The rotation of the planets in the reverse

direction at th e same time bring s another influence
to bear upon the life so that at any given period
,
of the life there is a double influence in force the ,
combined e ff ects of which are said to determine the

course of events in a general sense .
A diurna horoscope in this sense is one that

is generated from the S un whose position is supposed
,
to be on the upper meridian ; and consequently

an
y birth takin g place between noon and mi dni gh t
is under the S u n and takes its origin from the left
side of the Alfridary while on the contrary a Moon
, ,
or nocturnal birth is one that happens between

midni ght and noon and this takes its origin
,
course on the ri ght side of the Alfridary .
The planets j ointly r ulin g a ny year of the life

taken account of according to the ir natural relati
in the astrological system and particularly in
,
horoscope of the birth and prognostications

,
made in accord with these indications .

of man in his play As Yo u L ike I t where ,
melancholy Jacques is represented as sayin g

All t h e wo rld
’
s a s t ag e ,
And all the m e n an d wo me n me re ly p laye rs

Th e y h av e t h e ir e x it s an d t h e ir e n tran c e s,
An d e ac h m an in his t im e p lays m any p arts ,
His ac t s b e ing s e v e n a ge s .
These ages are enumerated and are found to c ,
S p o n d to : D the in fant C the school boy 9 ,

-
lover 3 the soldier LLthe j ustice 73 th e le an

,
‘
, ,
slippered pantaloon endin g the story with ,
senile paralytic It will be noticed that the S un

.
period is omitted the manly ambitions generated,
under the solar influence bein g given definition and

focus in the period of Mars .
Accordin g to P tolemy a person born with Aries ,
risin g would be under the Moon and Mars for the

first year then the Moon and Venus then Moon and
, ,
Mercury and end th e f o u r th year under the double

'
influence of the Moon The fifth year would come .
the S ixth under C s double

’
under C and Q
influence the seventh year under C and 52 the
,
eighth under C and g and so on each year being ‘

,
governed primarily b y the planet of the period

and secondarily b y the ruler of the profectional
risin g S i gn Alf ridarie s exist amon g the Hindu s and
.
Mohammedans and are in much repute with the

,
Arabs .
P A L M I S TR Y
C HAP TE R I
TY P E S O F H AND S
TH E science of P almistry with its two divisions

,
of Cheirognomy and Cheiromanc y properly belon gs ,
to the domain of Occultism in the sense that has

already been in diéate d Although in its popular
'
application it is certainly to be reg arded as a m e ans

of divination yet it is not dependent on the use of
,
the automatic faculty but upon an e m p 1r1c al know

ledge o i the si gnificance attach ing to the lines of
the hand In this w ay it m ay be re garded as upon
.
the same foun dation as the science of Astrology ,
and althou gh it cannot be said to have attained

the same degree of de velopment it does n e v e rt h e
,
less hold a b o na fide certificate for a certain measure

o f reliabi lity and therefore warrants our considera
,
tion The outlines of the subj ect will probably

.
suffi ce to indicate the methods employed and will ,
serve to guide the student in his critical work of

testing and p ro v mg the claims of P almistry for
himself .
C H E I R O G NO M Y
is that section of P almistry which deals w ith

character and aptitude The shape texture .
,
development of the hand as a whole is c

for this purpose .
The Thre e P r imary Typ e s of hand are the C onic

the S quare and the S patulate
, .
The C o nica l hand is that in which the

tips are tapered and pointed the nails bein g ,
fi lb e rt shape smooth and well arched

, The .
from the root to the tips gradually taper ,
fl esh bein g smooth and the j oints s mall and

covered .
With this type of hand there is to be found a

of art and adornm ent ; the subj ect is fond of
lish m e n t s and possesses what is known as the
,
style The tastes are refined and the nature

.
,
sensitive to environment The beautiful and .
lookin g the pleasant and a greeable at t rac

,
rather than the useful and practical The S .
is little suited to the work a day world or - -
strenuous compet ition of busines s lif e S por .
no attraction for h im and even dom e stic d ,
are p ositivel y repulsive Yet the owner of the .
conical hand will be found to make much of c ul ture ,
refinement and g ood taste You will find many .
of these people amon g the c ultivated flowers of social

life and I n the artistic professions
, .
The conical hand denotes neatness order lo ve , ,
of music flowers scents brightness gaiety beauty

, , , , ,
.
10 8 A MANUAL OF O C C ULTI S M
patience are the chief business qualifications and ,
this type of people are capable of gain in g their ends

b y industry and stayin g power rather than b y -
ambitious ventures or b y a to ur de fo rce They have .
few friends but frequently have lon g friendships

,
for one or two of a con genial type .
They make g ood lawy ers accountants bank ers , ,
and secretaries and many of this type are to be found

,
in the educational world and in responsible positions

of the commercial world .
The S p a tula te hand is known b y the spade like -
tips of the fingers which broaden out from the

,
j oint to the extremity the hand bein g fairly large

, ,
firm and muscular .
P eople with this type of hand are possess

practical ambitions They are essentially
.
o f fact
-
and utilitarian and are ,
workers with a turn for mechanics and handicrafts

, .
They are possessed of much determination and grit ,
and can undertake pioneer work When music al .
they prefer instrumentation and the practical side ,
of art also attracts them the applied arts being ,
especially followed b y them S culpture m echanic s .

, ,
engineerin g buildin g and architecture claim many

,
representatives of this type The char .
honest and strai ghtforward the manner ,
and sometimes churlish These people are .
of forcing their w ay forward and makin g

a gainst all obstacles They are not inventors
.
,
are very capable agents and exploiters of

ideas They stand for the practical as against
.
TYP E S OF HAND S 10 9
tical but nevertheless they would be of little

,
se without the man of ideas behind them .
M I X E D T YP E S
It necessarily follows that beside the Three
P rimary Types indicated above there are many
hands which are a blend of two or all of them There .
are hands in which one finger is square another ,
conical and the other S patulate In a case like this

,
.
a little attention should be given to the p re do m i

nating type an d also the thumb should be consulted
,
.
The thumb bein g short I n the first phalanx from the ,
tip downwards towards the root shows a not very ,
pronounced type of mind S uch show aptitude in .
carryin g out the i de as and orders of others ; but to

be inventors and leaders there must be a good length
of the first and second phalan ge s A small thumb .
—Or at least a small first phalanx with a mixed

—
type of fi n ge rs indicates a useful servant but an
indi fferent m a stér and one of no ori ginality or
,
decision Versatility I s the chief asset of this mixed

.
type o f hand and such people frequently chan ge

,
their pursuits and take on a new set of ideas with

every fresh suit of clothes or chan ge of circumstance .
What is called the P hilo sop hic hand is known b y

the protrudin g j oints of the fin gers t h e lon g middle ,
finger and the well developed thumb It shows a

,
-
.
love of philosophy a desire to know the reason

,
why
” ”
and the w ay how a thin g happens It is .
concerned chiefly with the imponderables in Nature ,

11 0 A MANUAL OF O CC ULTI S M
and has a taste for metaphysics logic and a n , ,
m ethod s .
They love truth for its own sake and

on account of its harmonious elements They .
S incere
,
care little for the practical aspects of life ,
and are quite content if they can find a reason f or

thin gs as they are They are dis c overers of laws
.
and principles elaborators of philosophical systems ;

,
they are very rarely pract ical or ambitious in a

worldly sense ; but are capable of dyin g for the sake
,
of their beliefs .
The P sychic h and is allied to the conical but the ,
palm is long and narrow the flesh soft and t he ,
fin gers lon g and tapering ; while the thumb is very

pointed and small but well formed
,
.
Thi s hand denotes a sensitive impressionable ,
nature fin e nervous organism q uick intuitive m i nd

, ,
and an impractical idealistic temperament Mediums

,
.
,
psychometrists and inspirational writers are the

most representative of this type It is frequently .
found allied to the artistic te m perament and it ,
has all the flexib ility weakne s s and enthusiasm Of

,
the psychic nature The type of hand referred

.
to is well portrayed by Burne Jon e s in h is fi gure -
studies .
FI G 1
. .
the whole art of P almistry is based upon as trologica

l
interpretations.
The S ign ifica tio ns of the Mounts answer closely

t o the astrological natures of the planets which are
TH E MO UNT S OR C U S HION S 113
said to rule them ; and it may be said that the

characteristics of the several planets are found to
be prominent features l n the character of a person
in whose hand they are found to be well developed .
Thus J up ite r well developed denotes generosity ,
sympathy love of j ustice conviviality nobility of

, , ,
disposition and a true sense of reli gion

,
.
Defective— The nature denotes an absence of

these qualities .
E xcessive — B ombast pride ostentation e x trav a

, , ,
gance and carelessness .
S aturn well developed shows caution carefulness , ,
watchfulness sincerity strong attachment patience

, , ,
and thrift .
—
Defective There is a tendenc y to self regard only -
,
and a lack of the ste rling qualities which inspire

confidence in others The person is not reliable
. .
—
Excessive I t disposes to misanthropy melan ,
ch oly and miserliness There is a tendency to re ligi

.
ous mania when t his mount exceeds that of Jupiter .
The S un well developed shows di gnity sincerity , ,
magnanimity love of the fin e arts hi gh ideals

, , ,
great pr oj ects .
De fi c ie nt — The nature is proud a ssuming f re , ,
quently vain and a tendenc y to rely upon appear

,
anc e s rather than upon faculty and attainments ,
and to play the showman upon all occasions .
Excessive— I t denotes a tyrannous autocratic and ,
despotic character very proud and haughty an inor

, ,
dinate ambition and love of power It is o ten shown

f .
b y a love of pa eants and great shows and when a r t

g ,
is follow ed it f avou rs t h e c olo ss al and magnificen t .

11 4 A MANUAL OF O CCULTI S M
M e rcury well developed shows eloquence ,
for the pursuit of literature activity ale , ,
g ood memor y , desire for knowled g e in ,
A commercial life is followed with much in t e llig

and industry .
—
Defective I t denotes a mean querul ous and ,
fretful nature small mental power a tendency to

, ,
sp y and play the part of a busybody a picker up ,

-
of un considered t rifle s g enerall

,
”
y cunnin g and
loqu acious .
—
E xcessive The mind runs to the material side
of Nature for all its evidence ; there is a self assertion -
and positiveness which is seldom warranted Th e .
nature is prolix and concerned with more things

than would fill an e n c yc lo p mdia or stock a museum .
S uch people make a business of their hobbies o r a

S lavery of their business .
The M o o n well developed S hows a romantic ,
ideali st nature fond of travellin g with a di sposition

, ,
to the mystical marked intuitive power sentimental

, ,
and sometimes dreamy .
D e fi c ie n t —I t denotes a prosaic and worldly nature ,
not affected b y the consciousness of the large r

life or the greater universe and quite devoid O f the
,
emotional and imaginative powers .
E xcessive — The nature is fantastic give n to ,
exag geration hyp ersensitive vacillatin g fic kle and

, , ,
apt to be carried away b y the emotions Unless .
S aturn controls and the Head line is well defin e d

t here is dan ger of insanity .
M ars well developed shows coura ge strength , ,
prowess freedom fran kness and well de fin e d ambi

, ,
-
CHA P T E R I I I
TH E P H A L ANG E S , E TC .
TH E three sections defined b y the j oints of the

thumb and fin gers are called phalan ges The rela .
~
tive len gth and shape of these have to be taken

into consideration when estimatin g character and
aptitude and chiefly the form and development o f
,
the thumb .
The first phalanx of the thumb which holds the

nail denotes the will power ; the second phalanx
-
stands for the intellect ; and the third which sub ,
tends the Mount of Venus denotes the animal part, .
When therefore yo u fin d a lon g and broad upper

, ,
phalanx yo u m ay be sure there is plenty of dete r

,
mination and self reli ance ; and if it is supp orted b y

-
a long second phalanx the intellect will be a de q u

to supplement the e ff orts of the will and to
it into useful channels .
A well developed thumb is inseparable from

-
hi gh order of intelli gence but a poorly dev ,
thumb is an indication of small capacity an ,
stant restless and credulous character

, ,
swayed b y the opinions of others and pos ,
little ability in the management of his own

Fin gers that are short and thick S how an
116
TH E P HALAN GE S 117
manner and wilful nature with very little foresi g ht ,
or diplomacy B u t long fingers especially if smoo th

.
,
and slender denote a character that is subtle diplo

, ,
matic and astute attentive to details and capable

,
of fine sse With a short first phalanx of the thumb

.
,
this type of hand shows deception .
A person who carries his thumb in the palm of the

hand with the fin gers bent loos ely over it is one
, ,
whose nervous energy is fast exhausting itself or

whose intellect is embry onic This is the custom .
of idiots of paralytics and babes As individuality

,
.
asserts itself the thumb is unconsciously protruded

more and more and in the person of concentrated
,
ambition it is found most frequently folded over the

fingers or standin g ou t at a considerable angle from
,
the hand .
Fin gers that are well fleshed and thick at the base
S how a luxurious natur e and if they lie compact,
and close together they S how a selfish and self

indulgent nature and frequently a sordid character
, .
Fingers that have plenty of air space between -
them denote a careless and extravagant nature ,
but frequently inquisitive If allied to an in t e lle c .
tual type of hand in which the knuckles are large

,
and the second phalanx of the thumb well developed ,
this separation of the fi ngers shows a keen inquirin g ,
mmd
Observe that the shorter and broader the hand
the more dogged and resolute the character will b e ;
while long S lender hands denote a more subtle
, ,
shifty and diplomatic mind with more suavity and ,

1 18 A M ANUAL OF O CC ULTI S M
politeness of manner but less stab ility of character
, .
R u gged hands S how a rug ged and strai ghtforward

nature a love of Nature and an abhorrence of
,
social O bservances a short and rugged hand

denotes a blunt outspoken and determined char
,
acter B u t smooth hands S how fin e sse suavity and

.
,
g entleness with
,
a love of refinement and a respect
for le s co nv e na nce s ; while if they are long and smooth
there will be subtlety and craft in the character
These points bein g duly considered the character ,
of any mixed type of hand can be readily estimated .
A thorough understandin g an d recognition of the

primary types is of course essential to a proper
, ,
use Of the art of Cheiro gnomy .
We may now turn our attention to Cheiromancy

,
,
which appears to claim more general i nterest ,
inasmuch as it purports to define the circumstance

and incident of life by the lines and markings
of the hand C haracter as defined b y Cheirognomy
.
, ,
must alway s be the dominant factor in human

destiny b u t environment and inc ident as limiting
, ,
the expression of character in certain directions

and at the same time developin g it in others is ,
certainly also of great importance .

downward direction almost to the percussion
the hand .
3 The H e a r t L in e which arises on the p e rc ussi

.
,
of the hand below the Mount of Mercury and

c e e ds across the hand terminating on or beneath
,
the Mount of Jupiter .
4 The Gir dle o f V e n us which be gin s between

.
, .
the in dex and second fin gers and follows a curved

course embracing the Mounts of S aturn and the
,
S u n and t e rm l n at in g between the third and little

fin gers .
5 The L in e o f F a te which has its rise at the

.
,
near to the end of the Life L ine and pro ,
sharply upward throu gh the palm termin ating ,
the Mount of S aturn .
6 The H e a lth L in e which has its origin near

.
,
wrist by the Mount of the Moon and pr

upwards to the Mount of Mercury .
In addition to these there are found in some hands

the L in e of F o rtun e arisin g in the palm of the hand
,
and runnin g upwards to the Mount of Apollo and ,
the M a rriage Lin e which arises on the percussion

,
of the hand and crosses the Mount of Mercury .
F inally there is the B race le t consistin g of one or

, ,
more lines across the wrist immediately below

the natural fold of the wrist at the root of the
h and .
The meanings of these lines will vary according

to their length definition and colour When
,
.
t ra igh t sin gle deep and red they indicate all the
, ,
b est elements of charact e r and destiny .

TH E LINE S 1 21
FI G 2
. .
The Head Line governs the intellect the mental

,
attainments and natural aptitudes

.
The Heart Line governs the affections and e mo
tions and has an equal influence with the He ad
,
Line over th e f o rt un e s
'
The Life Line shows the constitution vital powers , ,
and the probable duration of life .
The Fate Line denotes the course of destiny that ,
which is inevitable the stages and crises of life

, .
The Line of F ortune has relation to honours ,
ambition s and attainments .
The Girdle of Venus denotes the degree of sensi

b ility possessed b y the person .
The Health Line S hows the condition and prob

able course of the health .
The Lines Mounts and types of fin gers are all

,
S ho w n in the diagram on pa ge 1 21 which will serve,
as a general guide to the reader in the study o f

the observations made in the course of this brief
exposition .
In some abnormal hands the lines are S O widely

di ff erent from the general dir ection as to be hardly
reco gnizable In others one or more of the chie f
.
li n es are entirely ab sent while in others ag ain there

,
are additional lines S ome of these abnormalitie s

.
will be considered in due course ;

first phalanx of the thumb and a twin or sister
,
line running parallel to the Life Line and continuing

beyond it then the crisis m ay be overcome by will
,
power o r the care and protection of somebody nearly

affected such as a sister lover wife or mother
, , , .
A line comin g from the thumb cuttin g through ,
the Life Line and proceedin g to the palm of the

hand denotes a great i llness or misfortune which
,
produces a S hock to the system .
A line cuttin g throu gh the Life Lin e and proceed

in g on to the Mount of S aturn shows a fatal illness ,
and is especially dan gerous in the cas e of a

approachin g maternity at the age indi
point at which the line cuts the Life
taken in estimatin g the a ge at which the
is threatened .
A line from the Life Line to the Mount of Jup

shows an ambition realized success and fortune
,
.
A line from the Life Line to the Mount of the

‘
S u n gives fame celebrity and honours

,
.
A line to the Mount of Mercury denotes suc

in commerce or science the achievements of
,
intellect.
In a general sense the Mount of Venus with

encircling Life Line repr es en ts the vital
and the lines comin g away from it denote the
of energy alon g which the vitality will be ut
and expended .
A line going out on to the Mount of the

from the Line of Life sho ws fantastic p u
frequent t rav e ll
'
TH E P R IN C I P AL LIN E S 1 25
but in an artistic hand it may dispose to pub licity

’
and a passin g recognition of the person s facul ty .
2 . Th e H e ar t L in e .
The Heart Line denotes the quality an d direction

of the a ffections the condition of the vital organ
, ,
and the interests in which the mind is centred .
When well defined and unbroken S in gle and free ,
from blemish it shows a sin cere nature with healthy

,
affections and a nature that will command friendship
and esteem The longer the line may be the stronger

.
are the aff ections .
When terminating beneath the Mount of Apollo ,
the a ffections are inconstant and the nature vain ;

and if the Heart Line extends to the Mount of S aturn
there will be greater constancy but a fatality or
disappointment attachin g to the a ffections ; the
disposition i s then apt to be marred by j e alousy and
mistrust .
When the Heart Line extends to the Mount of

Jupiter the affections will be true sincere and
, ,
enduring and if the line forks on to the Mount it

, ,
shows energy strength of purpose and successful

, ,
pursuit of con genial proj ects .
When the Heart Lin e turns down beneath the

Mount of Jupiter and touches the Head Line the ,
aff ections will be under the control of the mind

.
,
and the nature will hence be more practical ; and if

at the same time it throws a branch upward to the
Mount of Jupiter there will be a successful issue to
,
the fortunes after marriage .

1 26 A M ANUAL OF O C C ULTI S M
If the Heart Line j oins the Head L ine beneath '
the Mount of S aturn it is an au gury of a sudden if ,
not a violent end

,
.
Many small lines cuttin g ac ross the l ine of t he

Heart shows some functional disorder of the corre
s p o n din g organ of the body and if the Heart Line
“
is broken beneath the Mount of S aturn or puncture d

b y a purple or dark blue pitmark it shows seizure ,
or a serious heart attack which m ay end fatally .
3 . Th e H e ad L in e .
The Head Line bein g lon g clear and well marked ,
shows good intell ectual ability and capacity to cope

successfully with the problems of life The Head .
Line is best when startin g from a conjunction with

the Life Line for it then S hows that the intellect
,
is not dissociated from feelin g and refin ement .
When separate from the Life Line it denotes a rash

and impulsive nature sometimes egotistical and
,
too full of self c o n fi de n c e

-
.
A line fallin g from the Head Line and going on

to the Mount of the Moon shows a tendency to
m ysticism and a love of exploration and discovery .
A line g oin g from the Head L ine on to the Mount

of Mars shows ra shness a headstron g character
, ,
of feve red imagination and great enterprise .
A line risin g to the Mount of the S u n from this

line denotes honours an d success throu gh the use
of the intellect .
A line j oinin g the Head and Heart Lines denote s

an intellect th at is swayed by the affections to a
duration of lif e The co un t of years is made on the
.
Fate Line from its ori g in near the wrist upwards .
Wh ere it crosses the Head Line is at the age of 35

years At the Heart Line the 5 0th year is reache d
.
.
By subdividing these sections any required age may

be discerned The con di tion of the line at various
.
stages shows the fortunes at the corresponding

period of the life .
The F ate L ine may not always start from or near

the wrist but m ay begin on the Mount of the Moon
, ,
or on the Life Line the Head Lin e the palm or

, , ,
even the Heart L ine .
When risin g from the wrist in a straigh t and un

broken line direct to the Mount of S aturn it shows
success in life and a good fortune .
B u t if stopped at the Head Line it denotes an

error of j udgment or wron g use of the intellect
will mar the pro gress and spo il the fortunes If .
stopped b y the Heart Lin e there will be a romantic

episode in the li fe or a fatality arising out of an
a ff ection or friendship .
When starting on the Mount of the Moon the

F ate Line denotes success through the influence of
women or the reverse accordin g to its o wn character
,
is tic s .
If risin g in the Life Line it shows a Fate th at is

withi n the power of the in di vidual to possess or to
relinquish .
Wh en rising in the palm of the hand between the

Head and Heart Lines in what is called the P lain ,
of Mars it shows many crosses and struggles ; b ut

,
TH E P R IN C I P AL LIN E S 1 29
if it runs well up on to S aturn it will give success

at last .
The Fate Line to be at it s best should be long ,
clear and unbroken and S hould reach the root of

,
the second fin ger but should not go beyond it

, .
Wherever the F ate Line begins to take a clear

and unbroken course at that age there will be a
,
turn in the fortunes for good and this w ill be con ,
tinue d as lon g as the F ate Line continues clear and

unaffected by cross lines .
’
Endin g on Jupiter s Mount it shows succ ess
through a happy marriage or an inheritance When .
ending on S o l it shows honours at the end of life .
5 . The H e a lth L in e .
This line is governed by the functions of the di ges

tive organs and liver in the same way as the Heart
,
Line is related to the heart and the Head Line

to the nervous system .
When clearly marked and unbroken it S hows good

health especially if it rise near the Life Line without
,
touching it and proceeds direct to the Mount of

Mercury .
In some hands it is absent but it may then b e ,
concluded that the health is good if the Life Line

is clear and long .
A broken Health Line or an island (see Chapter V I )

or a black spot or other discoloration of the line ,
shows a serious illness frequent attacks of dyspep s ia

,
or gastritis and general debility

, .
A line from the Health Line cuttin g into the Head
Line S h ows nervous disorders .
A line from the Health Line c ro ssin g t h e Heart

Line denotes palpitation heart a ffection , .
A line from the Health Line cuttin g into the Life

Line denotes venery or excess of the passions in a
degree detrimental to health ; the constitution is
a ff ected b y dissipation and pleasure seekin g This -
.
pa r ticularly in a soft hand with a small first

phalanx to the thumb .
6 . Th e Ring o f Ve n us .
The Girdle or R in g of V enus wherever present , ,
S hows sensibility It is never absent from the

.
poetic hand In the intellectual hand it shows

.
touchiness and a worryin g disposition and in the ,
vital hand it shows restlessness When extendin g .
on to the Mount of Mercury it denotes the study of ,
Occultism and a mind that is controlled b y the

,
mysterious .
The sole meaning of the Girdle of V enus is

se n s ib ility i e
, capacity to suff er or enj oy
. . .
7 . The L in e o f F o r tu n e ;
This line starting from a variety of places is

, ,
identified by its eventual course to the Mount of

the S un which it crosses
,
.
It is the index of fame honour merit especially , , ,
in art literature and science

,
.
Wh en clear deep and straight it d enotes good

,
132 A MANUAL OF O CCULTI S M
also j oins the indications there will be divorce
,
publicity .
Two marriage lines S how a second attachment .
The evidence of several lines frequently S I gnifi e s the

free lance or coquette .
The Line of Marriage j oinin g the Girdl e of Venus

so as to contin ue it to the percussion of the hand is
a S ign of idealism which marriage does not satisfy .
S mall lines runn ing up from the Marria ge Line

to the root of the little fin ger indicate progeny the ,
number bein g shown b y the number of such b ar s
or stri ae B u t these are not necessarily the progeny

.
of one union as m ay be the case where two marri age s

,
are denoted .
When the Line of Health rises on the Head Line

in a cross formin g a star with the Head Line ,
it is a S ign of an anchorite ; and if the Life Line at

the same time is exceptionally near the root of the
thumb S O that the Mount of Venus is small there
, ,
wi ll be no marriage or yet a barren one

, .
9 . The B ra ce le t .
T hi s is also called the R a scette It consists of .
lines below the fold of the wrist (i e where the . .
palm j oins the wrist ) and parallel to it Wh e n .
clearly marked it is an additional S ign of a long and

useful life .
Lines comin g up from the R ascette to the Mount

of the Moon and crossing it to some extent denote
voyages These lines m ay be seen by compressing the
.
h and .
TH E P R IN C I P AL LIN E S 133
The meaning of such a line from the Bracelet

may be known by tracing it to its destination .
To Jupiter it is h ighly propitious ; to S aturn S inister

, ,
and dangerous ; to V enus likely to result in a pleasant

,
association or profitable alliance ; to th e S un ,
honours ; to Mercury good business and a possible

,
inheritance or windfall .
Ge n e ra l No te .
Never read the lines singly but take t h em in their

,
he aring upon one another and in relation always ,
to the type of hand you are dealing with .
It is very seldom that we fin d a strong Head Line

in a purely psychic hand but it would be by no ,
means remarkable if in a hand of this type the Line

of the H e ad is alt Oge th e r ab sent B u t it should .
not thence be inferred that the intellect was a

minus quantity Madame H P Blavatsky had the
. . .
pure psychic hand with but a sin gle line stretchin g

across the palm Of her intellectual powers there
.
can be no doub t while her spontaneous frank

, ,
and ingenuous nature was altog ether su ggestive of

a strong Heart Line P ossibly Head and Heart
.
were in unusually close allianc e .

C HA P T ER VI
I NCI D E NTA L MA RKS
BE S I D E the principal lines to which refere nce

has been made in the precedin g chapter it will ,
be found that there are a number of other markings ,
either isolated or a ff ectin g the lines themselve s .
These are in the nature of Triangles C rosses S quares, , ,
S tars Grilles Islands and S pots

, , .
The Gr e a t Tria ngle embraces the space enclos e d

by the lines of Health L ife and Head When the
, .
Triangle is well formed distinct and embracing a

,
large S pace the person will be of a generous and

,
upri ght nature with wide sympathie s .
When small and formed b y broken lines the ,
character and disposition are cramped and me an ,
and the life is far from fortunate The health also.
is more or less badly a ffect e d .
When there are crosses within the area of the

Trian gle there will be many misfortunes in the life ,
and the person will occasion many enmities .
A S tar therein shows eventual success .
Lesser triangles ab out the hand S how success in

that department of life which is related to the line s
or mounts a ff ected Thus a triangle formed on the
.
base of the Head Line shows intel lectual achieve

meri ts .
good fortune by a b old stroke On Mars it denotes .
violence On the Moon a dangerous voyage pr a

.
,
’
serious trouble throu gh wom e n danger from the ,
"
populace On S aturn a fatality b y violence On
.
, ”
the S un the evils of inordinate pride On Venus

, .
,
disappointment in love On Mercury c upidity .

,
and cunning .
A star on the principal lines must be regard e d as

a menace to that aspect of the life which is denoted
by the line so affected : as the Life Line the c on ,
s t itu t io n is a ff ected ; the Head Line there are mental ,
troubles ; the Heart Line social affairs are adversely ,
affected etc , .
The Grille (see Fig 1 on Mount of Venus ) is an

,
. .
I ndication of excess When found o n any mo .
it augments the activi ty of the c o rre sp o

characteristic Thus .
A Grille on Jupiter shows extravagan ce and b o m

bast ; on S aturn great misfortune and a chequered
,
career endin g in trouble ; on the S un inordinate

, ,
love of display consumin g pride ; on Mercury

, ,
peculation theft cunnin g ; on Venus disappointed

, , ,
affections ; on Mars dan ger of violent action frenzy

, ,
and woundings ; on the Moon a w an de rm g restless , ,
nature and sometimes exile

, .
When in the palm of the hand traversed b y the

Line of Fate it indicates much misfortune especially
, ,
at that period of the life denoted by the position o f

the Grille as measured on the Fate Line .
I s lands are formed by the S plitting and j oining

IN C I D E NTAL MA R K S 137
togeth er again of a line in its course Th e period .
embraced b y this Island w ill be one of dangerous

sickness diffi culty mental incapacity social ostra
, , ,
c ism imprisonment etc

,
according to the line on
,
.
,
which the island is formed and the attendant

indications .
A small Island shows a diffi cult crisis ; a long Island

denotes a protracted period of misfortun e or sickness .
An Island is frequently the S ign of hereditary

’
disease either functional or organic
,
If on Jupiter s .
Mount it S hows lung disease ; on S o l the heart m ay ,
be affected ; on S aturn the liver ; on Mercury the

, ,
organs of speech or brain are affected ; on the Moon ,
the stomach is deran ged .
Frequently the Island shows some mystery attach

ing to the career I f at the ori gin of the Life Line
"
.
,
there is some mystery re garding th e parentage ,
and if at the same time the F ate Line has an Island

at itssource it is an indication of illegitimac y
,
.
When the Island is formed on any of the principal

lines it will denote danger to the health and fortunes
,
from some malady or abuse of the faculty or organ

involved or denoted by the line .
An Island o n the Head Line S hows o cclusion of

memory amnesia loss of mental faculty for the
, ,
period involved A double Head Line whose ex

.
tre mitie s meet so as to enclose a continuous Island

will therefore denote c h ronic nervous a ffection and
with concomitant signs (such as degenerate thumb
and a chained Line of F at e ) will denote insanity .
An Island on th e Line of Health sh o ws a long

A MANUAL OF O CCULTI S M
illne ss debility and a delicate constitution
, , .
on the Mount of the Moon at the beginning of

Health Line it shows somnambulism or medium
,
S hip
, arising out of an abnormal condition of the
sympathetic nervous system .
S imilarly judgment is to be made in r e sp e c

,
other indications of the Island b y its co ,
with the mounts or lines On the .
sometimes denotes imprisonment e sp e c i ,
Mount of Mercury has a g rille or cross upon
S p o ts
are always blemishes and denote crises and
dangers They are generally red or purple but
.
,
sometimes black They show dangers a ff ecting the

.
Life Head Heart etc according to the line or

, , , .
,
mount a ffected If on the F ate L ine a grave and

.
,
sudden crisis in the fortunes On the Life Line .
a spot frequently shows hurt or injury to the eyes ,
sometimes blindn ess .
Thus b y a consideration of the typal form of a

,
hand its mounts lines and incidental markings

, , ,
you m ay certainly define much of the characte r

and destiny of an individual B u t nothin g is ab so .
lute in the future C hanges are continually taking

.
place not only in the main lines of the hand but also
, ,
in the incidental markin gs of the mounts Thus .
if yo u tak e an impression of th e hand at a ny period

of life and another successively on every anniv e r
,
sary it will be found that in the space of a few years

,
a great di ff erence is to be detected You will se e .

TH E T H A U M A TU R G I C ART
C HAP T E R I
TH E KA BA L A
TH E Te le sma , or Talisman was anciently held in

,
great esteem b y the Thaumaturgists We fi nd .
evidence of its universality in C hina India E gypt , , ,
and amon g the S emitic nations the Greeks and ,
R omans as well as among the ancient populace of

,
C entral Am e rl c a P er u Australasia and the islands

, , ,
of the P acific Indeed there seems every reason

.
,
to believe that the t e le sm ic art was in vo gue among

the Atlanteans and b y them transmitted to the
,
survivin g nations It comes to us in a modifi ed

.
form f rom the Hebrews who adapted it to their ,
own theolo gical system A brief account of the

.
principles of this art and its methods can hardly

be omitted from a work of this character inasmuch ,
as it is directly connected with Astrolo gy and the

P ower of Numbers and forms a very important
,
part of the equipment of the magus .
Necessarily the mind of man must have concrete

methods of expression ; the most common and limite d
of which is language S ymbolism on the othe r
.
,
h and may be regarded as the common lan guage

,
140
TH E K A B ALA 1 41
of humanity as also it is that of the gods The

,
.
universe is a symbol ; so also is man C olour .

,
—
Number and F orm what are they but symbols ?
,
—
A circle a triangle a square a cross these are but , ,
,
letters in an universal lan guage the only natural ,
medium by which we can compel the notice of the

g ods S
. uch was the belief of the P y thagoreans and
the Thaumaturgists of ancient Greece .
The Ka b a la or secret interpretation is divided

, ,
into three sections : The Gime tria the No ta r ico n , ,
and the Te mura h It will be necessary to know these .
before enterin g upon the t e le sm ic art for nothing ,
1s brought to perfection in this art without the
magical use of names and numbers .
By magical use we are to understand something

I n distinction from natural use as the di fference "
between the supreme power of the creative will in

man and the inherent vegetative power of the soul
and of natural bodies .
FHst then let us examine the principles of the

, ,
Kabala Man is the subj ect of all magical c onsidera

.
tions as he is also the agent of all magical O perations

, .
The Kabalists divide Man into four principles

viz S pirit Mind S oul and B ody correspondin g
.
, , , , ,
to the four elements of Fire Air Water and ”

, , ,
Earth Of these the S pirit and Mind are F ormless

.
,
and the Fluidic B ody or S oul and the P hysical

Body are F ormative Yet there are three aspects .
o f the S pirit vi z Life Will and E ffort and three .

, , , ,
aspects of the Mind V i z P erception R eason and , .

, ,
Memory S o also the properties of the S oul are

.
three : Desire Imagination and E motion ; and of the

, ,
B ody three : Absorption C irculation and S ecretion

, , .
F o r I n one aspect Nature I S volatile in another fixed ,

,
and in another mutable .
Humanity consists of three orders Lapsed S ouls ,
E lementary S ouls and Demoniacal S ouls ,

We dis .
t in gu ish between the S pirit and the S oul The .
S pirit in itself is of Divin e origin a scintilla of some ,
S piritual hierarchy to which it is directl related

y
and from which it receives its energy and direction .
“
These imprisoned lights are related to De ity
throu gh the spiritual hierarchies to which they
severally belon g and of which they are the earthly
representatives .
The S oul on the other hand is not of Divine

, ,
ori gin but is derived mediately from the nature

,
essenc e through t h e Operation of the Human

Imagination o r — as in the case of the brute
,
—
creation b y Desire and the instin ctual sense .
Lapsed S ouls are such as have fallen from the ir

first estate or pristine nature and will by regenera , ,
tion eventually regain their lost heritage

, .
E lementary S ouls are such as have come into

human generation in the course of natural evolution
or by magical art and of these the S ylphides are such
,
as nei ghbour the human race most nearly Coming .
as stran gers into an atmosphere for which their

powers are not ye t sufficiently evolved they are born ,
as naturals simpletons and fools a con di tion whi ch

, ,
is successively improved during their human in

carnations Once entangled in the human system
.
1 44 .
nor end of days with whom Abraham talked as
,
recorded in the Genesis Melc hi zedek was in fact .

, ,
a presentation of the Christ a great and mighty ,
spirit in temporary human form then rei gning in

Chaldea over the sons and dau ghters of the
Magi .
B u t also there are those spirits of the nature of

Apolly on who are P rin ces of Darkness
”
, and ,
whose dominion is over those wanderin g stars f or

whom is laid up the blackness of darknes s for age s
”
upon ages These malevolent beings actin g unde r
.
,
the laws of their own nature do from time to ,
time manifest in h uman form for a more speedy

j udgment of the world They are the Caligulas .
and Neros of the world s history ’

.
The earth is therefore the theatre of a great variety

of different souls and is such because it is in e quili
,
b riu m between the Heavens and the Hells and in ,
a state of freedom where good and evil

min gle It is in truth the F ield of Ar
.
where must be fou ght out the great battle be

the P owers of Li ght and the P owers of
ness .
The K abalists mention S even Heavens an d S

Hells presided over b y the S even Archan gels
,
the S even P rinces of E vil The Archangels of .
S even S pheres of Li ght are Michael Gabrie l ,
K am ie l R aphael Zadkiel Uriel and

, , , ,
standing for the Mi ght Grace Zeal S avin g , , ,
Justice S plendour and Mystery of Go d

, ,
.
I
names are invo k ed under appropriate symbols
TH E K A B ALA 1 45
the te le smic art of which the K abala forms an

e ssential part .
Michael the archangel associated with the S un

, ,
is derived from the syllables M i who ; cah like ; a l

, , ,
god ; i e He who is like unto G o d ; or Who is like

. .
unto him ? Gabriel from Gib a r power ; K am ic l

, , ,
from Che m or K am heat ; R aphael from R a p hah

, , ,
healin g ; Zadkiel from Zado k j ustice ; Uriel from

, , ,
Aur light ; and ZOp h kie l from Z o p h e h a secret

, , AS , .
spiritual entities they are the express embo di ments
of the Divine attributes though while unrevealed

,
to us they continue only t o stand for certain human

conceptions of the D ivine B ein g exp ressed in term s
of human char acter All definition is li mitation
.
,
and all l im itation is imperfection yet Go d is the ,
only P erfection and beyond all na ming .

C HAP TER II
TH E C A L C U L ATO RY A RT
AS already indicated there are three sections of

,
the K abala and these m ay I 1 0 W be examin e d more

,
fully.
The Gim e tria ascrib e s to each letter of a name or

word a certain numerical value The K abali sts .
g ive the followin g values to the Hebrew and C halde e
letters the E nglish e quivalents being su b stitute d

,
and the order retained
Units — a 1 b 2 g 3 d 4 e 5 v 6 z 7 ch 8 t h 9
, , , , , , , ,
.
—
Tens y 1 0 k ,
m 40 n 5 0 ,s 6 0 o 7 0 p 8 0 ts 99
, , , ,
.
—
Hundred s q 10 0 r 200 S h 3 00 t 4 00
, , ,
.
i
Fn als — e h 5 0 0 m 600 n 7 0 0 p 8 0 0 ts 90 0
, , , ,
.
P ythagoras has been credited with having

s e rved an ancient table of n um bers to gether ,
their meanings They are as follows

.
E 5
F 6
G 7
H 8
1 46
24 . Travellin g Chan ge , .
25 . Intelli gence P rogeny , .
26 . B e n e fi c e n c e Altruism , .
27 . B ravery Firmness , .
28 . Love P resents Gifts

, , .
29 . News Information
, .
30 . F ame Marriag e
, .
31 . Integrity Ambition , .
32 . Union E mbraces Marri age

, , .
33 . G entleness Chastity , .
34 . S u ff ering P ain R ecompense , , .
35 . Health P eace Happiness

, , .
36 . Genius P rofound Intellect

, .
37 . Fidelity Domestic Happiness

,
.
38 . Malice Av ar1c e Maiming

, , .
39 . Honour Credit Laudation , ,

.
40 . Holiday Feast Weddings , ,

.
41 . S hame Disgrace ,
.
42 . S hort and Unhappy Life .
43 . C hurches Temples Worship , ,

.
44 . S overeignty E levation P ower , ,

.
45 . P rogeny P opulation ,
.
46 . P roduction F ruitfulness ,
.
47 . Long and happy Life .
48 . Judgment a C ourt the Judge , ,

.
49 . Avarice mercenary spirit

,
.
50 . R elief P ardon Freedom

, ,
.
60 . L OS S of husband or wife .
70 . S cience Initiation ,
.
80 . P rotection R ecovery C onvalescence , ,

.
90 . Affliction Grief E rror B lindness , , ,

.
TH E C AL CULATO R Y AR T 1 49
10 0 .
Divine favour Angels S pirits , ,
.
200 . Hesitation Fear ,

.
3 00 . Defence P hilosophy B elief

, ,
.
400 . Distant j ourneys .
500 . Holiness Virtue ,

.
6 00 . P erfection .
700 . P ower Domini on

,
.
8 00 . E mpire C onquest ,
.
9 00 . S trife E ruption War

, ,
.
1 00 0 . S ympathy Mercy ,
.
I
n addition to these th e table contains so m e ,
specific numbers namely ,
81 . The Adept .
1 20 . Honour Pa triotism P raise

, ,
.
215 . Grief Misfortune

,
.
3 18 . Divine messenger .
350 . Justice C onfidence Hope

, ,
‘
3 60 . A House Home S ociety , ,

.
36 5 . The S cience of the S tars .
49 0 . P riesthood Ministration ,
.
6 66 . An E nemy Malice P lots , ,

.
1 09 5 . R eserve S ilence ,
.
1 260 . Annoyances Terrors , .
1 390 . P ersecution .
Unfortunately the method to be followed in the

,
use of these numbers has not been handed down to
us b u t I conceive that a method S imilar to the

‘
Hebrew no t aric o n may not be entirely amiss Thus .
the name Of the great N ap oleo n is e numerated

1 50 M ANUAL OF O CC ULTI S M
The sum of these numbers is 8 1 0 whic h is equal ,
to 80 0 empire conquest and 1 0 success

, , ,
renovation The words empire conquest su ccess

.
, , ,
and renovation have certainly a sin gular apposite

ness in this connection It is O bvious however
.
, ,
-
that the import of a name would be altered by change

from one language into anoth e r and it is reasonable
,
to presum e that the original or mother tongue in -
each case must be adopted .
The Gim e tria ascribes to each le tter a

v alue as we have already seen The sum of
,
.
is then reconverted into letters of equivale nt

value and t h e meaning of the name thus derived
,
.
Thus we read that an an gel talked wi th John of

P atmos who would have fallen down and wor
,
e
shipped him but was f o rbidden The angel .
spea k s of himse lf as a man one of the keepers

,
152 A MANUAL OF O CC ULTI S M
w ords or their fi nals and by other measures of
, , a
secret nature the names of S piritual P owers are

,
derived The Divin e B ein g is of infinite power

.
and presence and therefore His names as e xp re

, ,
the infinite variety of powers intelligences ,
forms within the universe can never be e xh a ,
The kabalist therefore only seeks to discern

, ,
which are of efficacy in the matter in hand .
F rom a c ertain text of three verses in E

which begin with the words Va yis o Vayib ,
V a yo t respectively the seventy two Divin e nam e s

,
-
are derived These are the S he mhamp hore cor re

.
sp o n din g to the seventy two E lders ruling over the

-
C hurch Universal i e the Middl e S piritual K in gdom

, . . .
The method followed in this case is as follows

The first verse is written in Hebrew characte rs ,
which are seventy two in number from ri ght to left

-
, ,
as is usual with S emitic texts The second verse .
is written from left to right and the third verse ,
from ri ght to left as usual the Hebrew text being ,
used throughout Then b y reading the three lette rs

.
which fall together as one word we have seventy ,
two triliteral words to which is added the aflix

,
of the sacred name s E1 or Jah From the te xt .
Thou art the mi ghty Lord for ever is de

the potent name A gla ; and from the sacred
tion The Lord our Go d is one Go d w e (1
the name Yaya Thus .
Jehovah Alo h e nu Jehovah Achad .
Likewise from the text One source of His unity

TH E CAL CUL ATO R Y ART 1 53
m e ource
s of His individuality His vicissitude
,
is
m e we have the magical name A ra rita which is ,
o und inscribed on the S eal of S olomon t h e K ing

'
From the text Holy and blessed is He we derive

she name Hagab a From the sentence in the
.
”
aro ph e t ic blessing of Jacob Until S h iloh come ,
whe n the patriarch was predicting the fate of

ludah we have the name J e su
,
The well informed
.
-
cabalist however knows that this text has reference

, ,
.0 the rising of the S tar S hu le h in the constellation
) f S corpio ; for L e o the lion of Judah with C e p he u s

, ,
h e Lawgiver beneath does not depart from the

,
didh e av e n until S corpio rises in the E ast .
Again from the text The Lord our K ing is true

,
e have the word A me n

y .
The Te murah which means change also yields

, ,
8 secret interpretations by the transposing and
xc han in of letters accordin to the rules of the

g g g
art as set forth in the Table of Tsirup h ;
plication of th is to t h e Gim e tria and
e derive the names of spirits and angels
ces are expressed in th e texts whence they
(1 S ome of these are ev il and are referred
.
e sse ls of iniquity and vessels of wrath

“
lying spirits .
man is beset with some temptations arising

association with the w orld of spirits every ,
inist rat io n imply ing a possible evil by per

to wh ich evil the malevolent forces corre
Thus man has both a protecting angel an d
ay thu s in cline to good o r t o
1 54 A M ANUAL OF O CC ULTI S M
evil bein g while in the middle world in a state of

, , ,
equilibrium or freedom Moreover it is said that

.
,
preference among men is from the superior powe r

O f the spirits attach e d to one man over those of
another for by the intensity of their wills the se

,
men are able to link themselves with the powers Of

good or evil allied to them b y nature .
E very work undertaken b y man h as a twofold

presidency of spiritual powers attach in g to it whe re ,
b y it is brought to perfection or overthrown .
Am ong the kabali sts there is a method of de riv mg ’
the names of those spirit s presiding over the nativity .
The figure of the Heavens bein g erected the lette rs ,
of the Hebrew alphabet are set round in the order

of the si gns beginnin g at the Ascendant ; and those
,
letters which fall on the places of the S un the Moon , ,
and the rul er o f the Ascendant when brought to -

v
g ether yield the name o f the presidi n g an gel Or
b e n e fi c Intelligence B u t the same calculation

.
made from the Desc endant of the horoscope yie lds

the n ame of the evil spirit or C ac h o de m o n Othe rs .
affirm however tha t the places of the b e n e fi c plane ts

, ,
must be employe d together with that of the rule r

,
of the Ascendant for the Agathodemon ; while the

places of the m ale fi c s with that of the ruler of the
Descendant must be taken account of to compute
the name of the C ac h o de m o n Bu t nam e s in the m
.
selves bear only such meaning s as we attach to the m;

their real efficacy consists in their numerical
correspondence with the nature of the symb ols
employe d and the ir relation to the p urp ose in u
C HA P T ER III
O F E V I L S P I RI TS
TH E P rinc eof Darkness B eelzebub presides ove r

, ,
nine orders of i nf ernal spirits accordin g to the,
K abalists. These spirits are the tempters of man

kind The Occultist affirms that they are the dis
.
embodied spirits o f evil minded men confirmed in

-
.
wickedness b y the perversity of their Wills Eve n .
presuming that they are no more than the e vil

thou gh ts and imaginings of embodied humanity ,
there is yet nothing in a world where thoughts

,
are thin gs to prevent such from takin g bodily

,
shape and substance and thus when stimulate d ,
b y the force of men s evil desires becoming acti ve

’
powers for evil .
E verybody has read of F rankenste in s Monste r

’
,
that weird output of the imagination of the beautiful

Mary S helley but few people have r e alized that
,
the story embodies a great occult truth It is .
perhaps not difficult to trace this creation of the

dau ghter of Charles Godwin One has but to study
.
his work on The L ive s of the Ne croma nce rs to b e

confirmed in the idea that what the father sug
gested the dau ghter elaborated in the laboratory of
15 6
OF E V IL S P I R I TS 1 57
o wn gifted mind It w as in the nature of a

.
t it iv e essay and gained the prize of publica

,
S tudy this st ory and also the chapter on

,
The Dweller on the Threshold in the p opular

ovel by Bulwer Lytton and y o u will have some ,
o tio n of the experiences of those who are capable
ting and thereafter of being obsessed by the

, ,
of their own minds Will and Desire created .
rse . It should not be strange that it may

n g equ al to man when both the will
n of man are consciously directed
Orders of E vil S pirits the first is ,
ds Here we have the concentrated

.
worship and imagination of thousands directed to

the same eff ect the c reation of gods
, We have .
knowledge of the S aturnalias and B aldachinos ,
the Bacchanalias and orgies of the heathen w orld .
Such a go d Wa s that S atan w h o tempted the man

Jesus S wedenborg defin es the di fference between
.
the satans and the devils when he says that the

"
former apply themselves t o the minds of men in ,
stilling false doctrines and lies blinding intelligence , ,
stimulating pride and inciting to heresies and

seditions ; while on the other hand devils are such
, ,
as apply themselves to the appetites and by their ,
affinity w it h the emotional faculty whence they have

(
their origin) seek to instil lust greed avari ce hatred , , , ,
and every kind of illicit affection and perverted or
depraved appetite It may be w ell to accept th is

.
distinction .
The second order are called Lying S pirits 0 1 ,
which sort were those who obsessed the prophe t

Ahab and over these is set a spirit called P yt ho ,
who is the father of lies These spirits apply .
themselves to the interiors of the vocal and respira

tory organs b y means of the brain centres S ome .
such are to be heard speakin g throu gh the mouths of

persons entranced such as demoniacs pythonesse s
, ,
and spirit mediums S uch an one is mentione d

.
in the B ible as cryin g out in pain at the approach of

Jesus sayin g : What have I to do with Thee 0
, ,
S o n of David I know Thee who Thou art "

”
The third order of evil spirits are those calle d

V essels of I n iquit y and Vessels of Wrath "
who are the inventors of all vices for the infes ting
of men and their ruination Their prince is calle d
.
”
B elial who is without a yoke being a
, ,
and disobedient spirit not subj ect to control .
this order a re the violent and law le ss m u rde re rs , ,
some suicides who kill themselves in frenzy .
this order S t P aul speaks to the C o r

.
What a greement hath C hrist

F o r these spirits of B elial have no a g
an y,
b eing as it were the Ishmaelites of the
, ,
world .
The fourth order of evil spiri ts is called

R evengeful their prince bein g called Asm o
,
~
who is the occasion of j udgment They were of .
order let loose upon E gyp t in the visitation

plagues as recorded in E xodus
,
.
The fifth order of evil spirits is called

160 A MANUAL OF O CCULTI S M
The eighth order of evil spirits is called
”
Accusers or The Inquisitors They are u
.
the dominion of one called Ashtaroth i e The ,

. .
S earcher.
”
In the Greek he is called Diabolos or ,
the C alumniator and in the Apocalyp se is referre d

,
to as the Accuser of the B rethren accusin g them ,
night and day before the face of Go d F o r the se

.
”
spirits delight in persecuting the ri ghteous searching ,
out their weaknesses and railing against the m

because of their imperfections The common fault
.
fi n de r is well within the category of those who owe

allegiance to Ashtaroth .
The ninth order is that of The Tempters .
These are in close association with mankind and ,
one of their number is present with those who are

in any w ay subj ect to the worldly spirit of gree d
and avarice Their prin ce is called Mammon i e
.
, . .
C ovetousness .
These nine orders of evil spirits are called trans

r s for they violate the commandments which
gr e sso,
in the Hebrews are but nine only and not ten as ,
commonly conceived : the first and second

Decalogue bein g one only and h ,
to the worship of the true Go d and the

'
the making of false gods whether subj ect

,
obj ective ; and B eelzebub is that supreme

Go d whom the sinful serve b y error under
ever name it may figure .
C HAP T E R I V
M AN S S P I RI TU AL FREE D O M
’
To t he end that mankind may be in freedom and

reserve to its elf the power to cast in its lot with the
g ood or evil powers these nine orders
, of evil spirits
are according to the kabalists counterbalanced by
, ,
a corresponding array of an gelic orders These .
are known as C herubim S eraphim Thrones D O

,
, , ,
‘
minions P owers Virtues P rincipalities Archangels

, , , , ,
and Angels These Nine Orders are oth erw ise

.
referred to as the Me t rat t o n they who stand ,
about the Throne the Op h an im otherwise called ,
the Wheels of Life (referred to by E zekiel ) ; and

S even P lan e tary S piri s which include the
t ,
Archangels and their hosts of subservient angel s -
These by their representatives are set over mankind

for his government and well being ; else were man -
wholly abandoned to the machi nations of evil
In the apocryphal book of Tobias it is related

that the Archan gel R aphael did apprehend
oden s and bound him in the wilderness of
,
E gypt It has been thought that this sto ry

.
has refe rence to the presence of the planet Jupiter

16 1 hI
in the sign Gemini ; for Asmodeus is of the sphere of
Jupiter s evil spirits and R aphael is Mercury whose
’
, ,
si gn Gemini is said to rule over E gyp t and more ,
’
over it is the si gn of Jupiter s debili ty Ingenious .
as this interpretation may be it appears to rest

,
upon the association of Asmodeus with Jupite r ,
which m ay very well be the case as Asmodeus like

, ,
Jupiter is related to the o ffi ce of the Judges ; b ut

,
it is not the fact astrologically speakin g that

, ,
Gemini rules Upper E gypt but C apricorn o r

, ,
—
accordin g to the E gyptian zodi ac the C rocodile .
Hence the E gyptians were called the M izm im (those

born from the crocodile ) .
C oncerning the sphere of Jupiter Hesiod says ,
There are thirty thousand of the spirits of J upite r ,
pure and immortal who are the keepers of men on

,
earth that they may observe j ustice and mercy ,
and who havin g clothed themselves with an aerial

,
form go to a nd fro everywhere upon the earth

,
.
No man could continue in safety it is said nor , ,
a ny woman remain uncorrupted and none could

,
come to the end designed by Go d but for the assist

,
ance given them by the b e n e fi c spirits or if evil ,
spirits were alone allowed to sway men s minds ’

.
Thus every man has a guardian angel and a good

demon as S ocrates affi rms and likewise there are
, ,
spirits of evil attac hin g to all in whom the passions

are allowed free play ; and these g ood and evil force s
contend for the victory the decision being in the
,
hands of the man whose soul is the covete d prize .
Fo r man is in the midd le ground of equ ilibri um ,

natural soul When good S pirits and powers domi
.
—
nate this principle in man s nature t e the S corpio ’
. .
—
principle there is the better hope of a deliverance
from the evil of these spirits .
When it is said that Michael (the S un Angel ) -
contended with S atan (i 6 S aturn ) for the body of

. .
Moses we underst and kab alist ic ally that the good

,
and evil principles were in strife S aturn contendin g ,
that the body belonged to him by natural agreement ,
while Michael affirmed that he had redeemed it

even from decay ; for Moses was an Initiate of the
c ultus of Ammon R a and his name denote s not only
-
,
drawn forth and elected but kab alistic ally he is ,
nomin ated for he was one of those named and

,
appointed to a t ypical work .
This association of the spirits with man and the ,
sympathies and antipathies arisin g therefrom is ,
the reason that cert ain men a re naturally frien ds

or enemies of others .
A certain ma gician warned M Antoninus of his .
friendship with Octavius Augustus with whom he ,
was accustomed to play Au gustus always coming ,
o ff the conqueror The magician it is said

.
, ,
m a n de d An toninus because he continued to c

with Augustus although better born m ore skilf ul
, ,
and older than he for the magician continue d

, , ,
Thy g enius d oth much dread the geni us of this

y oun g man and thy fortune fi a t t e rs his fortune ,
so that unless thou shalt shun him it appears wh olly

, ,
”
to decline to him Thus it is that some men are
.
brou ght to positions of preference and power irre spe c

MAN S S P I R ITUAL FR E E DOM
’
165
tive of their individual merits because the genius ,
which directs them and presides over their fortunes

is more powerful than that of their rivals B u t the .
Genius of Fortune is not that o f Life nor that of ,
Intelligence these three b e in g dist in c t : so that a

,
'
man may become possessed of great wealth and die

young or show remarkable faculty without com
,
mensurate benefit Therefore the Genius of F ortune

.
and Life must be in agreement if the position is

to be enj oyed while that of the Intelligence and
,
Fortune must be equally well disp o se d if the full '
reward of one s labours is to be enj oyed Thus

’
.
,
all things c o nsidered the choice must be in regard

,
to that callin g or profession which most suitably

comports with the G enius of F ortune This is
,
.
taught in t he horoscopical science but otherwise ,
is kab alistic ally determined according to n ames

and numbers These thing s which have relation
.
,
to the freedom o f man must b e understood by those

,
who would make election of times and seasons .
It is good and proper to know whence benefits will

be derived and whenc e e v il will assail us also those
’
days hours and seasons which are proper to our

,
purposes and those again which are incompatible

,
so that between that which is ood and that which

g
is evil we may so work that ult imately we may
prevail .
C HAP T E R V
O N TA L I S MA NS
ON the back of the Great Tortoise which the

E mperor Yaou found on the banks of the Ye llo w
R iver after the great flood of 23 4 8 B C there was
. .
,
found inscribed a square of numbers which is no w

of universal fame It comes to us throu gh the
.
Hebrew K abala as the S eal of S aturn or the Table

,
of Fifteen bein g composed of the fi gures from o ne

,
to nine so arran ged that every w ay it adds to 15 .
B u t the Chinese call it the P a ta o or E ightfold P ath

, ,
these ways or paths bein g represented b y th e num

bers leadin g from the central figure which represents
,
Man Thus we have the most ancient t e le sma in

.
the world the m ystic Table of S aturn

,
'
This t e le sm a is made on virgin parchment or lead , ,
which is the metal of S aturn and on a S aturday

, ,
in the hour of S aturn being the first and eighth

,
h our after sunrise . On one side is inscribed the

16 6
numbers from 1 to 6 4 ad din g to 26 0 in all direc ti ons
,
,
t he sum b e in g 20 8 0
.
The Table of the Moon is a square of nine adding ,
to 3 6 9 in all di rections the sum of the numbers

,
bein g 3 3 21 .
E ach t e le sm a has to be made in the ho ur and

on the day ruled by the planet when the Moon is ,
increasing in light and in good aspect to the ruler

of the hour .
An illustration of the meth od of employing these

t e le sm as may be cite d .
If the position is to be improved take the influence ,
of the planet Jupiter and on a Thursday in the

hour of Jupiter the Moon being in good aspect
,
to that planet and increasin g in light On a piece .
o f tin silver or parchment in scribe the Table of Fo ur

, , ,
and over it the name of the Intelligence of Jupite r ,
which is J o p hial and beneath it the symbol of the

,
planet E nclose thes e in a circle and write around

.
it the names of Ah a H e v ah Ahi Ala h which are

. , , ,
the powers of its n umbers Close them with another

.
c ircle.
On the reverse side inscribe the planetary seal

, ,
and the sigil of the planetary intelligence and ,
enclose them in a circle Around this write the ppr

.
port of the t e le sm a in a verse taken from S cripture

which is appropriate to the operation in hand .
C lose all in a circle .
T h e t e le sm a thus made is to be worn upon the

person until such time as its O peration is effected ,
”
wh en it is to be re garded as a dea d tali sman ,
ON TALI S MAN S 16 9
and thereafter will serve for no other person or

p u rpose.
Now in order to complete th e k nowledge of this

te le smic art the following sigils are given to be
, ,
inscribed on the reverse side to the table of numbers .
8 af -
a r n J a l f zf
p
[wa r s Th e S a n
Ve n u s
Th e M o o n
As to the construction of the magic al tables of

numbers th e following rules are to be followed
,
Fo r evenly even squares i e such as have 4

-
,
. .
,
8 and 1 2 b ases 6 g t h e s q uares of Ju p iter and

, . .
A MANUAL OF O C C ULTI S M
Mercury write down the fi gures in their natural
,
order as here
,
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 ll 12
13 14 15 16
Now draw a square divided into 1 6 cells Fill .
in the numbers in thi s order viz keep the corne rs , .
as they are 1 4 1 3 and 1 6 Transpose the figure s

, , , , .
to their diagonal opposites namely 5 and 12, 9 and , ,
8 2 and 1 5 3 and 1 4 leavin g the central square

, , ,
of four ce lls in their natural order .
You will then have a square in which the num be rs

are so di sposed that they add up to 34 in any dif e o
tion thus
,
oddly even squares as 3 x 2 6 5 x 2 10

Fo r -
, , ,
7 x 2 1 4 a rather di fferent method is employe d

,
.
Take a natural square of six K eep the corne r .
numbers 1 6 3 1 3 6 in their natural places transfe r

, , , ,
the central square of four cells to their diagonal

opposites namely 1 5 and 22 1 6 and 21 Kee p
, , ,
.
the corners of the next square 8 1 1 26 29 in , , , , ,

to the places of 2 and 5 bringin g these down
, to
replace them ; yo u will then have the
M agic S qua re o f S ol .
All squares may be dealt with on the principle

which is here followed It will be of interest to
.
note that the seals of the planets are derived from

the numerical s equence of their tables Thus in .
the square of three which is the Table of S aturn

, ,
if yo u draw a line from 1 to 2 and thence to 3 anothe r ,
line throu gh 4 5 and 6 and a third line from 7 to

, ,
8 and thence to 9 yo u have the S eal of S aturn

, .
B u t the other forms of t he seals have been simplifie d

an d rendered as equivalent glyphs .
V arious othe r talismans have been handed down

to us beside those appropriate to the planets Thus .
we have the most S acred S eal of S olomon the King ,
which is a square of four inset with the sacred name s

wh ose letters replace the fi gures the sam e be ing
,
ON TALI S MAN S 3
ed in a circle within which are written the

Jehovah e lo ah im Jehovah achad (The
our Go d is the only Lord ) .
On the reverse side are the interla ced trian gles

th the symbol of Deity the Yod or perfect number,
se t in the midst .
her t e le sm a attributed to S olomon is dis

o n page 17 4 .
S eal of S olomon is shown on one side with

i e .In wisdom or In t h e
.
“ “
e ginning and on the r e verse side is the name of

olomon with his sigil or mystic signature .
By whatever means we may constrain spiritual

forces to our purpose whether by sigil charm , , ,
te le sma or invocation it is only by the faith of the

,
operator aided b y t h e trained will and imagination

i
’
, ,
which are the magical faculties of the human soul .
Imagination is the creative or formati v e power

of the mind by which a matrix or mould is delivered
to Nature for the V italizing power of the Will
“
Fo r of these faculties the imag i nation is female

and receptive while the will is masculine and
,
projective What in the common mind operates

.
as desultory thou ght and desire the thou ght taking ,
form and the desire giving life to it is replaced in ,

,
the mind of the magician by an ardent will and

conscious imagination d irected to the creation of
definite t h ings To a certain extent all lovers all
.
, ,
poets and artists are magicians equally with the

makers of empires and the reformers of the religious
world They have definite obj ects in V iew ; their
.
17 4 MANUAL OF O C C ULTI S M
FA C E
Th e S e al of S olo m o n th e K ing .
B fi C f /
176 A M ANUAL OF O CC ULT I S M
soul when su fficiently enforced b y the impelling
,
power of the will 2
Therefore we may see that it is mo tive alone

,
which distin guishes good from evil in the use of

occult forces That which links the mind to its
.
subj ect is tho ught ; that which gives it form is imagina

tio n ; and that whic h vitalizes it is the w ill .The will
has no direct relations with motive and may b e
,
used with equal po w er for good or evil Will is .
but the vital or life giving power to thou ght Life

-
.
has no qualities p e r s e thou gh potential for all

,
things ; but it gains qualities by use or

Motive determines the quality of our
inh e ring in and tincturing with its own nat
mental action The motive is a power
.
apart from the act as the soul is a thing ap

,
the body though expressing itself therein

,
.
Therefore causes that are brought into

occult means will di ff er in their ultim a te eff ects
b
y reason of the motive which en s ouls th em ,
though to the outward eye appearing in all respects

'
identical.
Hence to quote the words of a modern physici an

, ,
Whoever undertakes to g overn and direct

mysterious powers attempts a bold task
,
.
h im consider well that he is penetrating as ,
is possible into the highest laws of Nature

,
let him enter the sanctuary without reve

fear and t h e most profound resp ect for the
whic h he endeavours to set in operation .
person has this magical f aculty within h i

ON TALI S MAN S 177
mly st ands in need of waking up There is no

.
imit to human perfectibility and power and nothin g

L ,
which can be conceived of by the human mind

that cannot ultimately be realized b y man There .
fore the Magi h ave but four precepts
— —
K NO W WI L L D A R E — K E E P S I L E NT .
CH AP TER V l
NU ME RO L O G Y
TH E great philosopher of C roton declared that

the universe was built upon the power of numb e rs .
The divine P lato affirmed the same thin g whe n

he said : Go d geometrizes To understand the
.
power of numbers their properties and virtues is

, ,
the first ke y to a knowledge of the magic of nature .
Number whether expressed as quantity sound

, , ,
form or colour will ultimately be found to dete r

,
mine all sympathies and antipathies all discord ,
and harmon y between natural bodies and betwe e n

the soul of Na ture and that of man T o unde r .
stand the po wer of one s own soul in the universe

’
is the first essential of the magical art To know .
that power one must know his number and thence

,
his sympathies and antipathies in the soul world -

.
Name and quality what are these but numb e r

, ,
whe n brou ght to the la t q at o n

s e u l 7 By the ri ght
use of numbers all magical operations are e ff ected ,
and b y the perfect knowledge of n umbers the

predictive art is brou ght to its perfection .
Daniel t h e P rophet said of himself in B ab y loni a

I Daniel found out b y the books the numbers of
, ,
”
the years and this knowledge was not foreign to
,
the great astrolo ger Michael Nostradamus .
1 78
The names and values of the letters have alre ady
been given In making sigils of names the quarters
.
,
of the kabalistic tables are taken instead of the

letters they contain These are combin ed to form
.
the figure or si gil which contain s these forms in

combination thus the name Jacob is defined
By permutations and combinations of numb ers

many choice secrets are discovered not only i n ,
relation to individuals but in regard also to n ations

and the world in general S uch combinations
.
res ul t in the establishin g of important epochs

when thing s are brought to their climax and to
their end or when a new order of thing
,
and is brou ght to its issue If we examine the .
power of numbers i n certain well established b istori -
cal cases we shall have quite sufficient evidence

,
to warrant our thesis that Number lies at the root

of all thin gs .
Thus the House of Valois began w ith P hilippe

,
and ended with Henri .
P hili ppe
has
Henri has
Henri de Valois 13
NUM E R OLO G Y 181
The House of B runswick a ffords a similar

kabalism .
Ascension of G eorg e I
Ascension of G eorge II
1 7 2 7
S tuart R ebe llion .
Ascension of G eorge III
American R ebellion
French R evolution
The Grand Alliance against

Napoleon /
Again the history of

,
F rance affords an epoch
in th e
Fall of R obespierre in
Fall of Napoleon .
Fall of Charles X
1 + s + 3 + o
Death of Duc d Orléan s ’
, th e
Heir apparent -
l 84 2
It has been well said that history repeats itself .
Nothing perhaps could so intimately portray this

fact than the parallelism even to minute details , ,
of the lives of S t Louis of F rance and K in Louis

.
g
XVI of France as here se t forth in detail
,
1 82 A MANUAL OF O C CULTI S M
B irth of S t Louis April 23
.
,
An in terval of year s
B irth of L ouis XVI Au gust , 23
B irth of I s abelle sister of S t Louis

, . 1225
Interval 5 39
B irth of E liz a beth sister o f L o

, uis X VI 1764
Death of Louis V III father of S t Louis

, .
Interval
Death of the Dauphin father of Louis XVI .
Minority of S t Louis b e gins

.
I nterval
Minority of L ouis XV I begins
Marriage of S t Louis
.
Interval
Marriage of Louis XVI
Maj ority of S t L ouis (K in g )

.
Interval
Accession of Louis XVI
St Louis concludes a P eace with Henry III

.
Interval
Louis XVI concludes a P eace with
G eor ge III
An E astern P rince sends ambassador to S t .
Lou is desirin g to become a Christian

,
Interval
An E astern P rince sends ambassador to
Louis XVI with the same obj ect
In this return to their native soil the two remark

able lives o f these remarkable K in gs of F rance came
to a parallel close It would of itself appear to afford
.
su ffi cient grounds for a belief in the rein carnati on

of souls By a certain numerical valuation of the
.
name S t Louis which is composed of 6 1 5 4 3 6 1

.
,
26 8 it is found equal to 5 3 9
,
17 8 t he ,
number of years between the two kin gs Also .
Louis XVI 631 16 1 7 wh ich a gain yields a

,
unit value of 8 the number si gnifyin g, Cyclic

revolution or accordin g to the K abal a Justice
, , ,
equilibrium the balance ,

Here it wo ul d certainly
appear that S t Louis had come a gain to his
.
“
”
own .
The law of periodicity has been the means of

many remarkable scientific observations and the ,
law of c ycles has been applied to the facts of history

with some startlin g results as we have already seen
,
.
It has been shown that a c yclic wave of activity

exten din g over 25 0 years passes from one quarte r
of the world to another with regular precision .
Thus
Mon golian E mpire established .
E gyptian ascendanc y .
G reek epoch .
Troj an crisis .
S cy thian invasion .
P ersian Monarchy .
Alexandrian epoch .
Ch ristian era .
NUM E R OLO GY 1 85
The Huns .
P ersian new e ra .
Byzantine E mpire .
S econd R oman E mpire .
The P apacy .
C hinese incursion .
Ottoman E mpire .
R ussian E mpire .
B ritish Climacteric 2
TH E M I NO R K E Y
The following simple K abalism O f Numbers
een given for pur p oses O f divination b y means of
ames and dates In this system .
One denotes individualit y and possible egotism ,
self reliance affirmation

-
,
.
Two— R elationship psychi c attraction emotion

, ,
alism ,
s ympath y or antipath y doubt ,
.
—
Thre e E xpansion increase intellectual capacity
, , ,
riches and success .
Fo u r— R ealization property possessions posi

, , ,
tion and credit materiality ,

.
—
Five Reason logic ethics travellin g commerce
, , , , ,
—
S ix C o operation marria ge reciprocity sym
-
, , ,
pathy play art music dancin g

, , , ,
.
S e ve n E quilibrium contracts agreements , , ,
treaties bargains harmony or discord

, , .
E ight— R econstruction death ne g ation decay , , , ,
loss extinction g oing out

, , .
Ninc— P enetration strife energy en t erprise

, , , ,
dividing an ger k ee nn ess

, , .
A square of three which gives nine compartments
, ,
is used for the purpose O f location Thus .
The date O f a pers on s birth bein g the 1 8 th Ju ne

’
7 9 the fi gures 1 8 6 7 9 are marked and the characte r

, ,
ist ic s and fate are discerned b y these numbers

,
.
Thus we should read in this case

“
You have m uch self c o n fi de n c e but your -
aspirations an d expectations do not turn out to

y our satisfaction You .feel to be worth y of a
better fate than falls to your lot B eware le st .
pride goes before a fall You fe e l m ost confide nt

.
when least secure Yet yo u m ay have suc c e ss

.
in work that others have abandoned as u seless .
You have sympathy and ar e especially responsive

,
to praise and sensitive to blame You will mo st .
probably m a rrv The fine arts and social life have

.
their attraction s f o r y o u You have a fi ne se nse .
of value and will be able to estimate the cost o f

thin gs You would make a g ood contractor o r
.
,
negotiator You have some penetration and

.
enterprise ; yo u are keen alert and energe t ic , ,

.
And O f course much more that is true could b e

said if the i ndividual environment were known .
It is to be O bserved that the c e ntu ry 1s not

included as all who are born there in have thi s in
,
TH E S E C R E T P R O G R E S S I O N
S ome years a go I pub lished a curious K abala

known as The S ecret P ro gression b y whi ch ,
”
numbers in lotteries and other a ffairs apparently

g overned b y chance m i ght b y dil igence be discov e r ed .
There was at one time a circle O f occultists who

h a d their head quarters at a certain place in Italy
-
.
P romin ent amon g the members O f this fraterni ty

was Giuseppe B alsamo C omte di C agliostro whose
, ,
wealth (ac quired none knew h o w ) not less than his

learning was the m arvel of all with whom he had
,
relations Fo r a short time he dazzled the Courts

.
O f E urope and disappeared with the suddennes s of

,
a meteor It has been said that he died in prison

.
by poisonin g but I am not now concerned with his

,
h istory .He was at all events a past master in the

magic Of Numbers as is evident from the fact that
,
on three separate occasions he gave Madame de la

Motte the winnin g number in the P aris lotteries .
By t h e K abala O f the S ecret P ro gression it is

possible when a series of numbers is known to
, ,
determine the next S ome years a go a well known

.
-
weekly publication instituted a B irth C ompetition

which was to predict the number O f births in 36
large towns of Great B ritain durin g a particular
week the births during the correspondin g wee k
,
for five successive years bein g given .
C onsiderin g this to be a g ood opportunity of

testin g the method O f the Illuminati I accordingly ,
took the problem in hand .

NUM E R OLO G Y 1 89
The births in the 3 6 towns during the specified

eek in the precedin g five y ears totalled as follows :
Year
Births
Taking the hig hest and low est O f these totals ,

‘
6906 and 60 1 7 and allowin g a g ood mar gin we m ay

, ,
e xpect to find the required number between 6 0 0 0
and 700 0 We now proceed to find the key number

. .
1 . B y the M in or D ifi e re n tia l .
1 89 4 — 6 35 1 15
1 89 5
} e
17
”
1 8 99 3
The series is found by adding together the integers

f each iven number thus 6 3 5 1 6 3 5 1z
o g ,
15. It will be seen that the result gives 1 3 1 2 1 1

’
, ,
"
a nume rica l s e rie s who se inte rva ls a re e qua l .
We therefore require a number whose integers

added 17
2 . B y the M in o r A dditiv e .
1 894 —6 3 5 1 15 }
1 89 5 — 6 9 0 6 21
—6 0 1 7 35
18 9 6 14
33
} 68
— 19
1 897 6 7 15
} 6 5
i
32
1 8 9 8 — 6 4 30 13
} 6 2
2
30
1 89 9 2 17
Here also the intervals a re e q u al in the final
’
s eries. We therefore are confir m ed in the

ledge that the required num ber belon gs t o the
series O f 1 7 .
3 . B y the M ajor D ifie r e ntia l .
1 894 -
6 35 1
1 895 —6 9 06 13
[
+ sw = 2a z
7
1 89 6 — 6 0 17
698 z 23 5
1 89 7 — 6 7 15
285 z 15 6
1 89 8 — 6 4 3 0
1 899 9
Again the intervals are made equal b y the sup

position Of the fi gure 4 The number require d .
,
therefore is one which when 6 4 30 is taken from it

, , ,
leaves a num b e r w h o se in te ge rs 4 1 3 22 or , , ,
4 . By the M a io r Additiv e
1 8 94 —6 3 5 1
] :u 9
j r25 7 1s
- -
—6 9 0 6 (
1 89 5 17
r : 17 8
[
1 8 9 6 —6 0 1 7
2 15 6
1 89 7 —6 7 15
1
l 13 145 14 5
J
,
18 9 8 —6 430 J
1 89 9 12 -
3
The R egistrar General returned the number 6 73 1
-
A moment s study will show how exactly it fi ts al

’
the requirements of the several processes .
1 . M ino r D fie e ti
i r n a l — 67 3 1 . which c om 17
pared with 13 shows the latter yields 4 which ,
added to 6 10 .
2 . M inor Additiv e — 6 73 1 17, which added tc

13 30,which added to 3 2 62 .
3 .
—
M a jo r D ifie re ntia l I f from 6 7 3 1 we take 6 4 30
.
.
we have 3 0 1 which ,
4 .
4 . M a jo r A d v e
d i ti — 6 7 3 1 added to 6 4 3 0
which yields a unit value O f 12 which equals 3 , ,
which added to 5 gives 8 .
With this s ingular and unique K abalism I may

now brin g the subj ect of Numerology to a close ,
and end the first section O f m y study O f the Occ ult

S ciences .
H YP NO TI S M A ND M E S ME R I S M
M will no doubt be questioned whether either
Hypnotism or Mesmerism forms any legitimate part
of Occultism and indeed I have put the question
,
to myself before finally deci din g to include them .
My reason for so doing is that formerly the whole

”
of the magnetic art then known as F ascination
,
and the Laying on O f Hands was an essential

,
”
factor in the curriculum O f the thaumaturgis t .
Scripture references to the transmission O f vital

.
energy to those sick or dying or even dead to all

,
appearances are numerous and w ell known The

, .
011 as a me di um for the conveyance and

ion of the vital or magnetic energy is also
(1 and is co mmonly in use in India and other
p arts O f the Orient at this day .
Mesmerism may be distin guished in a popular

from Hypnotism in that it presume s the
existence O f an e fflu v ium which is in the nature
o f a subtle essence
, capable O f bein g transm itted
from one body to another under the direction O f
the Will P aracelsus calls it the Archeus or Liquor
Vitae . The Archeus is an essence he says
,
”
which is distributed equally in all parts of the

body if the latter is in a healthy condition ; it is
the invisible nutriment from which t h e bod draws
y
1 93 0
its stren gth and the qualities O f each O f its parts
,
correspond to the nature O f the physical p arts

which contain it . The Archeus is O f a
magnetic nature and attracts or repels other force s
belon ging to the same plane The individual .
power of resistance will determine how far a man is

subj ect to a stral influences The vital force is not
.
enclosed in man but radiates around hi m like a

luminous sphere and m ay be made to act at a
,
distance In those semi material rays the imagina

.
-
~
tion m ay produce healthy or morbid effects It .
m ay poison the essence and cause diseases or it ,
m ay purify it after it has been made impure and

s o restore the health . If we separate the
vital force f rom the physical form the latte r will ,
die an d putrefy ; and b y impregn atin g a dying

body with vitality it m ay be made to live again
, .
”
P aracelsus further states that diseas es m ay b e

transmitted from one person to another or from ,
man to animal or animal to plant b y means of the

, ,
magnetic emanations and we have ocular demon

,
s t ra t io n that this is a belief firmly held b y those
nations O f the E ast among whom it is practised .
The story O f the Gadarene swine is in line with our

own experience O f the epidemic O f crime which
follows upon the death of a reno w ned criminal .
If a person dies says P aracel s us

,
”
and serio usly ,
desires that another should die with him h is imagin a ,
tio n m ay create a force that m ay draw a menstr uum

from the dead body to form a corpus and it m ay b e ,
proj ected b y the impulse given t o it b y the thought .
O f the dyin g p erson toward that other so that he

knowledge require certain media through which to
O perate E lectrical ener gy for example cannot b e
.
, ,
conveyed throu gh a length of rope or wood but ,
only throu gh a natural conductor of electricity ,
such as steel or copper When it is said that Jesus

.
spat upon the ground and made clay and anoin ted
the eyes O f the man who was blind from birth ,
we see that use was made O f the natural Odylic

power of the sa liva and the powerful storage mediu m
,
O f clay or earth The rest is explained b y the powe r

.
ful will O f the magician as expressed complete ly

and decisively in the single exclamation E p hp ha tha I
The laying on O f hands for the cure of sickness
is one phase O f Mesmerism or Animal Magnetism
O f which there is abundant evidence and whi c h
conclusively proves the existence of the magnetic

fluid Touchin g for king s evil or scroful a w as in
.
’
-
use amon g our own kin gs un til R ome disc o unte n

an c e d any delegation of its powers
‘
Le R oy te .
touche Dieu te g u e rys (The K ing touches the e

,
.
Go d heals thee ) had brought new lif e to thousands

before the Divine right O f kings w as assailed .
Dr James E sdaile at one time the P residency

“
.
,
S urgeon at C alcutta has left us a very remarkable

,
series of cases which prove the surpassin g value of

Mesmerism in the medical an d surgical treatme nt
of disease His book on Na tura l a nd Me sme ric
.
C la irv o ya nce is amon g the best upon this subj e ct .
Incidentally he mentions two phenomena b y which

,
I think I may claim complete j ustification for the

inclusion O f this subj ect in a work upon magic i
The first is the dislocation O f th e sense s No rmally .

H YP NOTI S M AND M E S M E R I S M 1 97
eac h of the senses has its appropriate organ as the ,
eye ear nose etc They are not in themselves the

, , ,
.
only organs of the correspondin g senses of sight ,
hearing smell etc but have become specialized

, , .
,
as such This is shown by the fact that in

.
natural and induced somnambulism the wh ole ,
sensorium may be transferred to the fi n ge r tips or -
the pit O f the stomach or even the soles of the feet , .
Fredrika Wanner better known as the S eeress O f ,
P revorst was a natural somnambulist and in her

, ,
trances was particula rly sensitive to the presence

of o th e r persons discriminating between them as
»
,
painful or sooth ing to h e r And on such occasions .
it was found that her eyes bein g closed or the senses ,
incapable O f being a ff e c te d by ordinary stimuli ,
sh e could see hear and even taste by means O f the

, ,
epigastric region .
. P rof Dumas is quoted by Dr E sdaile to the

.
. .
same effect
It is possible that by a singular concourse
'
of circumstances certain organs become cap able ,
of exercising properties and fulfilling functions to

which they h ave hitherto been strangers and which
even belonged to di ff erent organs If rare and .
extraordinary facts did not inspire distrust I could ,
allege the singular t ransference O f the hearing and

sight which ab andoning their usual seat have
, , ,
appeared to be transfe rred to the stomach— so that

sounds and colours excited there the same sensations
as are ordinarily conveyed through the ears and
e yes Five years ago a youn g woman from the
.
depar tment of Ardéc h e who gave an example O f a ,

very stran ge p h enomenon came to Montpellie r ,
to consu lt the doctors for a hysteric a ff ection

attended with catalepsy S h e referred all the se n
.
e e tions O f si ght hearing and smell to the region

,
Of the stomach the appropriate organs being

,
”
insensible to the usual stimuli .
The second phenomenon to which I would c all

attention is the transference O f the senses In the .
former cases we have the dislocation of the no rmal

centres O f sensation to the region O f the sympathe tic
g an g lion at the pit O f the stomach and now w e ,
may consider the marvellous fact O f sensation being

transferred from one person to another .
F indin g a specially sensitive subj ect in the perso n

O f B abu Lali Mohun Mitra a y oun g Hindu O f twent
, y
two yea rs Dr E sdaile after curing him O f a lo ath
, .
,
some disease for which he had come to the hospital ,
ub j e c t e d him to some experimental developm e nt .
He would place his watch in Mitra s hand and with ’
a f e w passes would render the whole arm so ri gid

that under no bribe or persuasion or threat could
the youn g man stir a fin ger to loose the watch
as he was hidde n S eein g this man s extre me
“ ’
.
”
sensibility I thought it probable says E sdaile
‘
, ,
,
that he mi ght exhibit community O f tas te with

his mesmerizer and here is the result O f the first
,
.
experiment made upon him He had never heard .
O f such a thing nor had I even tr ied it before .
One day that the B abu came to the hospi tal

to pay his respects after gettin g well I took him ,
into a side room and mesmerizin g him till he could

,
n o t open his eyes I went out and desired the n ative

,
The nervous fluid not only follows the directio n
of the will but is moreover im me sse d with our
,
individuality both physical and mental It bears

, .
the si gnature of o u r thou ght it carries the healthy

,
or diseased tendencies O f our body it is moved b y ,
our will and coloured b y o u r desires and passi ons .
The dictum O f Lord B acon : The human mind

can be placed in communicatio n with other minds
and transmit their impres s ions is not inclusive ,
enou gh to cover the phenomena O f st at uv olism .
animal magnetism electro biolo gy mesmerism or

,
-
, ,
b y whatsoever name we m ay indicate the use of

this my sterious a gent It is a force that can be se t
.
in motion at an y t ime and made to O perate at any

distance apart from any su ggestion of the effe c ts
it is required to produce : Herein it di ff ers entire ly
from the hypnotic suggestion Of the medical
schools and the auto suggestion which the
-
critical writers wholly unskilled in the knowledge

O f Occultism brin g to bear as explanation of eve ry
fulfilled prediction every thaumaturgic e ff ect eve ry

, ,
case Of healin g which is in distinction from the kno wn

and approved methods the clinic and pharmacy
, ,
O f the medical professi o n .
On the question Of animal magnetism either as a ,
psychological or a therapeutic agent the Occultist ,
will always prefer the experience O f such men as

E sdaile Gre g ory and B aron Du P otet to the nu
, ,
.
instructed O pinions O f the critic however skilf ul ,
he m ay be in his own field O f research or work .
B aron Du P otet in his M a n ua l de l Etudiant

’
M agn e tis e ur say s

,
Nature herself discovered the
HYP NOTI S M AND M E S M E R I S M 20 1
secret to me And how . B y producing before

?
my o wn eyes without waiting for me to search for

,
them indisputable facts of sorcery and magic

,
.
And what is it determines these sudden impulses

’
these rav ing epidemics antipathies and cries the

, ,
convulsions that one can make durable ? What if

not the very prin ciple we employ the a gent so
:
thoroughly well known to the ancients 9 What y o u

call nervous fluid or magnetism the men O f O ld called
occult force the power O f the so ul subj ection
, , ,
magic " An element existin g in nature unknown ,
to most men gets hold O f a person and withers and

,
breaks him dow n as the raging hurricane does the

bulrush It scatters men far apart it strikes them
.
,
in a thousand places at the same time without their

perceiving the invisible f o e or bein g able to protect
themselves B u t that this e lement should choose
.
friends and elect favourites O bey their thoughts

, ,
answer to the human voice and understand the

meanin g O f trac e d signs that is what people cannot
,
realize and what their reason rej ects and that is ,
what I saw ; and I say it here most emphatically

that for me it is a truth and a fact demonstrated
for ever
And thi s is a phase of Animal Magnetism that
has been repeatedly O ffered as the only intelli gible
e xplanation of the phenomena O f sorcery and as
repeate dly rej ected by the schools that have no

knowledge either O f the facts or the agent which
alone is capable of exp lainin g them .
According to the experience O f mesmerists the ,
magnetizer can comm unicate his fluid to a variety of

O bj ects which thus become conductors or agents o f
,
his action to all persons with whom he is in magnetic

relations These agents are water O il woollen and
.
, ,
cott on materials trees etc Charles Dickens found

, , .
a means of ma gnetizin g water b y means of piece s of

sugar which had been subj ected to magnetization ,
which were then readily distributed among the

O ld country folk in K ent .
Magnetized water is one of the most powerful

agents that can be employed inasmuch as it is ,
conveyed at once to the stomach and th e nce chs ~
tributed thro u ghout the sv s t e m actin g upon the ,
circulation and the di gestion tak ing in turn acc ord , ,
in g to the i m mediate needs O f t h e body the pl ace ,
O f anodyne diaphoretic proph ylactic and purgative

, , .
An a gent Of such universal utility is necess arily

not thou ght very hi ghly of b y those whose busi ne ss
it is to scare Nature into O bedience by cryptic pre ”
s c ri t io n s and unnatural concoctions

p G iven normal .
health and a desire to heal the su ff erer yo u may ,
take a vessel of water and having thoroughly,
cleansed the hands dip them in vine gar : S hake

,
O ff the superfluous moisture b y flickin g the h ands
violently towards the ground C ontinue so to do .
until the fi n ge r tips tin gle with a sli ght streaming

-
s e nsation down the forearm and hand .
Now take a clean glass and pour into it some fre sh

cold water which must not have been boiled o r
,
heated previously P lace the glass upon the le ft

.
hand with the fin gers closed around it to ste ady

it and with the ri ght hand m ake passes from above
,
the glass downwards for a s core O f strokes or mo re .

if there is one is directed not to the m ind of th
, , i
patient but to Nature herself and the suggestion 0

, ,
an intent will is equivalent to a command I n th . i
use of magnetized water as a purgative no coli , .
pains are felt either during or after the ac tion

As an anodyne it leaves no sense of depression 0 1
lassitude behind it ; while as a tonic it is not ae com
a n ie d b any rise of temperature nor fo llowed by
p y
the slightest constipation .
A magnetic subj ect will readily distinguish mag

n e t ize d water from water that has not been so tre ate d
and I have known persons who could normally

distin guish between them thou gh at first I was ,
unwilling to believe this and only convinced myse l

of it after tr yin g a number of tricks to disco v e i
if there were a possibility of su ggestion or fancy
B u t all I discovered was the fact that in some re
markable w a v magnetic water could be distin guishe d
b y its taste .
B u t whatever agent we make use of for the pur

‘
pose of conveying the nervous or V i tal fluid it has ,
been thou ght even b y those who practise magne tism

,
that rapport with the patient must fir

established This however is not the case ; though
.
, ,
undoubtedly it is more certain in its action whe n

magnetization by contact has preceded the use of
an agent The agent is the means of continuing
.
magnetization and especially of attackin g disease s

,
that are internal and deep seated and not me re ly -
nervous or superficial B u t for all that there is

.
,
no reason whatsoever w h y magnetization should

not be b e gu n by means of a suitab le agent Con .
H YP NOTI S M AND M E S M E R I S M 20 5
magnetism is not generally e ff ective at once ,
comes so b y persistence the action being

,
ative S o if water or any other agent is per

.
with it will bring about the desired e ffect Of

,
.
is I am quite certain since I have treated persons

,
a distance by this means alone never having set ,
e s upon them . Yet so wonderful is the sympath y

throughout Nature that I have been
,
conscious of changes taking place in my

y,
of pains and sickness which
, had n o
than the subtle connection of sympathy

subj ect and myself mid the a gent I had
,
ed I know of persons who are capable of

.
micating their s e nsa tio ns at a great distance

with whom they are in close sympathy ,
nothing in t h e nature of thought trans

is observable between them With others .
s ready communication of th ought or of

images but no community of sensation .
Hypnotism pr o poses to secure the same results

magnetization b y mechanically induced trance -
pp le m e n t e d by suggestion
. B u t while t h is process
elf peculiarly to the production of phe
and is e xtremely useful for experimental
s and psychic research it cannot pretend
,
the same therapeutic value as magnetization ,
it does nothing to reinforce nature or to

depleted vitality Wh ere insensibility
.
it is equally useful and as in all ,
t o m at ic and su b c o n
active very valuable ,
p n o t ic suggestion .
If however yo u induce the hypnotic sleep b ;
, ,
any of the usual methods and then stand asid

while a phono graphic record film is set in actiq
to voice the number of original suggestions th ,
”
effect will surprise many into an entirely ne r

view of the matter and those who do not nor
,
believe that the personal factor is at all considerab le

will come to the conclusion that it is the only factc
which counts for anything in the whole proc e ss
The compl e te i nsensibility to written or spoke }
instr uctions other than t h ose which pass thro ugl

,
the mind of the magneti z er is in itself a sugge stim

,
which the upholders of the non magnetic po sitior -
would do well to ponder I prefer however t .

, ,
leave the schools of the S alpét rie re and Nancy t

thresh out the question to its natural and ine v itabl
conclusion .
Deleuze who followed the teac hi ng of P uyse gur

,
of Mesmer Van Helmon t and P aracelsus h as som

, ,
excellent admonitions to those anxious to p rac tis

Animal Magnetism which m ay very suit ably b
,
quoted in c onclusion
P ersons who follow this subj ect m ay be div ide
into mo classes .
The first class comprehends thos e who having ,
recognized in themselves the faculty of doin g go o< “
b y ma gnetis m or at least hoping to succeed the re in

,
wish to make use of it in their families or among ,
their friends or with some poor patients but who

, ,
h a v in g duties to fulfil or business to follow do no ,
magneti z e except in circumstances where it appe ar

t o them neces sary without seekin g publicity w ithou
, ,
l
preferable to science In what relates to theory
.
,
imperfect notions expose us to dangerous errors .
The labourer who cultivates his farm as his fathe rs

did before him collects every year the price of
,
his labours S hould he give way to an inclination

.
to pursue experimental methods he may be ruine d

,
before he is enlightened by his o wn experience .

”
Up to a point this is very good advice but it is,
doubtful whether any amount of advice howe ve r ,
sound will deter men from making experime nts

,
and sacrificing both life and fortune to the satisfac

tion of tha t desire for knowledge which is inhere nt
in every active and well developed m ind As
-
.
between the curative and experimental practice of

Mesmerism and Hypnotism there can be iittlr
doubt that Mesmerism as understood b y its be st
exponents is more ada pted to the curative method
while Hypnotism is peculiarly adapted to the
development of experimental psycholo gy As tc .
which branch of the subj ect has the greater claim

to our consideration is a matter not so easily
,
answered seein g that a profound knowledge of

,
psycholo gy is very necessary to the practice 0 1

“
even curative magnetism and the more we kuon

,
of the psychic origin of disease the better we

hall be equ ped to successfull deal with m b i
i o r c
s
p y
conditions as they arise .
M E TH O D o r MA G NE TI ZI NG
These brief notes on the subj ect will hardly bf
complete without some practical instruction Thi .
following method of inducing the mesmeric sle e ]

HYP NOTI S M AND M E S M E R I S M 20 9
has been found easy and reliable If the p atient is .
able to sit up place him in a comfortable chair with

,
fairly upright support at the back Tak e a seat .
opposite to him Take hold of his thumbs and

.
b ring your own thumbs into the palms of his hands

with a gentle pressure Now engage h is attention
.
,
and fix your eyes steadily on his for five minutes .
Allow him to close his eyes should they tire mean

while At the end o f five minutes let his hands
.
fall loosely into his lap rise to your fe e t and place

,
your hands firmly on his s h oulders for a few moments .
Next raise yo ur h ands above his head and make

passes do wnwards along th e arms as far as the
knees Do this for five minutes Now take his
. .
right hand in your left as at first and with your

, ,
right make rapid but s light shampoo strokes over

the eyes These stro k es are m ade with the hand
. _
and forearm working loosely from the elbow and ,
require practice ; the palm of th e hand barely

touches the clos e d eyelids At the end of half a
.
minute when you w ill have made upwards of 200

,
strok es give a slight j erk to t he rig h t arm of the

,
patient with your left and press with the right

,
thumb between his eyes the fingers of your right

,
resting on the top of his head .
If the patient h as surrendered his treatment

it will be found that the arm if 11 fall back
,
when loosed as a dead weight The eyelid being .
raised the pupil of the eye w ill be found to have

,
turned upw ards and inw ards to th e root of the nose .
The breath ing w ill be soft and regular and a mild ,
warmth and moisture will pervade the sk in .

That will suffice for the first sitting The patie nt .
m a y be roused b y a few sidelon g passes right and

left over the eyes and b y blowin g into them o r
,
wafting a fan over the eyes A few upward p asse s .
must then be made from the knees to the shoulde rs ,
and the patient invited to stand up and thoroughly

shake off the influence .
The nex t day at the sa me time a nd p lace (this is

important ) proceed as before It will be found that .
premonitory symptoms of the magnetic sleep will

soon be developed The patient yawns shive rs
.
,
and flushes in turn as if hot and cold water we re

runnin g down his back ; there are spasmodic twitche s
of the arms and legs the latter kickin g out forcibly
,
from time to time When thes e symptoms appe ar

.
the magnetic sleep rapidly deepens and f asc in ation I
or rigid catalepsy m ay be induced Fo r curative .
purposes it is not necessary that the cataleptic

stage should be reached for once the magnetic sle e p
,
is obtained the patient is not only susceptible to

,
curative agency but also is capable of localizing the

complaint and prescribin g a method of treatment
which the magnetizer should do all i n hi s powe r
to carry out F o r surgical purp oses ho weve r
.
, .
catalepsy and complete insensibility a re essential ,
but my readers will hardly require further instruo

tion under this head than is to be found in the works
by Dr James E sdaile and others who have succe ss
.
fully applied magnetism to clinical practice .
1
Th e st ate in w hich t h e p he no me na l side of t he aut o matic
f ac ulty is c o ns pic u o u sly dis p laye d .
C H AP TE R I
D I V I NATI O N
I N the succee di ng sections of t h is work I int e nd

to deal with that aspect of the subj ect of Occultism
which depends for its evidence on th e exercise of the
medi umistic or di vinatory faculty Wh at h as been.
said in P art I has relation to the exercise of a pur

p o siv e faculty guided
,
by intelligence and experience .
It represents Determinism in its application to the

hidden laws of Nature We are now ho w ever
.
, ,
c oncerned with the automatic faculty the intuitive ,
and divinato ry process of the human mind Many

’
of th e meth ods by which the automatic faculty

fin ds expression are allied to the purposive methods
of the Occult arts Cartomancy or divination by
.
cards for instance can only be e ffected after a

, ,
preliminary understanding of the mean ings attach

ing to the cards and this is in no S ense an automatic
,
or unconscious process but a voluntary and empirical

,
one We do not begin to employ the automatic

.
faculty unt il w e sh u ffle the cards with a view to

ascertain the un k nown elements E ven the dis .
position of the cards for this purpose is a purely

v oluntary empiri c i sm It c o ntrols o ur inter pret a
.
213
tion and our prognostics The construction of the
.
cards the meanin gs attached to them and the

, ,
method of laying them out for a divination are all

prej udicial elements of the art The automatic .
faculty triumphs over these limitations in the simple

act of shu ffling — and therein lies the whole secret
of Nat ure Let us suppose for a moment that we
.
decide upon a cert ain combination of cards falling

to gether that they shall si gnify Death The odds .
a gainst these cards coming up in the required order

and combination are thousands to one on any occa
sion That they do occasionally turn up is not
.
,
however so remarkable as that whe n e ve r the y do

, , ,
a death imme di ately follow s and the faculty of the

,
C artomante lies in predicting to whom that judgment

is determined .
In seership or scryin g by means of the crystal ,
etc a distinctio n exists between the purely inv o lun

.
, .
tary or pass i ve use of the faculty of clairvoyance

“
and that in which media are used Moreover .

,
some passives see directly and describe thin gs as

they actually are or will be at the time indicated
while others do n Ot see otherwise than by sym
,
bols
which require rat i on al interpretation .
In Geomancy also the automatic faculty is directed

by de fi nite methods and is supplemented by the use
of the rational faculty in the process of interpreta
tion M arks made haphazard in the sand or upon
.
a piece of paper have no meanin g for tho se who are

ignorant of geomantic sym bolism so tha t inasmuch ,
as th e symbols gain their meaning by the intention

practical the individual may be the less
his relations with that subconscious or s
part of h is nature which is related to the
S o uL
Individual consciousness cannot actively engage
in that which is external and that which is inte rnal
at one and the same time except the person be in
,
a state which is altogether abnormal The normal

.
mind is active in the wakin g consciousness during

the day and active in the sleeping consciousness
durin g the night . The waking consciousness is
otherwise known as the attentive mind and it is,
b y the depolarization of this that sleep is induced .
In certain phases of hypnosis both aspects of the

mind may be simultaneously active in part and the ,
same phenomenon is observed in somnambulism .
The following diagrams illustrate (1 ) the normal

wakin g consciousness (2) the normal sleeping
,
consciousness (3 ) the hypnotic or somnambulic

,
semi consciousness and (4 ) permanent dislocation

-
,
of the mental axis in cases of insanity *
The faculty of self depolarization and of divin g

-
down into the region of the submerged consciousness

ap pe ars to be naturally developed in t h e genuine
D IVINATION 21 7
medi um and the divin er Oth ers may induce this

.
faculty by the use of suitable media such as the

”
hypnotic di sc the crystal or the magic mirror
,
.
In others aga in it is induced only by hypnotic

, ,
treatment .
It is c hi efly when in doub t that we make our

appeal to it and no D ivin ation would be possible
,
without its c ons ent of function .
It has been affirmed with some S how of reason

, ,
that the subconscious mind is the intelligence prin

c iple of the evolving human entity and that it is ,
the storehouse of the di gested mem ories of all past

incarnations Oth ers however affi rm that it is
.
, ,
nas cent and rudim entary the in telligence of the .
animal soul in distinction from the rational prin

,
c ip le of the human so ul B u t whatever we m ay

.
argue concerning its status and functions in the

human economy we cannot deny that its powers
,
transcend those of the supraliminal mind and that

its association with the S oul of things is far more
in timate .
All divination in effect consists in the abi lity

, ,
to bring into t he region of our normal wakin g

consciousness th e thin gs which lie hidden in the
womb of Time S ome of the means by which this
.
is e ff ec ted w ill n o w be explained

’
.
CHAP TE R II
TH E TA RO T
D I V I NA TI O N by means of cards is a very ancient

practice It has been a ffi rmed that the cards as
.
we know them were invented for the purpose of

be guiling the hours of a feeble minded monarch -
.
My only comment on thi s statement is that any

kin g who believed the story would be very eas ily
be guiled I do not presume to say when cards were
.
first used for g amin g purposes but the Ta ro t from

,
which ordinary playin g cards are obviously derived

-
has a very ancient ori gin and moreover a very

profound one It is said that Herm es the Thrice
.
G reat en graved the symbols of the Tarot upon 22

lamin ae of gold Various expositions of the Tarot
.
have appeared from time to time and all a gree in ,
tracin g a connection between the Twenty two -
Maj or K eys and the letters of the Hebrew alphabet ,
be ginnin g with Aleph S everal attempts have been

.
made to associate the symbols of the Tarot with the

Three Divine P rinciples the Twelve S i gns and the
,
S even P lan e t s b u t all attempts app e ar to me fanciful

,
.
In addition to the Twenty two Major Keys -
there are fi f t y six Minor K eys and these are the same
-
,
21 8
E very Arcanum h as a threefold application
h av m g relation to the spirit soul and body of man ,
o r the spiritual in tellectual and material worlds

,
accordin g to those K abalists who have at

an exposition B u t I conceive a fourf old
.
tion vi z the S piritual the Intellectual the

, .
, ,
or E motional and the Material or P hysical ; for the

soul of man has two distinct aspects the Nous or , ,
mind and the A n tino us or passional principle ;

, ,
these being otherwise referred to as the Higher and

Lower S elf or the Human and Animal Man the form ,
or C orp us bein g altogether material and of no active

power save what it derives from the anim al souh
investing it On these lines the followin g inte rpre
.
t atio n may be found a useful key to the
T WE NT Y TWO
AR C A NA -
l The Magician
.
— represented by a figure o f a
man holding a baton or wand over the three sym
'
b o lic al forms the C u p the S word and the Denie r

,
.
Around him are sprin gin g up roses and lilies Ove r .
his head is a double nimbus in the form of the figure

8. This is the ma gician he who is master of the ,
four worlds the four e lements and the four principles

, ,
who is capable of e rc ising t h e creative will —an
adept .
In t h e S p iritua l rld he stands for the Creative
In the I nte lle ctual world The pure volition .
Tran sformation ; resolution ; t h e ability to propound

an d t o re solv e a p roblem ; to control the mind ;
TH E TA R OT 221
—
In the P sychic world Desire wh ic h is th e lower ,
11 of the will ; the ability to generate and to
th e control of the psyc h ic forces and t h e

of the passions .
—
e P hys ica l world The c ontrol of th e ele
o f physical forces ; the power to
’
ire and t o dispose of the material benefi ts of

'
‘
A great inventor .
The H gh i P r i e s te s s — The figure of a w oman

.
d h e r h ead surmounted by a solar disc b etween

,
On her breast 1 s a cross and on her lap the ,
or B ook of the Law wh ile at her feet is the ,
crescent S h e is seated between the pillars

.
—
mple called J achin and B oaz S ecurity and
S trength It represents I sis M aya and the V irgin
.
,
Mother of the world This Arcanum is also called

.
The Door of the Hidden S anctuary

“ ”
.
I n the S p iritua l world it denotes the Divine S ophia ,
the creative ima ination the universal matrix in

g , ,
and through which the supreme will is manifested .
—
(
In the I n te llec tua lworld Th e B inary or reflection

of Unity the law of alternation the pairs of opposites
, , ,
positive and negative etc the reason wh ich weighs

, ,
and balances discerning by comparison of known

,
things .
—
In the P sychic world Attraction and rep ul sion ;
the relations of the sexes ; love and hatred .
In the P hys ica l world— C hemical affinity (as acids

and alkalis
) t rade commerce
,
interchange barter , , .
The woman related to th e man for th e furth erance

of t h e ends of destiny :
3 The E mp re ss otherwise I s is Ura n ia A female
.
, .
fi gure reclining S h e holds the symbol of P owe r

.
in her hand and at her feet is the A n kh or symb ol

,
—
of life Venus At her feet the corn sprin gs full
.
eared and plentiful S h e is surrounded by the .
beauties of nature S h e represents Nature in .
association with the superior world or S uper nature ,

-
.
S h e is the first product of the S upreme Will and

Imagination the progeny of Divine Wisd om and
,
Love and unites in herself in t elligence and powe r

,
in their hi ghest manifestati on .
In the S p ir itu a l world this Arcanum denotes

th e knowledge of the two worlds the manifest and ,
unm anifest ; the past and future united in the

eternal Now .
In the I n te lle ctua l w o rld— Ideation th e productive ,
power of the m ind discrimination ,

.
In the P sychic world— The art of generation ,
fecundi ty parentage
, .
In the P hys ica l world— The power of expansio n ,
of multiplication ; growth development ; wealth , ,
plenty .
S to n e C u b e also kn o wn as the E mp e ro r
,
.
A man of mature age Seated upon the C hair of Initia

tion the M as onic C ube In his right hand is the
,
.
sceptre of de ifi c power the ansated cross ; and in his ,
left the globe the symbol of possession

, .
In the S p ir itua l world this fi gure represents the

realization successively and c ontinuously of the
, ,
Divin e Virtues in oneself .
In the I n e lle c t a
t u l world — The realization of the
I n th e I nte lle ctua l world —The laws of Necessit
y
and Liberty of Duty and P rivilege
, .
—
In th e P sychic world Th e choice between denial
or consent to the p r omptings of the lower nature .
The determination of conduct The experience of .
indulgence and abstention Instinct . .
—
In the P hysica l world Th e antagonism of natural
forces ; di ssociation ; disintegration ; fracture s ,
divorce parting ,
.
7 The C ha r io t of Osiris
. The figure of the S un
.
-
a
Go d stands in a car drawn by two sp h inxes the ,
one black and the other white It represents the .
illumination of the lower nature by the Higher Se lf ,
of the earth by the solar orb of the soul by the ,
S pirit .
—
In the S p iritua l world The sacred S eptenary ;
the ascendency of S pirit over Matter ; the penetra
tion of the mysteries b y the light of Divine
Intelligence .
In the I n te lle ctua l world The dispersal of doubt .
and error by the light of the intellect Mental .
acumen .
In the P s ychic world The dissemination of vital

.
energy b y magnetic vigour ; geniality and warmth

of nature ; vitality .
—
In the P hys ca l world The gamut of the seven
i
senses R adiation ; energy ; force The fulfilment
. .
of ambitions .
8 J u s tic e
. or the S word an d B a lanc e Justice
,
.
is s eated and vested in the robes of the judge .
In the left hand she holds the scales evenly

TH E TA R OT 225
balance d and in her right t h e sword uplifted

, .
S he represents the impartiality of Heaven and pro ,
claims that Go d is no respecter of persons that ,
Heaven has no favourites but always rew ards ,
virtue and punishes vice .
ir u a —
In the S p it l world Divine j ustice .
I n the I n te lle ctua l world — P ure reason correct ,
judg ment comparison equity

, , .
—
In the P sychic world Th e attainment of peace
and happiness by moderation temperance and ,
impartiality .
P i l —
In the hys ca world The balance of forces .
The law of equilibrium Attraction and re p u l .
sion C ompensation S ense of V alue R ewards

. . .
and punishments .
9 The V e ile d L amp or the H e r mit

. The figure
, .
of a sage or philosopher carrying a lamp in one hand

and a sta ff in the other He represents the pilgrim .
soul the seeker after truth

, .
In the S p iritua l world it denotes the realization

of the Divine selfhood by manifestation or
embodiment .
In the I n te lle c tua l world— P rudence and circum

sp e c t io n discri mination of true and false of right
, ,
and wrong ; C lassification .
—
In the P sychic world S election c h oice lik es and , ,
dislikes ; morality .
In the P i
hys ca l world — Molecular construction ;
science ; discovery ; distinction of caste ; order and
arrangement ; carefulness caution ,
.
1 0 The S p hin x or Whe e l o f F o rtune

.
,
The R ota .
Q
or Wheel on which is seated the S phinx uph olding
the sword Around the wheel are the letters o f
.
the law as defined in the Tarot and the four fix e d ,
signs of the Zodiac the man li on bull and eagle , , , .
It represents the law of correlated succession .
In the S p iritua l world — The Law of K arm a ; ,
spiritual cause and e ffect ; spiritual selection .
In the I n te lle ctua l world — The rational fac ulty ;

induction and deduction ; conn ectedness ; perceptio n
of relativity and time intervals progression , .
In the P sych c world

i — The regulation of the
emotions and passions and the application of the
psy chic forces b y the moral law R egime training .
, ,
orderlin ess .
P —
In the hys ica l world The law of action and
reaction ; good and bad fortune ; the cyclic law
of events ; periodicity ; rise and fall ; revolution ;
circulation .
N B —This symbol is that of the aspirant t o

. .
~
Occult Initiation The symb ols of the man bull.

, ,
li on and eagle or serpent denote the four maxims

,
K now Will Dare K eep silent which are imposed

, , , ,
on all neophytes These are the keys to the attain

.
ment of power .
1 1 The M u zzle cl L io n or S tre ngth

. A woman ,
.
closing the mouth of a lion b y a strength which

d e m ands no e ffort .
—
In the S p iritua l world The omnip otent .
—
In the I n te lle ctua l world Moral and intellectual
force the determination of energy to the a e com
p lish m e n t of things by knowled g e of the law .
of a ff ections reclus iveness ; deprivation of psychic
force catalepsy .
In the P h ys ic a l world — Death ; ruin paral sis

y
collapse nullity .
1 4 The Two Urns or Te mp e ra n ce

.
,
An angelic .
fi gure pours pure water from one vessel to another .
On hi s forehead is the symbol of Life and on his ,
breast the ine ffable name Adonai and the triangle

, ,
‘
within the square It represents the Divin e life

.
in activity
—
In the S p iritua l world The eternal movement
of life .
—
In th e I n te lle ctu a l world The combination of
ideas ; friendship ; S ociolo gy .
In the P s ychic world — The i nterplay of the

emotions ; reciprocal affection ; intercourse ; social
life
.
In the P hysica l world — The relations of the

sexes : chemical combination ; amalgamation ; public
intercourse .
1 5 Typ ho n or Th e D e v il
.
,
The E vil One seated
.
upon a throne in the Inferno his footstool an iron ,
cube to which male and female devils are chained .
It represents the spirit of Discord .
In the S p iritua l world— The principle of evil ,
the refractory will opposed to the predestined order

of th ings .
In the I n te lle ctua l world— Magic mystery ; the ,
unknown ; controversy ; f re e th o u gh t ; fatali sm .
—
I n the P sychic world Anger ; passion ; hatre d
malice and fear .
TH E TA R OT 229
—
In the P hysica l w orld Antipathy ; discord ; strife ;
rep ul sion ; ri ot and lawle ssness .
1 6 The B la s te d To we r or the L ightn ing F la sh

. , .
A tower struck b y li ghtning A crown is seen.
falling from the pinnacle and also two men

, .
It denotes the Divine visitation .
—
In the S p iritua l world The overthrow of spiritual
pride ; the descent of Typhon ; the fall of the an gels .
—
In the I n te lle ctu al world The pri de of intell e c t
and its consequence ; the law of retribution ; insanity .
—
In the P sychic world P sychic repercussion ;
ostentation the humbling of the autocrat .
—
I n the P hys ica l world C ataclysms ; earthquakes ,
storms ; overthrow reversal ; ruin ; fatality ; sudden

death ; catastrophe ; accidents .
1 7 The S tar o f the M agi or the S tar

.
, A female .
figure pour n water from one vessel into a lake

and from another upon the dry land Above her .
are the s e v e n S t ars among which there shines the

'
great P ole S tar of the Magi It represents the

.
Divine E xpectanc y .
In the S p i r it u a —
l world F aith the reali z ation of
,
Hope The manifestation of the unrevealed The

. .
b e atifi c V i sion .
—
In the I n te lle ctua l world Absolute knowledge ;
the evidence of experience ; illumination ; astrology .
In the P s ychic world — E xpectancy ; geniality ;

sympathy ; charity ; optimism ; confidence .
In the P hy s ic a l world — B irth success ; relief

sustenance .
18 The Twilight or the M oo n

.
,
A night scene
.
,
the luminary distilling dew upon the earth while a ,
dog and a wolf are baying the moon and a crab

is crawlin g from the water It denotes the Great .
I n fi nit u de .
In the S p iritua l world — The abysm of the In finite

the womb of Time ; the Divine amplitude ; infinity ;
spiritual darkness .
I n —
In the te lle ctua l world The darkness of negation
imbecility ; lunacy ; vacuity ; time and space as
di stinguished from duration and di stance .
P —
In the sychic world Doubt ; despair ; hesitancy ;
vacill ation and inconstancy .
—
In the P hysica l world Darkness ; emptiness ;
denial ; enemies ; snares and ambushes .
1 9 The R e s p le n de n t Light or the S un

. A child
,
.
with the banner of Life seated upon a white horse .
The c hil d s head is adorned by a chaplet of flowers

’
while above hi m shines a brilliant sun It represents .
the Divine E ff ul gence .
In the S p iritua l world— I t is the supreme Heav en ;

the P resence of the Divin e B ein g ; the K in gdom of
Heaven ; the angeli c life .
In the I ll
n e e c tu l
t a world — The first principle ; the
origin and source of things ; the laws of being .
In the P sychic world— Vital energy ; magnetic

power ; radiant jo y ; happiness ; benevolence .
—
In the P hysica l world Life ; energy force ; succe ss , ,
honours ; elevation attainment ,

.
20 The R e surre ctio n or the J udg me nt The An gel

.
,
.
of Life soundin g the Trumpet while the dead rise ,
f rom their to mbs It rep resents the Great V ocation

.
.
23 2 A MANUAL OF O CC UL TI S M
shoulder holds in hi s hand the flower of dalli
,
With h au gh t v mien he walks blindly to the verge

of a precipice It is the symbol of the Divine
.
Inscrutability .
In the S p iritual w orld — The law of Divine

Necessity .
In the I n te lle ctua l world —F atalism ; egoti sm

b lind credulity ; i gnorance ; error .
P —
In the sychic world Unrestrained passions ;
selfis hn ess ; vanity ; speculation .
P —
In the hysic al world Inc onsequence blindness ;
danger ruin detachment isolation conspicuous ,
folly .
These interpretations are not presumed to b e

exhaustive nor t o follow any other order than that
‘
of the Tarot cards which needless to say have been

, , ,
shuffled considerably since their delivery to the world

b y the thrice great Hermes They represent the
.
three stages of Initiation with their ten seven

, ,
and three steps culm inatin g in Attainment (21 ) or

,
F ailure He who can so dispose the symb ols

of the Tarot or G olden B ook of Hermes will need
, ,
no oth er initiation than he can himself e ff ect .

C HA P T E R III
C A RT O MA NC Y
TH E follow ing methods have reference to the

ordinary pac k of 3 2 cards the twos threes fours
, , ,
fi ves and sixes bein g rej ected .
TH E S H U FF L E
This should be done w ithout effort prej udice or ,
design The cards should lie loosely in the left

.
hand while the right manipulates them the min d ,
meanwhile resting intently upon the obj ect desired

of the divination If the consultant is n o t expert
.
at shu ffling so that it cannot be done automatically

,
and without t he attention being fixed upon it the ,
cards should be laid face dow nwards upon a table

and mixed by a light circ ul ar pressure with b oth
hands They are then brought together to form a
.
pack.
TH E C U T
The cards being placed face downwards the pack ,
mu st be cut with the le ft (the passive ) hand into

three lots turning them f ac e u p w ards
, _
.
TH E CAR TO MA NTE
then ta k es the lots one by one taking note of the
,
car ds wh ic h lie exposed on the t o p of eac h lot .
23 3
The pac k is then put together in the same order as

before the Cu t .
A variety of methods may be followed in laying

out the cards Much depends upon the object in
.
view as to what method should be employed It .
will doubtless be sufficient if I recite several of the

more approved methods leaving the reader to make ,
selection of one or more of them as occasion may

require .
B ut first let us learn the meanings of the cards .
TH E S U I TS
D iamo nds have relation to money profit loss , , .
They are governed by the cards which are in touch

with them In questions of time they denote speed
. .
C lub s denote business profession position ; mental , ,
pursuits .
H e arts govern domestic affairs soci al relations , ,
love affection
,
.
S p ade s denote sickness death loss disappoint , , ,
ment delay di stance

, ,
.
TI ME
D iamo nds denote the morning .
C lub s midday ,
.
H e arts evening , .
S p a de s night ,
.
C O MP L E X I O NS
D iamo nds how very fair people with fl ax e n or

S ,
s andy h air an d blue eyes If aged white he aded .

,
-
.
S P E C I FI C M E ANI NG S
D ia mo nds .
S e ve n stands for a gift j e w ellery children

, , .
E ight, roadway j ourneys short travels ,

.
Nin e ,
speed sharpness ; wounds quarrels ; sudden
, ,
events .
Te n , a city town ; s uccess

, .
Ace ,
m o n e y ; a rin g ; a letter
,
.
C lu b s .
S e ve n , victory success ; achievement by

,
genc e .
E igh t,
papers documents ; a firm friend ; agree
,
ments contracts
,
.
Nin e merrymaki n g ; pleasure ; society

,
.
Te n distant j ourney b y land ; business ; succes s

,
by the use of faculty ; surmountin g .
A ce good fortune ; success ; preferment

,
.
H e a rts .
S e ve n , a sm all wish ; slight gratification ; domestic

changes .
E ight, clothes ; invitations ; love and courtin g ;

furniture .
Nin e the wished for thing ; gratification ; j oy

,
-
.
Te n marria ge ; a fortunate chan ge ; success

,
.
A c e the house ; a cot or cradle ; good fortune

,
.
S p a de s .
S e ve n an upset ; a removal ; disorder ; a reversal

“
.
,
E ight, nigh t time ; sic k ne ss ; loss ; a s plit or quarrel

-
,
CA R T O MAN C Y 23 7
Nine di sapp o intment ; delay ; death; loss ; undo m g

,
and failure .
Te n wate r ; a voyage ; a great distance ; th ings

,
Ace , the grave ; a foundation ; a post or position .
The nine of Diamonds is called the S word

”
and the curse of S cotland The ace of C lubs .
is called the Horseshoe and oth er cards have ,

”
their o w n appropriate symbolic names .
C O M B I NA TI O NS
E very card has its own specific meaning b u t is ,
capable of c onvey ing a flexed me aning by combina

tion with other c ardS Thus you may have a clutc h.
of two or three cards touching one another the result

,
,
being indicated by the combined meanings of the

cards involved The following combined meanings
.
will aid in t he process of interpretation

,
A C lu tch o f Tw o .
E ight of H e arts and A ce o f D iamo nds an affection,
ate letter ; a propo sal of marriage ; a letter of

invitation .
S e ve n f o and Te n of D ia mo nds
C lu b s successful ,
business ; financial victory .
Nin e o f C lu b s and A ce o f S p a de s ; a will .
S e v e n o f S p a de s and A c e of H e arts a chan ge of ,
re sidence .
E ight o f D iamo nds and Te n of S p ade s a wet ,
j ourn ey .
Te n o f C lu b s and Te n o f S p a de s ,
Nin e o f D iamonds and S e ve n o f S p a de s an , ac c id
a flight .
Nine of D ia mo nds and Nin e of S p ade s death , .
E ight of H e arts and E ight o f C lu b s a contract ,
S e ve n of S p a de s and E ight o f H e a rts a change of ,
clothes or furniture
,
.
Nin e of D iamo nds and E ight of C lub s a writ ; a ,
summons or telegram, .
S imilarly all pairs of cards may be combined to

form a rea di ng The meanings derived will have
.
reference to any person indicated b y the C ourt Card

they may touch In this respect .
C ards a b ov e the person signified denote that to

which he is striving .
C a rds b e lo w denote tha t which lies at his fee t ,
things accomplished .
C ards to th e le ft show what is thrown away or to

be avoided ; the results of past action ; antagonisms .
C a rds to the r ight indicate that whic h the future

holds ; the outcome of present action .
f A C lu tch o Thr e e .
Thre e A ce s a rise in position

, .
Thre e K in gs success , .
Thr e e Q u e e ns scandal ; c ompany

, .
Thr e e K n a ve s embarrassments
, .
Thre e Te n s a rise in position

, .
Thre e Nin e s delay if including the S pade Nine ;

, ,
disapp ointment if the Heart Nine is absent Other

,
.
w ise speedy success

,
.
C HAP T E R I V
V A RI O U S ME TH O D S
1 . TH E WH E E L OF F O R TU NE
IN this method the 3 2 cards only are used The .
positions correspond to the twelve astrological

Houses (which see ) and have the same signifi c at ions
-
, .
The cards are laid out in the order indicated by the

numbers in the following diagram and the pairs ,
are read in relation to their positions .
The 1 3 th 1 4th 1 5 th and 1 6 th cards are calle d

, ,
the go ve rning cards The 1 7 th is the ke y card . .
The three cards left over are what goes out of

the life .
D iamo nds belong to the 1 st House ; C lub s to the

l 0 th H e a rts to the 7t h ; and S p a de s to the 4t h .
ace of any suit is in its strongest position

occupyin g its o wn House The kings are in .
position when they are the go ve rn ing cards of

own angles 6 g the K ing of Diamonds in the
, . .
position ; the K in g of Clubs in the 1 4 th ; the

of Hearts in the 1 5 th ; and the K i ng of S pades
the l 6 th position .
E ach of the Houses can be occupied by one

tw o cards wh ic h w ill then be i n position of g
,
240
V A R IOU S M E THO D S 241
strength ; and the angles will have three cards ,
similarly placed in positions of strength Thus .
l st H o use is strengthened by Ace of Diamonds ,
7 Hearts or 1 0 S pades
,
.
2n d H o u s e 8 Hearts Jack of S pades

, , .
3rd H o us e 9 Hearts Q ueen of S pades

, , .
4th H o us e Ac e of S pades 10 Hearts or 7 C lubs

, , , .
5 ih H o us e Jack of Hearts 8 C lubs

, ,
.
6th H o us e Q ueen of Hearts 9 Clubs

, ,
.
7th H o use 7 Diamonds Ace of Hearts 1 0 Club s

, , , .
8th H o use Jack of C lubs 8 Diamonds

, , .
9th H o u s e Q ueen of C lubs 9 Diamonds

, , .
l oth H o us e Ace of C lubs 1 0 Diamonds 7 S pades

, ,
~
, .
11th H o us e Jack of Diamonds 8 S pades

, , .
H o us e Q ue e n o f Diamonds 9 S pades
’
, , .
The Whe e l .
242 A MA NUAL OF O CC UL TI S M
The cards being shuffled and o u t they are laid ,
out as shown above The cartomante will then

.
be gin the interpretation by giving the combined ,
meaning of cards 3 0 3 1 3 2 throwin g them away as

, , ,
of no further consequenc e .
—
The readin g of the future begins with 8 1 13 ;
1 —
the pair 1 8— 1 being read together in relation to 1 3 ,
which controls the combination This pair 1 8 — 1 .
has relation to the C onsultant .
,
—
Next pair 1 9 2 is read in conn ection with
,
.
—
finance Next pair 20 3 in regard t o letters and
, ,
relations .
The 1 2 pairs are finally exhausted in the

Th e ke y card is th at which for the
ates the life and fortunes the means b y w h i ,
or failure will come and if a Court C ard a p

‘
that colourin g will dominate everythin g .
or she who can say yes or no confirming or ,
the means .
If the cards read well in the pairing and appear ,
to promise good fortune the ke y card will S how the

,
means by which this g ood will come and v ic e v e rsa ,

.
Wh en the an gles or cardinal points— the 1 st 1 0th , ,
7 t h and 4 t h cards — are good the whole fortune ,
will be greatly enhanced for good B u t when .
cards occupy these positions any good will no ,
of a permanent or secure natur e .
The an gular cards 1 1 0 7 and 4 are to be referred

, , , ,
to the governors numbers 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 respectively

, , , , , ,
and thence to the ke y card .
Th e wheel may be set o u t thrice at a si tting .

C ar ds 1and 3 are read together and in reference

,
to 9 and 1 0 These cards will show the aspirations

.
,
hopes and intentions of the C onsultant .
C ards 2 and 4 are read together and referred also

,
to 1 1 and 1 2 ; the augury having significance in

regard to fortune achieved the present condition
,
and what lies at the feet of the C onsultant as his o wn .
The S ta r .
C ards 6 and 8 are read togethe r and in relation

to 1 0 and 1 2 in reference to what i
,
s coming ; t he
future ; the result of present action .
After the general reading note the cards touching

the C onsultant or centre card and also the 1 3th card ;
also the general tone of the cards above and to t he
ri ght Fo r if the cards ab ove and to the right are
.
re d or predominantly so or Clubs touched by Heart

s
,
or Diamonds and especially if the 1 3 th card is a

,
VA R IOU S M E THOD S 245
go o d one then you may safely promise the attain

,
ment of th e ambi tions and a brilliant future .
Wh en the tirage has relation to a S pecific question ,
the Nine of Hearts must be present and the Nine

of S p ade s absent or t h e wis h will fail of fulfi lment
,
or be abandoned .
3 . TH E TA B L E T
“
The 3 2 cards are all employe d in this method of

divination After shu ffling and cutting the cards
.
are laid face upwards in four rows of eight cards

each from left to right workin g downwards
, , .
The C onsultant being found by the sex and com

plexion the count is made from this to the ninth
,
card in every direction the c a rds being paired up ,
and read togeth er with those whic h lie in contact

with them .
The cards surrounding the S ignifi c at o r or con

sult an t card must be taken special note of as in dic at
ing events near at hand the environment etc , , .
The House card or Ac e of Hearts is then taken

-
,
and the count made from it in the same way to ,
find out what fortune attaches to the home If .
there is a dominant wish the Nin e of Hearts is taken

ifi c a t o r and the count made in the same
,
as before If it counts up to the C onsultant

.
use card there will be reali z ation of t h e

-
,
and d e sires .
n t can also be made fr om the left hand card -
top ro w (that whic h w as fi rst laid do wn ) The .
card in every cas e and th e ninth from the ,

ninth continuously are noted and re a
,
d in connec
with those touchin g them .
F inally the cards are t aken up in pairs the l st

, ,
and 3 2n d the 2n d and 3 1st and so on endin g with

, , ,
the 1 6 th and 1 7 th These pairs are read together

.
and pro gnostics drawn from their combined

meanings .
Many other methods of laying out the cards are

in vo gue and there is one which has S pecial applica
,
tion to the events which oc c ur from day to day ,
but I am not privileged to give this in its true form

,
and must therefore content myself by omitting it

entirely The above methods will however serve
.
, ,
for all practical purposes and will be found

,
to contain a complete justification of th e use o f

C artomanc y .
function with which we are concerned in th e study
of clairvoyance whether natural or induced
, .
The ran ge of our sense perceptions puts us c on

-
t in u ally in relations with the material world o r ,
rather with a certain part of it only B u t the gamut .
of sensation is limited in us Many insects birds .

,
and quadrupeds have keener sense organs than we -

.
The photographic plate can register beyond the

highest range of our sense of sight The X Rays .
-
h ave put us in relations with a new order of impres

sion records quite beyond normal sense perception
-
.
Th e animalcul ae and microbic

have yet their own sense organs related to a
-
'
of lif e b e yo n d our ken We know most posi

.
that Nature does not cease to exist where we

‘
to perceive her Yet there are people f

.
enough to require the evidence of the senses in

of things which cannot normally be perceived
who would scout the idea that visions may be seen
in a cry stal unless they could be pointed out and
perceive d by them .
Th e relation of our sense organs to the several -
degrees of matter to solids fluids gases etc vary

, ,
‘
, ,
.
,
very considerably with different persons The aver .
a ge wool sorter would leave many an artist behind

-
in his discrimination of colour S hades Odours are -

.
not only di fferently sensed by various individuals ,
but also they a ff ect people differently .
The perception of sound also aff ords evidence of

a wide ran ge of variability in the acoustic sense .
Nei th er is it w holly a matter of quantity S ounds .

,
CR Y S TAL GA ZIN G
-
249
s o dours and flavour s have a q ualitative

,
which di ff ers with the individual percipient .
”
Hence arises the variety of tastes of likes and ,
dislik es observable in a mixed community The .
experience is a general o n e b u t th e principle involved

,
appears to have escaped re c o gnit io n s im p ly because

it is a psychological and not a m a t e r ia ls o r phy sical
'
one Bu t to come to the practical part of our

.
subject l e t us examine first of all what we under

,
stand by th e terms Clairvoyance and C rystal ga z ing -

.
Clairvoyance or Cle ar V ision may be natural or

induced Natural clairvoyance is more common
.
g certain commu n ities than others It has

.
stated that the inhabitants of basalt territory

to natural clairvoyance which if true , , ,
inly lead to the conclusion that the

ormal to man and under certain favouring
will become active It is an established
.
fact that certain sensitive persons are nervously

affected by the presence of water and this has been ,
utilized by some for the purpose of finding springs

and underground currents .S uch persons are kno w n
”
as Dowsers . If these are aff ected by the presen ce
o f underground water it is quite reasonable to suggest
that oth ers may be similarly a ffected by the presence

of basaltic rocks beneath the surface of the land .
Natural clairvoyants then may be regarded as

, ,
those in wh om the faculty is more or less persistent .
In coming into a locality they will describe thin g s

which have already taken place there as if they were
p resently co ns cious of t h em or as ,if t h e events w ere
actually tak ing place before their eyes At other .
times they will describe events which are sub se

quently enacted There appears to be no sense of
.
time attaching to the vision .
Induced clairvoyance is in effect nothing more , ,
than t h e faculty of natural clairvoyance brought

into temporary activity by suitable excitation .
The C rystal is a ready means of developing

clairvoyance where a tendenc y to it is kn o wn to .
exist It is clear pellucid quartz or beryl sometimes

.
,
oval in shape but more generally spherical Baron

, .
R eich enbach credited it with highly magnetic

qualities capable of producing in a suitable subject , ,
a state analogous t o the ordinary w aking tranc e

o f the h ypnotists R eichenbach has shown by a
.
,
series of experiments upon sensitive and hypnotized

s ubj ects that metals and other substances produced
,
marked effects in contact with the human body .
The same substance was found to affect di fferent

patients in diverse manner The hypnotic e xp e ri .
ments of Dr Charcot the well known French bio

.
,
-
lo gis t have also demonstrated the rapport existing

,
be tween the sensitive and foreign bodies in contact ;

as for instance when a bottle containing poison
, ,
was taken at r andom from among a number of others

and placed on the bac k of the patient s neck the ’
hypnotized subj ect would at once develop all the

symptoms o f poisoning b y arsenic st ryc hn in e p ru ssic , ,
acid etc it being afte r wards asc ertained tha t

’
.
, ,
th e bottle thus applied actually contained the t o xins

w hose e ffects had been portrayed by th e subject .
aided by favouring circumstances In most persons
.
the natural powers take a more practical turn making ,
them successful in mundane a ff airs rather than in

those that are psychic and spiritual All are no t .
constituted alike and it is well tha t it is so The

, .
distribution of natural gifts proceeds from the celes

tial world and is so ordered that each person born
,
on this planet may take his part in the economy o f

life The spiritual needs of mankind are included
.
in this economy and there are born into the world

,
from time to time those who are specially endowed

with the faculty of spiritual interpretation with ,
psychic gifts such as c lairv o yan c e t e le p ath y p sycho

, ,
metry etc su c h p e rs o n s being the natural channels

,
.
,
of communication between the superior and in ferior ,
or the in ternal and external worlds They are to

.
h umanity what a certain order of microbic life is

to the bod y of man — o r g anic int erpreters t ran slat
,
in g the elements o f food into blood nerve fibre , , ,
tissue etc a greeably to the laws of their being

,
.
, ,
Amon g any people who are alive to the paramount

importance of maintaining the open door between
this world and the spiritual universe such media ,
are cared for and protected and suitable conditions

are supplied for the exercise of their faculty It .
was so in the case of the S ybils among the Greeks ;

it is th us also in India to day-
.
C HAP T E R V I
P RE L I M I NA RI E S A ND P RAC TI C E
I N th e practice of Clairvoyance by natural means ,
patience is very necessary Admitting that the .
of t he faculty is there Nature requires not ,
suitable conditions but also adequate time in

,
display her powers Here again w e fi nd .
ram e n t al di fferences ; and it may be useful in

p e
place to in di cate by what means and by what

seership may most readily b e attained .
In regard to the subj ect medium or seer th ere

, ,
are two distinct temperaments in which the faculty

may be expe c ted to develop very readily There .
is the nervous temperament as sociated with a high

muscular development classified as the mental
,
o t iv e temperament It is characterized by
.
ac t ivity of body and mind a certain nervous ,
n and excitability promin ent features full

, ,
development prominent brows intent gaze

, , ,
sallow complexion Mr E van R oberts who

. .
,
ed so prominently in the Welsh R evival of 1 90 5 ,
is a characteristic example of this class of subj ects .
The other class in whom the passive temperament

is present an d to w hom visions come by reflection
images mirrored in a moveless lak e are k n o wn ,
253
by the follo w ing characteristics full and lymphatic
habit pale or delicate complexion blue eyes straight
, , ,
fi n e hair small plump a n d c o ldh an ds an d a languid

“
, , ,
disposition .
There are many variants from these two main

types of course but they are cited as being very
, ,
distinctive and also they obtain th eir development

,
by q uite opposite means .
The p ositive seer works with e ff ort throwin g o ut ,
t h e soul images by the power of the will perceivin

-
g ,
them with more or less accurac y and thereaf ter ,
turning them over in th e mind reasoning and ,
questionin g concernin g their import and meaning .
The passive seer on the co ntrary w orks not at all

, ,
and makes no effort the v isions comin g im p e rc e pt

,
ib ly almost unconsciously and havin g generally a

“
, ,
l iteral interpretation or ful filment .
In the case of th posi tive seer the visions arc

symbolic a l and seldom capable of a literal applica
t ion ,
even though they m ay be found to have a .
material f u lfi lfn e nt With the p assive s eer it is

.
otherwise the visions being actual visions of what

,
has happened or w ill th e reafter transpire .
Of these two kinds of se e rship the p ass1v e i s the

more serviceable because more perspicuous but it ,
has the disadvantage of bein g largely under the .
control of external influences and s o frequently ,
incapable of bein g e xercised at all .
The p ositiv e type of seer exercises an introspective

vision searchin g in wardly towards the soul world
,
-
wh ence revelation proceeds The p a ssive seer o n . ,

25 6 A M AN UAL OF O CC ULTI S M
black velvet or silk bag w hich will not scratch the
,
surface .
It must not be thou ght that the visions are in

the crystal or mirror itself They are in the sub
.
conscious mind or soul of the seer ; but the mirror

serves as a me di um for visualizin g the impressions
which come up before the mind s e ye and also ’
produce inhibition of the basilar portion of the

brain throu gh the optic thalami thus placing the ,
attentive mind in a passive condition E theric .
perturbation caused b y combustion disturbs the

odylic substance and therefore no direct rays of
,
light should be allowed to f all on the mirror The .
di ff used light j ust after sunset is the best for pur

posin g and seering and the position of the seer
,
should be facing west with the direct light on the

back of the mirror and o nly reflected rays upon its
surface .
If by artificial light the gasalier can dle or lamp

, ,
sh ould be behind the mirror the latter being between

,
the light and the seer .
The crystal or mirror must be in contact with the

’
sitter and no other person should be within arm s
,
length .
A person seated behind the seer may act as

prompter or director of the s éance and another ,
similarly placed may act as recorder The posi .
tions are then as sho wn in the diagram .

PR E LIMINA R I E S AND P R A CTI C E 25 7
fl ar e cf or fi
’
The D ir e c to r will maintain an even and quiet

to ne suggesting from time to time what m ay be
,
looked for Thus .
a
D ir e c to r There is a house in S S treet ; it is
. .
No 1 7 You will enter b y a gate and go along a

. .
short pathway to the door which is of a green colour

,
.
You will go through the door and along the vestibule .
Turn into the room on t h e left Now tell me who

.
and what you see there .
The direction should be made by easy stage s

.
,
and no step should be taken until the seer confirms

the previous direction by sayin g Yes I am, ,
”
there ,or sim ilar form of assent The director
.
will then know how the seer is progressing The .
push o ff is very necessary in the early stages of

-
S
development and the above su ggestion will be
,
found extremely useful .
When once the seer is on the move so to speak , ,
he can be left to hi mself and will then either recoil

at once to a complete consciousness of his physical
surroundin gs or will go on to the exercise of the
" clairvoyant faculty .
The R e corde r will make notes of everything that

is said durin g the s éance ; and the results sho uld b e
tested and proved so that imagination m ay no t
pass for clairvoyance as it is apt to do before the
,
faculty is really developed .
At no time durin g the s éance should the di rector

lose psychic touch of the seer but as soon as a dire c
,
tion is satisfied another should be given with as ,
far as possible a conn ectin g link so that the transi

, ,
tions are rendered natural and not abrupt S udden .
dislocations are apt to break the spell under whi ch

the seer is carried away .
No s éance shoul d last more than fifteen minutes ,
and sittin gs sho ul d be made at the same time of

day and in the same place repeatedly so that a ,
cumulative e ffect is produced A psychic hab it .
is induced by thi s means and it is extremely ,
valuable in all functions of an automatic

nature .
Visions w hen fully developed are of two k inds ,
Dire ct and S ymbolic In most cases it will be found

.
that answers to detached questions take a symbolic

form P assive seers usually have direct visions
. ,
and positive seers favour the symbolic form The .

C HAP TE R VII
V I S I O NS A ND I NTE RP RE TATI O NS
TH E passive or direct vision is presumably a

representation of the actual state of things
perceived whether relatin g to the past present
, , ,
or future The circumstantial account given b y

.
the seer is su fficient to indicate that it is a direct

vision.
The symbolic vision is however fraught with , ,
many difficulties for those who are unacquainted

with symbolism and the method of interpretation .
S omething therefore may be said on t hi s point

, ,
.
S ym bols are thought fo rms which convey b y the

-
a ssociation of ideas a definite meaning to the mind

,
which perceives them They depend enti rely upon

.
the Laws of Thou ght and the correspondence

between the spiritual and material worlds between ,
the s ubj ect an d o b je c t of our consciousness

x
.
Amon g the ancients symb ols were the original

,
form of record of comm un ication and of writing

, ,
.
The hieroglyphics of the E gyptians the word ,
pictures of the May as of C entral America the ideo ,
graphic writing of the C hinese are all forms of

symboli sm derived from n atur al obj ects The »
.
Hebrew alphabet is quite symbolical Any l etter .

VI S ION S AND INT E R P R E TATION S 26 1
speaks to us of the nomadic people who were

S uch names as ox tent
”
dwellers in tents .
, ,
te nt do o r
~
ten t peg camel fish fi sh hook e ye
,
-
, , ,
-
, ,
hand basket rope coil c x goad water are names

, ,
-
,
-
, ,
of letters which cannot fail to convey an idea of

the primitive S emites They are all names of .
natural obj ec ts and they are all symbols B rin g

, .
to gether the letters yo d (hand ) da le th (tent door ) ,

-
and air (e ye ) and yo u have the wo rd ye do The

.
, .
hand denotes action power ; the door an entry , , ,
initiation ; the eye sight perception literally — , , , ,
opening the door to see ; ideographically knowledge , .
S imilarly in C h inese the words for wall face and

, , ,
man when brought to gether as a symb ol indicate

, ,
a wall facing m an b y which we understand a

-
prej udiced and bi goted person one who will not ,
see or enlarg e his horizon .
All symbols m ay be interpreted b y their known

natures qualities and uses Th u s an a rm will
, .
signify defence power protection ; a mo u th speech

, , ,
/
revelation ; an e ar news information ; if di storted , ,
scandal abuse The s u n prosperity life honours ;

,
.
, ,
the moo n crescent prosperity increase improve , , ,
ment ; when gibbous loss decay decline The , , ,

.
sun e c lip s e d death of a man ; the m o o n e c lip se d

, ,
death of a Woman ; b re ad food sustenance know , , ,
ledge preservation ; and these are all natural inter

,
p r e t a t io n s E very s.
y mbol has reference to the
Three Worlds the phys ical intellectual and spiritual
, , , ,
i e to Nature Man and G o d

. .
, ,
.
If the question be concerning the material world ,

a ship as a symbol wo ul d show c ommerce trade , ,
a voya ge good or bad accordin g to the con di tion

,
of the ship ; as if in full sail under a clear sky prosper ,
ity is si gnified ; if in distress or with flagging sails ,
an unfortunate condition is signified .
If the question h a s relation to the intellectual

world the same symbol would denote the inter
,
chan ge o f ideas good or bad news etc ; if to the

, , .
s uperior world the same s mbol would denote that

, y
communication with the spiritual world is increasing
or decreas in g as the symbol m ay indicate A pirate
, .
ship mi ght thus refer to plunder slander infrin ge , ,
ment of rights or death, .
S ymb ols are a lmost infinite in number and the ,
interpretation of them requires unprej udiced skill ,
but they are nevertheless an important subjec t

for study and the use of the C rystal or Mirror b y a
,
positive seer can hardly be beneficial without a

profound understandin g of this subj ect .
Al thou gh every symbol has some general s1gnifi c a

tion in agreement with its natural qualities and
uses yet it obtains a particular meanin g in relation
,
to the individual Th1 s 1s also the case in d

.
where every person is a natural seer F e w ho .

,
p y
a that attention to dreams which their
and nature warrant The C rystal is but a means
.
of brin gin g the normal dreamin g faculty int o

c o n s c l o u s activity .
No de fi nite rule can be laid down as to the inter

re t at io n of visions and the seer or seeress w ill
p ,
be found the best interpreter Yet the diff erences

.
C HA P TE R VIII
S O ME E X P E RI E NC E S
IT may serve in some part to illustrate the fore

goin g remarks if I here recite some experiences
whic h have come within m y knowledge and have
-
been either witnessed b y me or have bee n the result

of my own exercise of the faculty of induced
clairvoyance B ein g of a positive type of mind
.
,
and not normally clairvoy ant the visions have

,
chiefly been of a symbolic character .
A lady friend came to me in June 1 89 6 and

asked me to look at the C ry stal for her as her ,
mind was much exercised on a certain point In .
due course she was told that she would hear news
f rom abroad concernin g the birth of a child in some
hot country ; it would be a b o y and would arrive
,
in the month of F eb ruary of the following year .
This was not a t all what the lady was in quiring

about althou gh I had no means of knowing what
,
was in her mind as no intimation of any sort had

been given to me by her Nevertheless she did
.
,
hear such news and in F ebruary 1 8 9 7 a b o y w as

,
born to the lady s sister m India the late Q ueen

’
,
V ictoria bein g g odmother to the child .
I next told her that on a certain date while ,
26 4
S OM E E X P E R I E N CE S 26 5
travelling she would meet with an accident to the

,
right le g On that day my friend actually slipped

.
between the platform and footboard while getting

in to a train and su ff ered severe abrasion of the
shin of the ri ght le g together with serious muscular
,
strain from which she suffered for several days .
It was further said that thi s lady would hear some

g ood news concerning her son in connection with
papers and a contest This was to happen in the .
month of October and at that time her son passed

,
his e x am l n a t io n for the military college wi th honour s .
As an illustration of the direct or passive vis ion ,
the followin g is of interest

Mrs H the seeress was consulted b y a lady o f
. .
some abil ity in a s pecial line of literatu re though

—
,
this fact was not within the knowledge of the

seeress The lady w as tol d that she would go up
.
a stair case into a dingy room with a roll of papers

under her arm S h e would see a dark man who
.
was thick set and of quiet demeanour The man

-
.
would take the roll and it would be a source of

,
g ood fortune to her at a later date .
These circumstances were literally fulfilled by

the lady taking a manuscript to a publisher who ,
accepted and published it The description of the .
man was quite accurate as I who know him can ,
testify .
These two c ases will serve as illustrations of the

two orders of vision the symbolic and the literal
,
.
The symbolism of the former case not being recorded .

,
however but merely the interpretation and its

,
fulfi lment it will be of interest to cite an
,
instance in whic h the symbolism is preserved

V is io n
.
— A public square is seen in which
the effi gy of a lamb mounted upon a pedestal .
flash of li ghtning is seen to strike the image melti ng ,
o ff one of its ears A C atholic priest came along

.
and pointed at the fi gure .
I n te rp re ta tio n
.
— A member of the community to
which the consultant belon ged would thereafte r
b e converted to the R oman C hurch .
F u lfilm e n t — By the next mail the consultant

learned that such was the case an important ,
member of the body havin g gone over to the

C atholics as predicted .
Visio n
.
-
A man is seen dressed in black wearing ,
’
the habit of a j udge He holds some papers which

.
he endeavours to conceal beneath his robe He .
appears un successful The papers are too large

. .
A snake is seen at hi s feet It rises up a gainst him

. .
I n te rp re ta tio
. n — A certain man who is indicate d
by his profession will be guilty of obscurin g the
truth and of misrepresentation He will be the .
sub j ect of criticism from a source that is not

suspected .
had followed the le gal profession He was convicte d .
of havin g issu ed misleading and fraudulent testi

monies with intent to deceive C riticism le d to .
inquiry and conviction .
Vis io n
.
— The same man is seen lying on a b e d .
He is in e xtr e mis .
the brown study when a penny for your

thoughts is likely to prove a good investment
if yo u are a student of psy cholo gy In su ch cases
.
the thread of thou ght appears to be broken and a

vision wholly unrelated to the subj ect but a moment
,
a o in the mind suddenl appears to usurp the field

g y,
of consciousness It is as if the so ul of the sensitive

.
,
while probing the depths of thou ght suddenly ,
comes into contact with the thin partition dividing

the outer world of thou ght from the inner world o f
knowledge the domain of doub t and reason from
,
that of intuition and direct perception ; and bre akin g ,
thr ou gh this partition the soul emer ges into the

,
field of light bey ond A rapid alternation of the

.
centre of consciousness from the dream or psychic

state to the wakin g or normal state will if sustained , ,
assure dl y brin g about the phenomenon known as

clairvoy ance S wedenborg claimed to have been
.
sim ul taneously conscious in two worlds for days

to gether B u t the centre of consciousness cannot
.
be located in two places or states of existence at

one and the same time and it may therefore
,
be said that the alternation was ex c eedin gly rapid

and continuous givin g the sensation of being
,
thus divided in consciousness I have myself .
experienced this con di tion both experimentally

and naturally and at such t imes it would be imp o s
,
sible to say whether I was in this or that of the tw o

bodies one corporeal and the other ethereal through
, ,
which I was conscious of functioning .

C HA P T E R IX
G E O MA NC Y
P r o b a b le C h in e se Or igin .
TH I S art is of very ancient origin and is to be ,
found among the earliest literary monuments The .
Yih K ing or Classic of Changes already mention e d

, ,
in the course of this work employs it in the very

,
highest connection It would appear that a com

.
le t e system of occult philosoph is founded upon

p y
the change s produced by the interplay of two
s in Nature which they call the Yin and
g or the Light and Dark active and
, ,
male and female principles Thence is .
the Law of Alternation figured by the

bol
There is a statement to the effect that the One pro

duc e d t h e T h ree t h e Thre e produced the S even the
,
S even produced the Ten these Ten are all things

”
.
269
The symbols or K w e i employed by the Chinese
in their sy stem of G eomancy are based upon the
square of t h re e w h ich in our section on Talisman s
,
was sho w n to be the exact replica of the Hebre w

Table of the planet S aturn ; a square of 9 cells in
whi ch the num bers add to 1 5 in all di rections .
The philosophy of the Yih K ing does not at the

moment concern us althou gh it is an e x c e e
,
fascinatin g subj ect and I therefore propose to pass

,
at once to a consideration of the di vinatory method

employed in ancient Chin a in connection with the
”
R eeds and the Tortoise .
On the back of the Tortoise which stood for the

world and humanity and in a particular sense w as
,
symbolical of the Chinese K in gdom and its people ,
was inscri b e d the famous K e y of the P a Tao thus -

,
I n theentre is t h e figure 5 which stands for h uman

c ,
“
ity and the consultant Around are the numbe rs

,
.
and these constitute the geomantic fi gures in the

most ancient C hinese system By combinin g 1 wi th
.
2 3 4 etc
,
successively 2 with 1 3 4 etc and so
.
, , , .
,
on throu ghout the entire s cale as well as b y doubling

,
each of the primary forms they obtain ed 6 4 di stinct

,
kw e i to each of which a definite mean ing and prog
their aff airs of st ate and their private matters .
S imilarly they divided their heavens into ei ght

equal parts and attributed similar meanin gs to them ,
j udgin g by the positions of the planets how the

various departments of the public service would b e
conducted In this scheme the emperor was place d
.
-
in the centre of the wheel of eight spokes bein g the ,
neutral point about which the wheel of the law w as

said to revolve .
When the Tortoise and the reeds were in agree

ment the res ul t was adj udged to be highly good and
, ,
v ic e v e rs a The S un stood for the K in g the Moon

.
,
for the Nobility the planets for the officers of

,
S tate and the stars for the P eople

,
The Tortoi se .
represented internal affairs and the reeds external

mat ters The Hebrews are also known to have
.
evolved a system of divination by reeds or rods ,
and the practice of geomancy or its equivalent is

G E OMAN C Y 27 3
found among all ancient civilizations It is not .

,
however my intention to examine these at the

,
pre sent time and I may at once pass on to an

,
exposition of the system in vogue among E uropeans .
TH E S YM B O L S
There are sixteen g eomantic figures the evolution ,
w h ic h a p p e ars to have been lost to us but there

i
be little doubt that they are all traceable to

C hinese kwe i already referred to In the .
o p e an system each s y mbol is derived fr om four
of points one poin t denoting an odd number

,
in the line a n d two points an even number Thus . .
if I make four lines of points

12 points z o o
10 o o
11
9
I then derive t h e symbol of F o rtu n a M a jo r whic h ,
is a symbol of the S un in its strongest degree o f

influence .
The seven celestial bodies S aturn Jupiter Mars , , ,
the S un V enus Mercury and the Moon have each

, , ,
two symbols one of which is Dexter or fortunate

, , ,
’
and the other Sinister or unfortunate The Moon s
, .
’
nodes are also represented by the Dragon s Head
and Tail each of which has a separate symbol
,
.
Th e geomantic symbols of the planets and the

nodes a re as follows
27 6 A MANUAL o r O C CULT I S M
No te — The whole of the
lin es of points 16
completed before the counting is b e gun f At
of each fourth line a geomantic symbol is
and this m ay be separated from the next by a stroke
as shown above These sym bols are to be num
.
bered 1 2 3 4 in the order in which they are formed .
The aut o mati c process on which the ,
rests is completed from the moment

,
sixteen lines of points are finished Th e rest of .
the process is an em piricism founded upon ancient

practice It is necessary to f ollow the method
.
clo sely or the whole scheme will be vitiated

, .
The next four symbols Nos 5 6 7 8 are derived

, .
, , , ,
from the combination of the fi rst four Thus .
take the top line in each of the symbols 1 to 4 .
This will form the 5 th symbol Then take the .
second line in each of symbols 1 to 4 and this will ,
give the 6 th symbol Next take the third line

.
of the same symbols to form the 7 t h symbol and ,
finally take the last line in each of the first four to

form the 8 th symb ol .
Thus from the four symbols alre ady given above

we derive symbols 5 to 8 as follows
6
0 0
The next four symbols Nos 9 to 1 2 are derived

,
.
,
b y readin g together symbols 1 and 2 3 an d 4 5 and 6 , , ,
7 and 8 thus ,
C A S TIN G TH E F I G U R E 27 7
9 7 / 72
0 0 O O 0 0 O O
O O O O 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
O O O O O 0
R eading the first and second across we fin d 4 ,
points in the top line 3 points in the second line 2

, ,
in the third lin e and 2 in the fourth line

,
These .
g ive us the 9 t h symbol The others are formed

. on
the same plan .
The Two Witnesses are no w formed by combining

symbols 9 and 1 0 and 1 1 and 1 2 in the same
, ,
manner and from the 1 3th and 1 4th symbols

,
/
thus de riv e d, th e Judge is finally evolved These .

,
in the illustration before us are

/
,
/
5
'
O O
0 0
O O
O O
72 9 Ma a /
r
y e .
The first 1 2 symbols may now be set in a h oro
sc o p ic al figure .
The l st symbol is to be placed in the 1st House ,
the 2n d symbol in the 1 0 th House t h e 3rd in the ,
7 t h H ouse and the 4 t h in the 4t h House etc as

, , .
,
shown below
P o s itio ns o f S ymb o ls .
1 st s ymbol in the 1s t Hou se ’
2n d 1 0 th
3 rd 7th
4 th 4th
5 th 2n d A
6 th 1 1t h
7 th 8 th
8 th 5 th .
9 th 3 rd
l ot h 1 2th
1 1t h 9 th
1 2th 6 th
The Left Witness or 1 3th symbol is placed on

, ,
the left of the horoscope in relation to the 1 st House ;

the R ight Witness or 1 4th figure to the right of the
, ,
horoscope in relation to the 7 th House ; the Judge ,
over the head of the horoscope in association with

the 1 0th House and the l 6 th symbol or Appeal
, , ,
at the foot in association with the 4th House

,
.
You will then have the complete figure as he re

show n
If the question concerns gain or loss it must be
referred to the 2nd House ; and so of the rest accord ,
in g to the canons of Astrolo gy ; for let it be under

stood that the system o f Geomancy was founded
upon the accredited influences of the planets the ,
symbols takin g the place of those employed by

astronomers and the method of computin g them
,
was designed to replace the anciently complex

process of find in g the positions of the celestial
bodies .
With the specimen figure before us let it be sup ,
posed that the question has reference to a suit at

law Here we find F o rtu n a M ajor in the 1 st and
.
C a p u t in the 2n d showin g good fortune and gain

, .
In t h e 7 t h there is V ia (a m ale fi c indication ) ,
denoting that the course of a ffairs is adverse to the

defendant while C au da in the 8 th shows his financial
,
prospects as like ly to su ffer by this suit .
The witnesses are both of equal strength being ,
denoted in such case b y Ac q u isitio .
The Judge (symbol 1 5 ) is repeated in the 5 th

House (wh ich is the l 1 th from the 7 t h ) and this ,
shows the Judg e to be favourably di sposed to the

defence Bu t nothing can overrule Destiny and
.
,
the 16 th symbol derived b y combinin g the 1 5 th

,
and l s t symbols viz P o p u lus and F ortu na M ajor

, . ,
must inevitably give the verdi ct to the P rosecutor .
Had the question been concernin g a speculation ,
then P o p u lus in the 5 t h upheld b y the Judge with ,
t h e 1s t and 2md Houses well occupied is su ffi cient ,
au gury of a s ucce ssful result .

J UD GI NG TH E FI G U R E 28 1
As will be readily seen from this brief exposition

of practical Geomancy the b asis is wholly dependent
’
on the exercise of the automatic faculty ; but like

most of the divinatory processes it is linked on to
a system which is entirely j udicial It has the .
advanta ge of being free from all complicated or

intricate calculations and where the automa t ic
,
or divinatory fac ul ty is actively developed it can

be safely relied upon to g1v e a true and speedy
ans w er to all questions whatsoever .
S imilar in many respect s to this geomantic art

is the He braic method of divination called K abalistic
Astrology of which I have already given a complete
,
exposition in a s eparate volume so that there i s

,
perhaps no nee d to advert to it in this place .
It may facilitate the proc ess of j ud ging a fi gure

if I here give an interpretation of the e ffects due to
the pos itions of the various symb ols in the several
Houses of t he horoscope B u t it should be remem
-
bered that the repetition of a symbol in two or m o re

Houses may materially alter its final si gnificance ;
while invariably the summation of the fi gure and
the conclusion of the whole m atter is in the hands
of the Judge or if there b e any e lement of doubt
, ,
the sixteenth figure w hich 1s the Ap p e a l w

,
ill give a ,
conclusive verdict .
C HAP T E R XI
S Y M BO L S I N TH E TWE L V E H O U S E S
Tr istitia T
2
1 . IN
the 1 st House this symbol denotes short
life if the question be to that point ; but not othe r
wise Much vexation sorro w and disappointment
.
, .
The mind is melancholy and misanthropic broo ding ,
and taciturn .
2 Ac quisitiveness is
. strong Money will be .
ac quired by slow penurious methods Losses occur

,
.
through forgetfulness displacement and lack of

, ,
initiative The stolen goods will not be returned

. .
3 R elatives are few

. The subj ect will outlive
.
his kindred His j ourneys wil l be unfortunate

. .
Letters will be delayed .
4 The house will prove unfortunate

. Mining and .
real estate investments will cause losses The parent .
will not survive except to cause trouble The end .
of life will be miserable .
5 C hildren are
. denied Love a ffairs prove .
unfortunate S peculations will cause trouble and

.
loss There is no patrimony or inheritance

. .
6 Th e health is afflicted
. S ervants are a source .
282
28 4 A MA NUAL OF O C CULTI S M
3 R estraint
and even hatred amon g relations ’
.
.
The j ourney will be very unfortunate Letters .
will be lost or detained .
4 The house will be dist rain e d u p o n No value ‘
. .
'
attaches to the estate Minerals cannot be worked .

.
The end of life will be in an asylum or other place

of detention There will be dissension with the
.
parents .
5 No children or those b o rn will be very un

.
fortunate S peculations will prove disastrous and

.
may leave the person penniless Love affairs will .
be secret and unfortunate .
6 The sickness will be enduring

. S ervants will .
cause loss C reature comforts w ill be diffi cult t o

.
obtain The occupation will b e sedentary or much

.
confined .
7 There is no love between t h e partners in

.
marriage C on t racts are broken The opponent

. .
will be withheld or rendered powerless .
8 The wife will h ave no dowry or it will be tied

.
in trust or chancery Death takes place obs curely .

,
or by violence and in s olitude There will be no .
le gacy .
9 E xile ; the traveller will not retu rn

. The .
va g e will not be fortunate a nd the ship may be ,
stranded The dr eam is very unfortunate and

.
‘
denotes privation an d su ffering Legal affairs .
cause loss P ublications will be quite unsuccessful

.
-
1 0 A bad master No p osition credit or est e em

‘
.
. .
,
S e p aration or estrangement from t he parents .

.
1 1 A paucity of friends
. Loss of those associated . .
S Y M B OL S IN TH E T WE LV E HOU S E S 28 5
The wish will never be fulfilled . The advice is
Many enemies P risoners will be detained

12 . . .
The confinement will be dangerous and t e dious .
Affairs do not 1mp ro v e There is no way out of .
difficulty .
L a e titia 1 1
The health will be good The person j ovial

1 . .
,
bright and Winsome pleasant and kind to all ,

A .
long lif e .
2 F inancial a ff airs will be quite satisfactory

. .
Bu t expenses wil l be heavy Things lost will be .
re c o v e r e d P rosperity will increase with time

y
. .
3 H a fl o n y will abound b etween relatives but

.
,
they will die before the subj ect and be a source of

fit to h im Journeys will be more pleasant
.
profit a ble The letter will be satisfactory

.
and may caus e merriment .
4 ; The property will give adequate p rofits Agree .
"
3ment and a ffectio n with the parents Min ing inter .
ests and estate investments will be fairly successful ,
but not w ithout commensurate expense The end of .
‘
life will show a competence and much happine ss .
5 Children will be bright and happy and dig

l,, .
tin gu ish e d b y their g o o d qualities A son will b e .
born who will be tall fair handsome an d prosperous

, , ,
.
There w ill be a moderate inheritance S peculations .
will be sa tisf actory Love affairs will proceed .
smoot hl y The aff ecti o n will be returne d

. .
6 S e r vants will be honest and devoted

. The .
28 6 A MANUAL o r O C CULTI S M
health will be good The sickness will be soon .
F ood and clothi n g will be adequate Th e 0 0 .
tion should be moderately remunerative .
7 A handsome and well endowed wif e is shown

.
-
.
C ontracts will be equitable and of profit The .
opponent will be well equipped and qualified and ,
may win .
8 The wife wi ll have money by a le gacy

. You .
will have money left to you The colleague is .
faithful but needs watchin g .
9 The voya g e will be bri gh t and prosperous

. .
The traveller is well and happ y The lawyer will .
prove satisfactory The dream is auspicious and .
prognosticates jo y P ublications will be successful

. .
1 0 Honours will b e attained

. The position will .
be influential and the cre di t good High patronage

, . .
G ood social standing The parent lives to a good .
a ge and is respected .
1 1 Many friends
. C onvivialit y The wish will . .
be fulfilled Associations more numerous than

.
profitable .
1 2 The enemy will become a friend

. The prisoner .
will be liberated The confinement brings happiness

. .
G ood fortune attends alienation or sequestration .
A cqu is itio L1 .
1 The life will be long and flourishin g The

. .
person is of full stature and well developed ; fair

c omplexion The person will prevail by in fluence
.
and means Well disposed but mindf ul of his own

.
-
interests .
11 Many and influential friends who will be a
.
source of benefit The wish will certainly be o h

.
t ain e d P rofi table alliances and good advisers

. .
12 The prisoner will be detained

. The exile .
will not return The confinement will be enduring

.
but safe .
2 0 0 P 1L6 ? 2
1 Life of moderate len gth

. G reat energy frank .
,
and open characte r strong temper E xecutive

, .
ability A goo d soldier or pioneer S ubj ect to

. .
fevers and wounds .
2 G ood earnin g capacity a n d always busy but

.
,
not able to save money S peculative and rash . .
Loss by theft or fire The goods will not be recovered

. .
Disputes on financial matters .
3 Dangerous
. j ourney An irritating letter . .
Q uarrels with relatives .
4 P roperty spoiled by fire or plunder

. Mining .
interests of no profit Disputes with a parent The

.
.
end of life unfortunate .
5 No. inheritance C hildr en will be .male .
S uperior achievements amon g the progeny S pe cu .

"
lat io n s har dl y successful Love affairs unfortunate .
and disputatious .
6 The health su ffer s from a fever

.
S ervants .
will be thievish C reature comforts di fficult to

.
maintain The occupation is in fire iron or

. ,
hardware .
7 An u nf ortunate and short lived wife

. Disputes -
.
in marriage C ontracts only occasion strife and

.
S YM B OL S IN TH E TW E LV E HOU S E S 28 9
f
riv alry . The opponent is strenuous but hardly
fortunate
8 Money by marriage ; a small le gacy
. The . ,
colleague is too venturesome The death is due to .
violence or poison b y acids

, .
9 Dangerous voyage
. A dre am denoting strife .
and loss The lawyer i s alert and active There

. .
is no suc cess abroad .
P osition attained by o w n efforts S ome .
sc andal The parent 1s f airly l on g lived but of

'
-
.
contentious mind C redit good The j udge will

. .
show asperity and hastiness .
.
z
1 1 Friends will not b e good co unsellors Dissen .
sions occur with associate s The wish will come .
speedily if at all .
12 The prisone r will be freed

. The exile is in .
danger The confinement will be hazardous a nd

.
painful The distress will be rai sed with loss

. .
88 R u b e us 3
A s h ort life and a dangerous one Violen t
l . .
disposition unscrupulo us B rusque and forceful

,
.
manner Ruddy complexion

. .
2 Loss and diffi culty in finance i s s hown

. Th e .
goods wi ll not be retrieved E xtravagance w ill .
result inn e ed The livelihood is precarious

. .
3 E strangement from relatives

. A dan g erous .
n d a c o l de n t al The letter will b e disagree

.
offensive .
parent will not live long and will be of ,
U
illdisposed nature Mining interests will fail
-
. .
house is in danger of fire or accident P rop .
will depreciate .
5 P oor and ill conditioned progeny

. D -
.
liaisons or love affairs S peculations very ruin .
No inheritance .
6 P oor health
. Deceitful servants Needy sur . .
roun dings Arduous but ill paid work

.
-
.
7 A bad wife of irregular habits

. C ontr .
w ill not prove remunerative The opponent .
lose his case .
8 There will be no dowry

. The death will .
violent and ignominious No legacy The collea . .
is untrustworthy .
9 The voyage will be highly dangerous

. .
dream is of sinister impo rt The lawy er is not .
be trusted The publication will fail . .
1 0 Without hope of a good position

. Sm .
credit The parent is irascible and badly disposed

. .
Th e j ud ge will prove adverse .
1 1 F riends are of low de gree

. Associates not .
advantageous The wish will not be granted . .
1 2 Vindictive enemies
. The prisoner will b e .
*
punished The con fi nement will be unfortunate

. -
and dangerous The exile will not return . .
8
F o rtu n a Ma jo r Q)
A long life Open honest and fearless charac
1 . .
,
ter A tall fair person Very fortunate and well

. .
belove d .
11 . F riends
not very wealthy but sincere
of good position Advisers not fortunate in
.
advice The wish will be granted but no t

.
,
1 2 The p risoner will be relea sed

. The ex .
return The enemy w ill be powerful Th e e

. .
ment highly successful .
8
M inor Q
33 F ortu na
1 G ood vitality but some feverish ailments

”
A person of small stature but proud Frec kled

“
sunburnt c o mp le x1o n .
2 Moderate means
. P rodigality Thin gs los . .
w i ll not be recovered ;
3 Unfortunate relatives
. An unpleasant lette .
Th e j o urney will not be very fortunate .
4 There is nothing to sustain t h e value of pr

.
The h ouse is n o t f o rt un ate The p arent is

,
.
life Mining 1n t e re st s are slow in d

.
and expensive The end of lif e w ill be mo de

'
fortunate .
5 A small family mostly boys

. The child to be
, .
b orn will be male Love a ffairs are not fortunate

.
,
but honourable S peculat ions will hardly be succ e ss

.
-
ful and at best but moderately so There will be a .
meagre inh e ritance

6 The sick will continue so awhile
. Th e health .
is indi ff erently good The servant is honest but .
lax C reature comforts will be moderately a b un d

.
ant The occupat ion will be fairly remunerative

. ,
a n d h onourable .
S YM B OL S IN TH E TW E LV E HOU S E S 29 3
7 . A happy marriag e but not a rich one Wife .
liv es to middle years The opponent is not very .
infl u ential and the res ul t is doubtful C ontracts .
will be carried through with difficulty .
8 A small dowry
. There will be a small legacy
. .
'
The collea gue is h ar dly re liab le .
The voyage is troublesome and not very for

t un a t e The dre am deno t es vexation The lawyer
. .
will be of quite moderate ability but honest The , .
publication will hardly pay .
H o n o u r s o f minor de gree but posi tion u n ,
stable C redit m o derately good The parent will

. .
soon die The j udge will be overbearin g and

‘
censorious .
1 1 F r iends induce to bad e ffects

. Associates .
are not profit able The wish will be denied or .
very much delayed .
1 2 The prisoner will continue in custody

. The .
exile will n o t return E nemies are numerous but .

,
of low degree The co n finement will hardly be

.
fortunate and will be protracted

”
P a e lla {2
1 The life will be happy peaceful and moderately

.
,
long A .fair c omplexi o n graceful a n d slim fi g ure , ,
grey or blu e ey es .
2 Wealt h will accumulate but much will be spent

.
on pleasure and finery Lost things will be restored . .
Gain b y wome n and g am in g .
3 S isters w ill be genial a n d kind

. The l etter .
will be pleasant and will contain an invitation .
The j ourney will be safe and moderately fortunate .
4 The parent wil l b e beloved and will live t o

.
,
moderately lon g years The mine will contain .
silver or copper The house will be advantageous

.
and very pleasant P roperty will increase The . .
end of life is happ y .
5 A small inheritance
. Love affairs numerous .
and generally of good e ffect D omestic happiness

“
. .
S uccessful speculations A girl is born . .
6 The health is weak a n d the patient in a bad way

. .
S ervants will be of irre gular habits and bad charac

ter C reature comforts adequate but tending t o
.
,
depreciate and diminish .
7 A beautiful and g ood wife

. C ontra cts will be .
very profitable The opponent is stron g and has

.
support from women of position .
8 A small dowry soon expended

. No legacy .
of si gnificance Death b y poison The colleague

. .
should not be trusted .
9 The dream is very auspicious

. The voyage .
will be bri ght and fortunate The lawyer is capable .
and will be sin c e re f P ublications will prosper .
1 0 The position can be improved or ruined b y

.
women s influence The parent is of sordid charac

’
.
ter The credit is moderate only

. .
1 1 F riends will be numerous and beneficial

. .
The wish will be granted and will give pleasure

‘
The associates are fairly fortunate .
1 2 The prisoner will be set free

. The exile is in .
great prosperity The enemy will be a w oman who

.
9 The vo yage is unfortunate and will be t
.
of loss The dream is unfor tunate and deno

.
failin g health and fortune The lawye r will .
extortionate and untrustworthy .
1 0 P os ition of no 1m p o rt an c e
. or ruined ,
women No credit The parent will die ea

. .
D ishonour The j udge will be adverse

. .
1 1 F rie nds will be ruinous and di ssolute Advi .
The wish w ill

”
and associates of no value .
denied .
1 2 The prisoner will perish

. The exile is .
do u ed to his fate The con fin ement will be d

.
ous and disappointing or abortive The enem y is .
low m mde d and despic able woman

-
.
8
A lb us C
5
1 A spri ghtly active and in telli gent perso
.
,
talkative and a busybody , In d an ger of an

a ccident S harp witted and cunning
.
-
.
2 G ain b y trade or the use of the intellect

. .
The g oods lost may be recovered if followed up

quickly
3 R elatives will be numerous but scattered
. .
The j ourney will be successful but worryin g The .
letter is ab out business and will be satisfactory .
4 The parent is weak and irritable

. The house .
is not fortunate and very unsettled Minin g ,

.
interests are not without prospects if well worked .
Q uicksilver or silver ore m ay b e found P roperty .
will be a contentious matter and w ill hardly increase .
The e n d of life will be restl e ss and unsettle d .

S YM B OL S IN TH E T WE LV E HOU S E S 29 7
5 No inheritance o f value Love affairs un sat is

. .
factory P rogeny intelli gent but few S peculations

. .
no t very fortunate and causin g anxiety .
6 The patient wil l recover

. The health is good . .
S ervants are i ndustrious but 1 n u isit iv e

q and
talkative A mercantile o r clerical occupation
. .
C ommensurat e crea ture comforts food clothin g , , ,
7 A good and industrious wife with some artistic

.
faculty The o pponent will hardly sust a in his

.
cause C ontracts will prove m ainly b eneficial but

.
,
Will re quire hard work and alacrity ”

.
8 Disputes will oc cur about l e g acies

. A small .
d owry if any and that so on dissipated Th e col

, ,
.
league is ve ry a cute a n d c u nn m g .
9 The voya g e will not be fortu nate

. The dream .
is contentiou s and denotes quarrelli n g The lawyer .
is no t dependable The publication will fail

. .
1 0 The p o sition is har dly assured

. Honours .
attained with patience an d indu stry Credit doubt .

,
ful Th e parent Will live long but is very aloof

. .
The judge will be st e rn an d severe

“
1 1 Frien ds will be numerous an d beneficial

‘
. .
Th e wish will be granted Association s will lead .
to b u sm e ss a nd pro fi t .
1 2 Th e priso ner has no hope

. The exile will .
never return The enemy 1s a t rifle r and has no

'
position or influence The confin ement will be .
unfortunate and anxious The distraint will be .
Withdrawn W it h loss to yo u .
2:
3 C o nj
un ctio
8
1 . The p e rS o n is of a subtile and crafty nature ,
of mean appearance small sharp features un f o r

, ,
t u n a t e and dishonest .
2 Gain b y the sharp use of faculties ; but in

.
of spurious methods The goods will not be

.
or returned The financial prospects are ha z ar

.
and chiefly associated with litigation .
3 R elatives will be inimical

. The j ourney .
its dan gers but is fairly successful The le .
proposes a meetin g or understan din g .
4 The parent is of low degree and of short

.
The House is unfortunate Min ing prospects .
h a rdly g ood bringin g disputes and anxiety

, .
end of lif e will be full of small troubles an d a n xie

5 The child will be a girl
. The pro geny are .
well equipped and fairly fortunate S p .
are not profitable There will b e no inher it

.
”
Love aff airs cause anxiety .
The health is rather poor The patient m .
recover with care and attention S ervants will .
deceptive and gossiping There will be anxiety .
to the livelihood
‘
7 The wife will be well di sposed and intelligen t

.
-
but will not live lon g The opponent will fail . .
The contract can hardly be made to pay .
8 There will be no dowr y but di sputes

.
,
ab out the wife s money No legacies but quarrels

’
.
,
over the goods of the dead The colleague is beyond .
all trust being crafty and deceitful

,
.
3 00 A MANUAL OF O C CULT I S M
5 Love a ff airs will be moderately favourable
. .
The child will be a male P ro geny few but gifted

.
, .
S peculations show small profits There will be an .
inheritance for partition .
6 The health is good The patient will recover

‘
. . .
The servant is useful and indust rious The .
hood will be assured The occupation

‘
travellin g .
7 A g ood and capable wife

. The o pp o n e n .
lack support but will proceed successfully .
tracts will be carrie d throu gh .
8 Only a small dowry

. A legacy will b e se e n
.
The collea gue may be relied upon

9 The voyag e is successful and s mooth ;
. The
dream denotes a j ourney 111 store and a way out of
di ffi cultie s The lawyer 1 s master of h 1s c a Se The
. .
publication will meet with a ready reception .
1 0 The parent is unfortunate and o f narrow

.
v iews and close h a bits Honours are attained . .
The credi t 1 s g o od The j udge will be 1m p artial

.
but impatient
1 1 F riends will be fortun a
. te Associations p ro fi t .
able Th e wish will b e granted

. .
The prisoner will

‘
1 2 The exile will ret u rn

. .
escape The c onfineme nt will quickly be over

. .
The enemy is a dark s lender woman The distraint

, .
1s effected .
55 P o p u lus
1The person is fair short and of full figure
.
,
.
Moderately long life .

S YMB OL S I N THE TW E L V E H OU S E S 3 01
2 Chang eful
. but increscent fortunes Gain b y .
public service or publicity in some capacity Th e .
los t goods will be resto red in part .
3 Many relatives but al so many troubles with

.
,
them The j ourney is good The letter is concern

. .
in g a public affair and is of goo d import ,

.
4 The paren t is fortun a te but changeful

. The re ,
.
will be gain from property The house 1s fortu nate . .
Min ing interests w ill b e supported The e nd of .
life will be by t he sea or in the midst of an assembly .
5 The child will be female

. Lo e affairs fickle
'
,
.
v
and unc e rt a in S p e culations fairly succes sful A

'
. .
sih all inherita n ce which will be divided .
6 The health will be uncertain a n d changeful

.
”
.
A dro p sic al a ff e c tio n The patient i s in danger of

v
.
a re lapse The servant is not depend able The

. .
o c c i1p a t io n is connected with the public a n d is

precario u s The livelihood is uncertain
. .
7 The wife will be good looking and plea sant

.
,
but fickle The opponent will have p ublic sympathy

.
,
but will hardly succeed C ontracts more nume ro us .
than profitable .
8 A legacy 1s lost but disputes and falls into

.
,
Ch ancery NO dowry The colleague is v a c illa t

. .
ing and inconstant Death by drowning or in a

.
public place .
9 The voyage will be fairly fortunate

. The .
dream de notes publicity and increase Th e lawyer .
is too muc h occupied and cannot be relied upon .
The publication will become popular .
1 0 Th e po sitl o n / is unstable and th e

. cre dit
doubtful Honours may be achieved b y public
.
or reco gnition The parent is unfortunate sh

.
,
lived and very restless The j udge will be con .

‘
by public O pinion .
1 1 F riends more numerous than useful

.
able Associates will chan ge with circum

.
The wish will b e granted at the full of the

l
1 2 The prisoner wil be released by pet
.
not at all The exile will come back to his

.
The distraint will n o t be eff ected The c o n fi n .
wi ll be difficult but safe The enemy is a .
stout an d fair woman a great busy body , .
O O
C apu t $2
1 .The person is tall and fair ; Of fortunate and

honest nature ; a good or ganizer Lon g life . .
2 Abundant means
. G ain by initiative and the.
use of the faculties The lost thin gs will be recovered

. .
3 Fortunate relatives and well disposed

. The -
.
j ourney w ill be successful The letter make s a .
proposal and is of good import .
4 The parent is fortunate and long lived

. The -
.
property is good The house is desirable The mines

. .
will yield well and will be extended The end of .
life will be hi ghly fortunate‘
5 The child will be a male

.
P ro geny will be .
hi ghly fortunate Love aff airs will prosper The

. .
s p eculation is S ure to be successful There will be .
a rich inheritance .
6 The health is good The patient will recover

‘
. .
qui ckly The se rvant will be faithful and trust

.
301 A MA NUAL OF O C C ULTI S M
3 . relatives and th ose distant or u n sympa
Fe w
thetic The j our ey will be highly dangerous and
. n
may be fatal The letter concerns a departure

.
and is unfortunate .
4 The pare nt dies early

. The property is of .
no value The mine will not yield anything The

. .
house is fateful and may be demolished Th e end .
of life is miserable .
5 The child will die at birth

. The progeny will .
be f e w and ill favoured There will be no inherit

-
.
ance S peculations Will ruin yo u The beloved

.
‘
will die or become as dead to you .
6 The health is very bad the excretory system

.
,
is imperfect The patient cannot recover The

. .
servant is wholl y undesirable and will be a source

g {
of great danger The livelihood is poor The kk . .

e
occupation is menial and undesi rable or ye t ,
nefarious .
7 Th e wife will be ill disposed and violent

.
-
,
there may be no hope of marriage at all The .
opponent has no chance of success C ontracts .
will never be completed but to y our ruin

“
8 No dowry but an extravagant wife

. Legacies .
are very remote from you The death will be a .

*
violent one The colleague is malicious and to be

.
avoided entirely .
9 The voya ge will b e fatal

. The dream portends .
dire distress and trouble The lawyer will fail to .
pursue hi s case The publicat ion is a dead

.
failure .
1 0 The parent is shortlived and of ill repute

. .
S Y M B OL S IN TH E TW E LV E H OU S E S 3 05
Honours are di stant and beyond y our reach The .
credit is assailed and cannot b e upheld The j udge .
will b e malicious and will exceed his functions

,
.
1 1 F riends will p rove rui n ous and a cause of

.
danger Associations unprofitable The wish is

. .
denied .
1 2 The prisone r will perish if he do e s not escape

. .
The exile will never retur n The enemy is very .
malicious The confinement will be extremely

.
dangerous .
The f o re go m g 1n t e rp re t atio n s are due to the S ign ifi

cation of each of the sym bols in the Twelve Houses ,
and will apply to all questions which are proper to

each House Judgment is not however to be made
.
, ,
from the S in gle position but must also take into

,
account the duplicated or repeated positions the ,
witnesses and the j udge Observe that the 1 3 th.
symbol is the witness for the inquirer or consultant ;

the 1 4t h f o r the opponent ; the j udge 1s 1m p artial
and is related to the 1 0 t h House while the 1 6 th
,
symb ol is the final appeal and is th e end of t h e

matter as deno ted by the 4t h House to which it is
,
relate d Any qu e s tion can b e answered b y relatin g

.
”
it to its proper House (see Astrology P art I ) , ,
and O bservin g what s ymbol falls in that House ,
how it is sustained by the witnesses or reflected ,
in othe r parts of the figure and what the j udge m ay

,
determin e
The Geomantic art is by no m
.
eans an easy one

except to those versed in the nature and signifi ca
tion of the symbols the Houses and the planetary , ,
affinities .
S ome attempt has been made by A grippa and

others to introduce the si gns of the Zo di ac into the
Geomantic scheme but the evident disagreement ,
between the various methods submitted clearly

shows that they form no part of a coherent tra di tion .
It will be found in practice that the si gns normal to

the Houses can be presumed with satisfactory results ;
the l st House and Aries the 2n d and Taurus and , ,
so on bein g the foundation of the true Geomantic

,
fi gure the mo difications bein g of course due to

, , ,
the symbols which fall into them .
The root nature of the symbols should be known ,
for many of them are capable of considerable

variation of meaning accordin g to the Houses they ,
fall in the correspon din g si gns and the nature

, ,
of the question to be resolved .
Root M e a nings o f the S ymb o ls .
C a rce r .
—A prison
Denote s privation c o n fin e .
,
ment restriction inaction It corresponds to T2

, ,
.
Tr is titia — S orrow
. Denotes grief di sappoint .
,
ment bereavement condemnation It is of the

, , .
nature of T 2
L a e titia J oy-
Denotes j oviality success lau gh
.
, ,
ter good health and confidence It corresponds

, ,
.
to LL .
A cq u is itio — Obtaining
. Denotes gain achieve .
,
ment success fulfilment and expansion It corre

, ,
.
s p o n ds to LL .
P o p u lu s — P eople
Denotes a mass swelling
.
, ,
gathering together a crowd plurality the tide of

, , ,
opinion It is fortunate and of the nature of the

.
Full Moon .
C p ut
a — The head Denotes entering in accession
.
, ,
increase as c ending a c quiring and absorbing Of

, ,
‘
the nature of the Dragon s H ead or Moon s Asc e nd ’ ’
ing Node gg .
C a uda — The tail Denotes goin g out recession

. .
, ,
decrease descending losin g an d re lin q uish in g Of

, ,
.
the nature of the Dragon s Tail or Moon sDescendi ng

’ ’
Node ZS
The P a irs
It will be observed tha t th e sixteen symbols are

brought into relations a s eight pairs of o pposites .
Thus
Ac qu isflaio a nd Am msio
‘
L aetitia Trist it ia .
P uer P ue lla .
Al b us R ub e us
F ortuna Maj or F ortuna

C aput C auda .
P opulus Via .
u n c t io
Co nj C arcer .
These pairs of opposites which are at the root ,
of the ancient C hinese system of Geomancy have ,
no relation to the natures of the respective plan e ts

involved or the si gns or Houses ruled by them but
, ,
they are found e d upon the natural an tithesis of

S YM B O L S IN TH E TWE LV E HOU S E S 3 09
certain spiritual principles which begin with the

g in and the ga ng the dark
,
and li g ht sides O f the
manifested universe and extend to all the relation
,
s hips O f the cosmic elements Those who Would

-
.
pu rsue the subj ect should take 111 hand th e text

of the Yih K ing with the commentary by C o n
in c ius who said of this great work that if he lived
,
t o one hundred years he would devote thirty to

the study of it What has filtered through to
.
the Occident is a simple but practical s ystem

of Geo mancy whic h I have here attempted to
disp lay .
C HAP T E R XII
P S Y C H O METRY
TH E trained occultist is capab le not only of mani ~
festing intense psychic activity under the direction

of his will but also on occasion of maintain in g a
,
perfect passivity which enables him to receive and

re gister impressions O f a subtile nature from th e
external world and to give free play to the sub
conscious side O f the mind sphere-
.
The psychometric sense is that by which we

receive impressions coming to us imperceptibly
throu gh the sense organs The functions of this
-
.
sense imply not only the existence of a subtile aura

attachin g to every material O bj ect but also the ,
ability to perceive the e ff ects produced in ourselves

b y attention to the auric emanations of such O b j ects.
The occultists affirm the existence of an aura to

every solar system to every planet of that system
, ,
and to every person or thin g upon that planet .
T hi s aura is a plastic sensitized medium of an

etheric nature which interpenetrates and extends
beyond every material body It is the storehouse
.
of every experience attac hing to the body it is

related to A piece of rock will thus preserve
.
to us not only the record of the earth of which it is

a part but also th e individual rec o rd o f its detached
,
3 10
3 12 A MANUAL J
OF O CCULTI S M
se nse is not comparable w ith that of either clear
seeing or hearing In the exercise of the fac ulty it
.
is necessary to have some obj ect such as a lette r ,
a lo ok of hair a glove belonging to the person

, ,
concerning whom inquiry is made .
This O bj ect is then held for a Short while between

the hands of the psychometrist or P assive
and sometimes it is raised to the level of the forehead
and placed between the eyes .
If the P assive is su fficiently sensitive to get e n

ra pp o r t wi th the subj ect there will ari se before
,
’
the min d s e ye a series of pictures or scenes or yet ,
only vague apperceptions of form colour distance , , ,
locality t ime etc These must nevertheless be at

, , .
once communicated by word of mo uth to a R e c order ,
however de tached and irrelevant t hey may appear .
The mind of the P assive must be kept entirely free

from speculation reasoning or guessing If the
, .
automatic fac ul ty is allowed free play it will in e v it

ably lead to correc t imp ressions after it has b een
allowed a certain amo unt of free exercise .
When it is considered how seldom in daily life

"
this subconscious s e lf is allowed to function it is ,
hardly to be wondered at that a faculty wh ich h a s

lain dormant s ince childhood should upon being ,
aroused by the will take occasion in the first place

,
t o stretch its limb s and gather its forces Give it .
opp o rtunity and time in which to carry out the .
behests of the Will and it undou b te dly will prove

,
itself a faithful servant .
Th e psychometric sense is in all respects analogous

P S Y C HOM E T R Y 3 13
to th at exercised by the p ass1v e seer in the act of

crystal gazin g or
-
scrying only it does not
necessarily or g e nerally extend to vision but rests ,
in a c e rtain apperc eption or impression which

takes n o defi n ite mental form .
There are moreo ver certain difficulties always

, ,
to be enco un tered in the exercise O f psychometry .
Clou ding .
may result from a state of incomplete

rapport which does not always rest in the de gre e
,
of sensitiveness enj o y e d by the P assive It may

“
well be due to the fact that the gIOv e or article

submitted for contact has not sufficiently strong
ass oc iations with the person to whom it belongs A .
le tte r for instance has frequently but slender

, ,
association with the writer of it while it is saturated

,
through and through with the magnetism of t h e

recipient owing to its h aving been long carried about
by h im .
Overlapping may arise from cross infl ue n c e s -

,
as when an article lon g in the possessi o n of one

,
person is given as a memento or keepsake to another

, ,
and then is submitted for contact by the P assiv e .
In such case the whole of the later associations have

to be waded thro ugh and o b literated from the test
before the information sought c oncernin g the original
po ssessor can be arrived at Me a nwhile the
“
*
.
,
p y
s c h o m e t rl c sense is becoming tired and blunted
in its perception so that little that is t o the actual
,
point of in quiry may be elicited at first In a second .
or third test from the same article the familiar

surface ground will be traversed more speedily and
there is then every likelihood of a satisfactory
conclusion .
Obliquity may very easily result from the

o
error of applying remarks concerning one set o f

impressions to the wron g person Thus if I go to a
.
P assive to make an in q u iry ab o u t a person named A ,
and take with me an article which was at one time

’
in A s possession but has some time been held by
,
me the P assive may very well be voicin g some

,
valuable information about m yself while I am erron

e o u sly trying to appl it to the subj ect of my inquiry
y ,
namely A Until therefore the P assive has given

.
some unmistakable indication that he or she is

on the track of the actual point O f inquiry care ,
must be exercised in the interpretation or application

of an y remarks that m ay be made .
It is usually found that the best results are O btain

able under c onditions of complete isolation both
ph ysical and mental If the mind of the P assive
.
is troubled about his own a ff airs or is labourin g under

the least degree of physical discomfort there will ,
be a surface ripple or superficial disturbance of the

-
mind sphere which will e ff ectually prevent the

-
P assive from getting down to those still mysteriou s ,
depths of consciousness in which the secrets of the

ages lie hidden .
Misinterpretation may occur in cases where

the clairvoyant faculty lends itself to the psycho "
metric and evolves a symbolic figure by way of
expression .
T hus I was once as k ed to psychometri z e an

“
of test con di tions This l ady handed me a box of
.
some three inche s cube wrapped arou nd With a ,
paper which was tied and sealed On holding this .
in my h ands I presently perceived a wide fl o Wing

landscape O f undulating fields on whic h were cattle
g razing I re
. m arked w ith inter e st that they were
of m ilky whiteness On the neck of one of superior
’
proportions a bell was hanging I heard this bell

'
rin g and from that point I gathered no other im

,
p ressions save that the country to which this

scene belonged was G reece .
On O penin g the pac ka g e at request I fou nd it ,
to contain the box first mentioned and within , ,
securely p acked an d stu ff ed with soft paper the -
identical cow bell of which I had received bot h

- :
clairvoyant and clairaudient impression"

P roviding the student is wi llin g to be perfe ctl y
honest with himself and frank with others there is ,
nothing that should prevent him from ac quiring

a mass of fi rs t hand evidence of the existence and
-
exercise of this psychometric faculty .
I would particularly reco mmend a readin g of

Den ton s The S o u l of Thin gs as bein g one of th e
’
e arliest and most convincin g of the many works

extant dealin g with this subj ect .
D O WS I NG
The psychometric sense is very clearly displayed
in t h e process of water fi n din g by means of the -
hazel r o d called D owsing The follo wing account

-
,
“
.
”
P S Y C HOM E T R Y
of some successful experien c e of this sort w ill prove

of interest .
“
A few weeks ago says th e We stminste r B udge t,
o f December 1 89 3 there took place some opera

,
tions with the divining rod by Mr S tears of Hull -

.
, ,
who w as called to Mr S C ampion s fa rm at E as t . .

’
He slu t o n near Malton to search for a water supply

,
At t hat time he marked two places near the farm

.
,
ho use wh e re he said the presence of water w as

, ,
indicated by the rod S ince then Mr E H allida y . . .

,
plumber of Malton has bored an artesian well at

,
"
one of the plac e s indicated and found a plentiful

supply o f water at a depth of 8 7 f eet after going ,
through sand clay and a bed of what Mr Halliday

f
, .
Says is quart z and lead ore Mr C amp ion who . .

,
was p reviously without a supply of pure water is ,
delighted with the res ults of the visit of the diviner ,
and has faith in the power of t h e r o d These and .
other experiments were conducte d in the presence

of Julia Lady Middleto n the Hon G eo ffrey and , .
Mrs Daw nay Lord Middlet on s agent and oth ers

.
,
’
,
.
Mr S tears also claims to be able to locate minerals

.
as well as w ater and a ffi rms t ha t not one person in

,
ten thousand c an use the ro d su c c e ssf ully .
I do not know h o w Mr S tears arrives at his figures

_
.
,
and I do not suppose that one pers on in ten thou

sand has ever attempted to employ the faculty .
As a f ac t w e ll within the experience of students of

‘
Occultism and fully illustrated nearly a century ago

,
in a book called We lton s R od it serves but to ’

”
enforce th e fact th at the divinatory faculty exten ds

to all the senses including that of si ght that
, ,
hearing of smell of touch an d even as here the

, , , , ,
nervous sense of feeling which is not the same as

,
touch but is an a uric sense extendin g over a very

,
wide area .
As ye t however the maj ority of people are

, ,
oblivious of the fact that such psyc hi c faculties

exist and even those who possess them and have
,
them in something like workin g order are conscious

of havin g but little control over them The func .
tions of the hi gher senses are as yet imperfectly

understood E very sense has its o c tave but
. ,
the involuntary functionin g of any sense octave

is apt to be regarded as a sign of insanity b y those
who have no knowledg e of the psychic faculties .
E ven genius has been related to insanity and

Lombroso and Nordau have sou ght to prove genius
is often a form of insanity It should rather be
.
regarded as an exaltation of faculty whi ch relates

its subj ect to a plane of consciousness removed from
one s normal experience by some degrees Thus
’
.
while new centres of activity are being O pened up ,
and are as yet under imperfect control whole areas ,
of the brain are left in neglect Hence to the casual.

,
observer genius is not distinguishable from some

,
incipient forms of insanity The eccentricity of .
g enius is one of the most si g nificant indications of

the functionin g of the subconscious part of the
mind In j ust the same way the openin g up of
.
new centres of activity in the psychic nature of man

is frequently attended by temporary loss of control
C HA P T E R X III
D RE A MS
A C C O R D I NG to the Yoga P hilosophy of In dia ,
the states of consciousness are primarily threefold

()1 J a g ra ta
,
or waking consciousness ; 2) S v a p n a ,
sleeping consciousness ; and (3 ) S ushup ti or ,
consciousness That which is normal to the dre

.
lif e is s v a p n a It is convenient to regard the

.
or con scious individual as a thread (sutrdtma the ,
thread soul as the Hindus call it ) upon which is

-
, ,
a bead representing the centre of consciousness .
If the thre a d be divided into three coloured sections

we shall t h en have the three planes of life upon Q ,
which the centre of consciousn e ss can function .
In the present instance we are concerned with the

middle stage or plane that of dream life There is
,
-
.
a neutral or nodal point separating e ach of t h ese

sta ges of consciousness from that above it As .
re gards the mass of people the jagrata or wak ing

, ,
consciousness is the no rm B ut in mystics a n d

,
.
visionaries the svap na or dream c o n sc io u sn e s

,
-
the norm and j ust as the ordin ary matter o f fact

, ,
- -
person p asse s in sleep from jagra ta to s va p n a so the

'
visionary to whom sva p na is normal passes in sleep ,
to sus hu p ti .
D R E AM S 3 21
This being understood as the concomitant result

of variety of evolution or individual development as
di stinguished from mere intellectual accomplishments ,
we may next consider the nature and cause of sleep

and then pass to a study of dreams their nature and ,
sign ifi cance .
During the activity of the body during th e day

every musc ul ar action e v e ry m e n t al effort is followed
, ,
by the breaking down of a number of minute cells

all of wh ich discharge their vital contents into the
system This vital content of the cell is called in
.
the Yoga philosophy p rana It is like an electrical

.
charge S o long as it remains in the cell it can be

.
used and di rected at will in t h e form of a current

of energy but w ,
h en the cell is broken up the force
is dissipated into the free ether of space and goes ,
to swell the sum total of latent energy in the world .
Wh en this process of breaking down has gone o n in t h e

system for so me time the body is flooded with the
,
vital principle and if this were to go on to any great

,
extent disease and death would b e the inevitable

,
res ul t V itality is not to be measured by the amount

.
of the pr ctna in the body but by the amount of

,
it we have under our control There is a good .
deal of life in a putrid carcase but none of it is ,
c o ordinated or under control

-
.
F o r the purpose of reab sorbing the vitality and

repairing the cellular structure of the exhausted
battery Nature has provided that exhaustion shall
,
be follo w ed by sleep ; as day is followed by night and

summer by winter Wh en the po wers of recupera
.
tion become M p aire d when this subtile Arch ae us
,
passes beyond our power of automatic refreshing ,
then age and disease begin to assert them

s elves .
A d r e nt — We sleep because we are exhausted ;

we awake because we are refreshed When we are .
asleep we dream because the immortal soul of us

, ,
that whi ch we call the Man (ma na s or mind ) ,
never sleeps since it is never exhausted and this

, ,
transference of its activity and of its dual f un ctions

to a higher or more interior plane of consciousness
is the cause of dreaming .
Of what nature then are dreams ,

? Obviously
,
they are only the perceptions of the soul in its

middle or twilight state of consciousness Dream .
land is shadow land neither darkness nor pure

-
,
li ght but a chiaro scu m of mingled perceptions

, .
Dreams are primarily of three kinds

()
1 Those which arise as memories of the wakin g
state of consciousness ; (2) those which have their
ori gin in the current chan ges of thou ght and feelin g
taking place in the dreamin g state ; and (3 ) those
which descend as i lluminations from the superior
plane of spiritual consciousness .
These three kinds of dreams may be called the

memory dream the phantastic dream and the clear
, ,
dream They are related to the phy sical psychic

.
, ,
and S piritual principles in man .
The transition from one sta ge to another is called

mutation and the sleeping condition is then known
,
as the high er or lo w er mutative sleep The follow .

is reflective of a state of existence which is in terior
to that of the waking perception and to that extent
instructive to it E xcessive or in di screet fee ding
.
will cause di sturbed dreams nightmare and a sense ,
of oppression and this instructs us that even

,
mind forms matter it is certain that

,
tions mind and that un di gested or

,
food which would har dly trouble the

,
becomes a source of impediment to the

would willingly spread its win g s were it not
and restrain ed by its care for the body A good .
tenant cann ot go away upon a holiday leavin g his

house in disorder for should he do so it would be a
,
constant source of anxiety to him It is ri ght that .
he should find it clean swept and garnished at such

-
time as he would a gain take possession .
The greater number of dreams are of this psycho

phy siological nature and origin and must chiefly ,
be interpreted in relation to the body or those mun

dane events which bear upon the immediate personal
interests of the dreamer .
Dreams that are disconn ected from the physical

senses are in the nature of soul images for the ,
soul thinks in symbols and understands by natural

interior perception of their significance Hence .
,
frequently the allegorical or symbolic dream carries

with it to the waking perception a sense of its true
significance All true dreams can be interpreted
.
b y natural correspondence and anybody who is ,
versed in symbology not as an arch ae olo gical science

,
but as a soul language can interpret dreams

-
, .
D R E AM S 3 25
Bu t in order to apply such interpretations to the

individual dr eamer it is necessary to know to what
order in the sidereal world such in di vidual may
belong In so far as the individual i s reflected
.
in the horoscope of birth by means of his physical

p e rs o n,
a it becomes possible to use the astrological
key for the interpretation of dr eams .
To many people flowers mean sickness while to ,
others they si gnif y j oy and festivity A probable

.
explanation of thi s di fference lies in the fact that

certain persons are in the habit of being visited
with gifts of flowers during illness and there is
,
hence an associated idea of flowers and sickness ;

while others not so fortunately placed as to be
recipients of floral condolences have only associated
flowers with the brightest days of their lives for ,
flowers belong to the summer days and to the

country where leisure and rest are usually sought
,
.
In sim ilar m ann e r names have a distinct sign i

l
'
fi c an c e when closely associated with events of our

waking life Thus I kn ow a lady to whom any name
.
with the syllable NO R in it is disastrous ; and

Normanhurst was lo st by her through an un
fortunate fin ancial crisis ; Norma was the name
O f a fin e pedigree S t .B ernard dog that died from
pneumonia brought on by careless exposure whi le
”
the animal was with the veterin ary surgeon ; Norsa “
was the name of a ship christened by her which

went do wn on its first voy a ge ; Norland was
the name O f a place in which her child was rendered
s peec hless th rough a fall ; and I regard this as
sufficient reason why without being able to ascribe

,
any reason for her prej udice the name of Nora ,
puts her on the defensive whenever she meets a

person of that name The soul in the dream state
.
-
instinctively surrounds itself with the images of

those things their forms colours names whi ch
, , , ,
in waking experience have been associated with

happiness whenever its interior state is a happy one ;
and on the contrary when its unclouded perception
, ,
of the future is fraught with prognostics of evil

import it throws down upon the brain of the sleepin g
,
personality the images of such things as withi n ,
the experience of that personality are associated ,
with danger or hurt to mind body or estate ,

.
With such soli citude does the soul watch over its
physical instrument that it will forewarn it of any
dan ger that is likely to befall it providing the
conditions for conveying and registering such a
messag e are present .
S imilarly the S pirit of Man watches over its

P syche or female counterpart and in clear dreaming
, ,
c onveys to it that degree of spiritual instruction or

admonition which it is capable of receiving or of
whi ch it has present need .
This S pirit has its own imperishable vehi c le the ,
solar body into which the soul or lunar body is

,
merged after the death of the physical The .
solar b ody is called the golden bowl the holy ,

”
grail ; the lunar bo dy or thread soul is called the -
”
silver cord and the physical body is called
,
th e pitcher and the vessel of clay Thus in .

experience in th eir physical bodies that whic h th ey

have been dreamin g Th u s I h ave recently read of
.
a man who dreamed that he w as lyin g upon the

sands exposed to a burning sun and on awakin g ,
he continued to experience the burning sensation

in his face and goin g to the mirror discovered to
,
his vast astonishment that h is face w as ac t ually

and most thorou ghly sunburnt This phenomenon .
is known as astral repercussion .
I once saw the wraith of a living person walk into

the room where I was sitting in company with
others and it was O bserved that the wraith which
, ,
appeared in all respects a figure of flesh and blood

and properly clothed knoc k e d his head against
,
the proj ecting corner of a wardrobe and instantly

disappeared in thin air The next morning the .
person wh ose wraith we had seen appeared with

h is eye bandaged up and explained that he had
a bruised swelling and must have been stung in
the ni ght by a mosquito We ho w ever told him a
.
, ,
di ff erent story.
P aracelsus says : Artists and students have

frequently obtained instruction in their dreams
regar di ng things which they desired to learn The .
imagination was thus free and commenced to

w ork its wonders It attracted to it the E v e stm
.
of some philosophers and they communicated their

,
knowledge to them .
S uch occurrences frequently take place but it ,
O ften happens that part of that w hich is communi
c at e d is for ott e n o n a w aking to t h e ou t er w o rl d

g .
D R E AM S 3 29
In suc h case it is necessary to observe strict s ilence ,
not to speak to anybody nor to leave the room , ,
nor take any note O f thin g s but to eat nothing

and remain still ; and after a while we shall remember
”
the dream .
I have found that if on a w akin g from a dream,
part of which is obscure or forgotten I continue ,
in the same position keeping my eyes closed to all

,
external things and then go over the dream in my

,
imagination the missing part is generally restored

, ,
as if I had dreamed the dream all over again .
E very one knows how readily a disturbing dream

may be dispell ed b y changing t h e position of the
body It is sometimes more conve ni ent to change
.
the position of the mind .
The astral life says a well kno wn occultist

,
”
-
,
is most active in man during hi s sleep The .
sidereal (so lar ) m an is then awake and acts through

~
.
the e v e strmfi (or astral body ) causing occasionally ,
p p
r O h e t ic dreams which the person
,
will remember
on awaking Bu t there are also elusive dreams
.
,
caused by other influences and man must therefore ,
use his reason and di scrimination to di stinguish

”
the true from the false .
But according to P aracelsus

, T h ere may be ,
more reliance placed in dreams than in the revela

tions of the necromantic art ; because the latter
are usually fals e and deceptive and although the ,
elementals which use the astral b o di es of the dead

on such occasions will give correct answers to
uestions n d O f te n confi rm their asse rti ons wit h
q a
oat hs yet no impli cit confidence can be placed in
,
what they say because they do n o t wish to speak

the truth no r are they able to speak it .
Therefore the patriarchs prophets and saints ,
preferred visions and dreams to any other meth o d

of divination S upernatural dreams take
.
place at times among the present generation but ,
only the wise pay any attention to them Others .
treat them with contempt although such dreams

,
are true and do not deceive .
There are some people whose natures are so

spiritual and their souls so exalted that they can
approach the hi ghest spiritual sphere when their
bodies are asleep Dreams visions and
.
,
omens are gif ts of the sidereal man and not of the ,
elementary body The elementary body

.
has no spiritual gifts but the sidereal body possesses

,
them all Wh enever the elementary body is at

.
rest the sidereal body is awake and active because

, ,
the latter needs neither rest nor sleep ; but whenever

the elementary body is fully awake and active ,
the activity of the sidereal b Ody is then restrained ,
and its free movements are impeded or hindered

like those of a man who is buried alive in a tomb .
A man who is content with the rus hli ght of his

own reason will har dly welcome the e ffulgent rays
of the universal sun What benefit can such people
.
derive from the most perspicuous dream 2

Localization of dreams is a very remarkable
phenomenon Yet almost all persons have some
.
s e lect spot some h aunt to wh ich they repair from

,
appears is of th e utmost value especially wh en t he
,
sense is extended beyond the ordinary limit O f the

mere word .
The present work does not permit of a thorough

exposition o f the symbolism of dreams and it is ,
not therefore thou ght advisable to attempt the tas k

of formulating a sy stem of interpretation S uch a .
system however does exist and has been reflected

, ,
in all the scriptures of all peoples from time

immemorial The universe and man are c o n se n
.
t an e o u s
. There is an universal symbolism an ,
— —
universal language and if you please an universal
,
Dream b ook Bu t this sam e gb o o k needs reading

-
. .
C HAP T E R X IV
S O RTI L E GE S
A MO NG all the methods of di vination wh ich

have found favour in the eyes of the uninitiated ,
none has received greater recognition than that

”
of sortileges or drawing lots Admitting the
.
sanctity whic h attaches to any body of scripture

to be acknowledged b y the consultant what method ,
of obtainin g a kn owled ge of the will of Heaven

could be more facile or more dependable than to
take haphazard a text from the revealed Word
The B ible amon g Christians the K oran amon g
,
Mohammedans and the reli gious books among

,
various nations have been consistently used for

purposes of divination b y sortilege Various of .
the religious books of India are consulted in the

same manner and like ourselves they have books
,
constructed for purposes of divination In all .
sortileges drawn from holy writ the direct action

of t h e divinatory faculty is relied upon and the lot ,
drawn is a cc epted as the expressed will of Heaven

in regard to the matter about which the inquiry
is made ; the belief in such a di vination being that
3 33
334 A MANUAL OF O CC ULT I S M
the S pirit not only directs the mind to this means
of resolvin g its doubts but also guides the hand
,
to an appropriate and true selection .
In the case of books constructed specially for the

purpose of divination of whi c h there are a great
,
number the automatic or divinatory faculty is

,
by means of numbers geomantic points and other

,
intermediaries so that in e ffect the di viner is guided

,
to a sortilege or oracular sentence whi ch is designe dly

in apposition to the question and presumed to satisfy
it being favourable or otherwise according to the
.
lot or number involved .
The u sual method of makin g such books of divina

tion is to formulate a certain number of questions ,
from which the diviner m ay choose such as answer

nearest to the matter in hand and then to arrange
,
a codex by whi ch each question is related to a variety

of answers so that at some point or other in the
,
process the automatic fac ul ty m ay avail itself of

”
the element of chance Thus while there is a
.
,
reat variety of methods the principal factor in a ll

g ,
cases is the exercise of t h e automatic or divinatory

faculty .
And if we rightly consider the matter there is no

reason why such sortile ges should not be true and
e ffective for it is constantly under observation
,
that problems whi ch cannot be solved by the v o lu n

tary exercise of the faculties will be speedily and
successfully surmounted b y the automatic or
involuntary action of the brain S uch cases are on
.
record in connection with the experience of som

acceptable to cite a common experience of every

day lif e A name is forgotten which it is important
.
should be recollected ; we worry over it we t w ist ,
and turn about in the storehouse of the memory to

find that partic ul ar n ame ; we go through the
alphabet in the hope of getting a lead o fl in the right -
direction from the initial letter ; we make various

futile attempts at a combination of sounds ; but
all to no purpose We give it up and turn for dis
.
traction to some other theme No sooner has the .
attention become entirely diverted than spontan ,
e o u sly and perfectly the much sought name springs

,
-
to the brain the eye the tongue on the instant

, , .
Th e moral of this is When you have plou ghed

and sown leave the harvest to Nature ; or as I have
, ,
’
heard it otherwise put When you can t crack a
”
nut give it to a monkey which means I take it
, , , ,
that Nature is all su ffi c ie n t and that what she can

-
make she can break b y one means or another , .
And this is the faith of the devout ; for havin g tried ,
by all ri ghtful means to compass an end and findin g ,
the task beyond hi s powers a man does well to leave ,
the issue in higher hands By doing so he affirms .
his faith in the beneficent power of his C reator .
An instance of the kind of sortileges referred to

as indirect
“
may be found in the Wheel Of
P ytha goras though it is di f fi cult to trace any
,
connection between this and the philosopher of

C roton . A person desires an answer to a question .
S uch answer may be propitious or adverse O f ,
immediate fulfi lment or delayed according to the

, ,
S O R TIL E GE S 337
quarter of the heavens to which the divination

refers .
The letters of the alphabet are valued for this

purpose as follows
2 Y 11 I J N
3 Z 12 E L R P
4 A F S 13 X
G E T 16 K
S Q 18 D W
9 O UV 19 M
The days of the week with their corresponding

,
.
numbers and the planets governing them together ,
with their numbers are contained in the fo llowing

,
Table
MON . U ES
T . WE D . TH UR S . FRI . S AT
.
In order to e ff ect the divination it is first of all ,
necessary that the diviner should think of a number ,
and set it down To this must be successively added

.
1 The initial of the C hristian name

. .
2 The number of the day o f the week

. .
x
3 The number of the planet answering to the day

. .
The sum of these four numbers is then to be

divided b y 3 0 and with what remains the diviner
,
must refer to the

338 MANUAL OF O C CULTI S M
Whe e l of P ythago ras .
If the number is found in the l st q u art e r of the

Heavens s ucce ss will come sp e adily
, .
If in the 2n d quarter s u cc e ss will be de laye d

, .
If in the 3rd quarter fa ilure will be met with

,
s p e e dily .
If in the 4th quarter fa ilu re wi ll attend in the

,
end and after de lay

, .
Moreover the four quarters correspond to the

,
seasons I S pring II S ummer IV Autumn III

, , , ,
Winter .
w here there was an iron fencing and that she woul d ,
k now the spot by the fact that a hor se was standing

close to it I assured he r she would recover the
.
articles and on learning that she had only been for

,
a short walk of a mile or two alon g the riverside ,
I elected to g o in se arch of the thin g m yself which ,
I did without delay fearin g that the conditions

,
which then o btained would presently alter Walk .
ing quickly in the direction indicated I found ,
the footpath b y the river flanked b y continuous

hedges and trees bey ond which were fields B u t
,
.
at last I came to a place where the hedgerow was

broken and some old iron rails had been set to
fi ll the gap and there also was the horse with his
,
head over the railin gs It was now quite dusk

.
,
and I had to strike several matches in succession

to ob tain light enou gh B u t almost the firs t thing
.
I saw w as the broken necklace not much scattere d , ,
upon the g round ; and I returned with it in complete

satisfaction .
S peaking of this system to a gatherin g of occult

students on a recent occasion I was asked to give,
them an illustration of it I therefore asked my

.
hostess to think of any event in her past life as , ,
for example marriage and then give me the first

, ,
number that came into h e r mind Bu t I warned . .
her n o t to think of her marriage as I had s u g gested ,
it P resently she gave me t h e number 25 I was

. .
surprised and m y first comment was that she had

,
thought of something connected with her marriage .
On adm itting that this w as the case I s aid it con ,

S O R TIL E G E S 3 41
cerne d a short j ourney a removal from the h ouse , ,
and a j ewel which was a gold ring set with a blue

'
stone most probably a turquoise

, .
In confirming this divination the lady informed ,
u s that she had set out for a drive with her husband ,
s ta r ting fro m h o me and had met with an accident

, ,
in which she lost a go ld r ing s e t with a turq uo is e ,
and that was the subj ect of her thought The .
ring h ad been a we dding p re se n t .
Another kind of sortilege or divination akin to it ,
but somewhat in the nature of a K a b a la is c ontained ,
in a manuscript b y B orri written in old Italian .
The method is as follows —A question of any sort .
bein g written down the number of words in the

,
sentence are noted and successively the number of

the letters in each of the words These numbers .
are set in a row and are then added by pairs from

,
ri ght to left t h e nines bein g excluded and the

,
remainders set down in a second row The sam e .
process is followed out continuously until at length ,
only two numbers remain to be added together and ,
the sum of them gives the final number which may ,
be 1 3 5 7 or 9 on the one hand or on the other

, , , , ,
2 4 6 or 8
, , ,
If the number b e odd the result is
.
,
adverse ; but if even the augury is good ,

.
An example wi ll serve for all cases Let the .
question b e
Will niy operation b e successful The number of
the words is 5 and the number of letters in the words
,
successively are 4 2 9 2 l The word successful

, , , , .
has ten letters but rej ecting t h e nine 1 is left These

, , .
figures are th en set out in order from left to right
5 4 2 9 2 ]
9 6 2 2 3
6 8 4 5
5 3 9
and added together in pairs rej ecting the nines when

,
the sum of any two exceeds that number As a .
fi nal result we have the fi gure 2 which shows that

,
the operation will be successful and that speedily ;

,
for the smaller the number the quicker will be the

realization of the good or evil thus pro gnosticated .
F rom a similar configuration C agliostro followin g ,
the methods of the Illuminati woul d have foretold

,
that the winning number of the next lottery would

be but his method was more complex and
involved the extraction of a series of numbers .
The divin ation in the above example rests upon the

unpremeditated and spontaneous use of words
which are emplo yed to express the question in mind .
It is perhaps needless to add that the forcing of a

sentence b y studied art is not in the nature of an
appeal to the automatic or subconscious part of
’
one s nature and no reliance can be placed upon
,
an answer thus O btained Neither is it possible

.
to successfully engage the divinatory faculty upon

all and trivial occasions. The use as distinguished ,
from the abuse of the faculty consists in its employ

,
ment only upon serious occasions and concerning

issues which cannot be otherwise known .
A L C H E MY
IT has always been within the scope of practical

ma gic to attempt the M a gn um Op u s which consists
,
in the production of the E lixir Vitae and the La p is

P hilo so p ho ru m . Those who have failed in the
g reat work have consoled themselves with the belief
that there is an alchem y of the soul of greater
consequence to immortal man than the mere trans
mutation O f gross metals Hence we have the two
.
schools everywhere in evidence in the literature

,
of this subj ect the Al chemists who claimed that all

,
metals spran g ori ginally from a sin gle menstruum

and are convertible b y art ; and the Hi gher Al ch e m
is t s or My stics who saw in the principles and pre
,
s c r ip t io n s of the spa gyric art nothin g but a sublime
system of spiritual philosophy havin g direct reference

to the spiritual regeneration of man .
The Alchemists af firmed that the e ns of gold or

silver could be extracted and a subtile tincture made
by which all the gross metals such as copper lea d , ,
etc could be impregnated and chang ed to the pure

.
,
g old or silver
,
copper lendin g itself more a greeably
to th e tincture of gold an d le ad to that of silver .
3 44
AL C H E MY 3 45
They affirme d moreover that this e ns of gold could

, ,
“
be fixed and rendered as a red powder of proj ection
which being applied alchemically to Mercury would
, ,
change it into gold .
All metals in the eart h are generated from

Mercury s ays one writer
,
”
and thus Mercury is
,
the first matter or p rima ma te ria of all metals .
Avicenna illustrates this dictum to which he ,
gives consent when he says :

,
As ice which by ,
heat is dissolved in to water is clearly generated o u t

,
of water so all metals may be resolved into Merc ury

, ,
”
whence it is clear that they are generated out of it .
B ernard of Tre v isa is quoted to the same e ffect

S imilarly quicksilver is the substance of all
metals : it is as a water by reason of the homogeneity
which it possesses with vegetables and animals ,
and it receives th e virtues of those things which

”
adhere to it in decoction And he further says
.
G old is nothing but quicksilver congealed by its

”
sulphur .
E lsewhere he says The solvent di ffers from the

soluble only in proportion and d e gree of di gestion ,
but not in matter since Nature has formed t h e one

,
out of the other without any addition even as by ,
a process equally simple and wonderful she evolves

”
gold out of quicksilver .
Now in the name O f Occultism I affirm that the

,
conclusions of B ernard Trevisan are as fully entitled

to credence among the scientific as that of S ir William
C rookes whose P rotyle or Mother substance lies at
,
-
t h e base of all modifications of matter and is res p on s ,

ible for the genesis of the elements The same .
daring th inker has been credited with the statement ,
thou gh I have not myself seen it that it is sc ie n t ifi c ,
ally conceivable that we may take copper or any

other metal and having resolved it into that prime
,
element from whi ch it is a di fferentiation thereafter ,
shunt it on to the lines which make for gold .
The alchemical idea is that all metals are generated

from and are indeed only modifications of a
, ,
p r im u m e n s or original matter and that they are ,
mutually convertible ; the medium in all cases being

Mercury which is the coagulated menstruum of
,
this Mother substance

-
.
Again The sa ges have it that gold is nothing

but quicksilver perfectly di gested in the bowels of the
earth and they have signified that this is brought
,
about b y sulphur which coagulates the Mercury and

,
di gests it by its o wn heat Hence the sages have

.
said that gold is n o thing b u t ma ture qu icksilv e r 1

.
”
C ertainly it does not seem improbable that

chemical science should be able to bring about in
a short time that which Nature produces in the
course O f y ears or even ages An d the alchemists
.
may be right in their assertion that all metals have

a common base in Mercury and that this Mercury
,
is the menstruum of all metals and itself the c o agu ,
late O f the P rima M a te ria We do not kn ow cer

.
t ainly what these metals are nor b y what process ,
they are delivered to us b y Nature but we know ,
1
Th e A lch e mica l Writings o f E dward K e lly, b y A E . . Waite .
Lo ndo n : W m R ide r and S o n, Ltd

. .
3 48 A MANUAL O F O C C ULTI S M
Alc h emy teaches us also th at the elements are

mutually convertible an d how one comes to pre
,
dominate over others and whence the substance of

metals is generated The F our E lements were
.
fi guratively spoken of as Fire Air Water and E arth

, , ,
and t h eir qualities are fourfold hot cold moist and

, , ,
Two are imponderable and t w o heavy The .
substance of all metals is the livin g Mercury as ,
distin gui shed from quicksilver To this Nature

.
added sulphur and also salt and these three thin gs

,
digested to gether and coagulated .
The mineral principle s are living Mercury and

sulphur F rom these are generated all metals and
.
m inerals of which there are many speci e s posse ssin g

, ,
”
diverse natures .
ALCHE MY 3 49
Gol d is a
perfect body of pure clear red Mercury , , ,
”
and pure fixed red incombustible sulphur
, , , .
P r imum E n s
S ulphur — Mercury — S a lt
Go ld
With what perfect facility the writings of the

ancient Alchemists lend themselves to the higher
interpretation m ay be illustrated by an extract ,
wh ich formed part O f the treatise written for the

e difi c a t io n of K ing R udolf of Hungary b y E dward
K elly
When the soul of gold has been separated from
,
its body or wh en the body in other words has been

, , , ,
dissolved the body of the Moon should be watered

,
by its proper menstruum and reverberated the ,
O peration being repeated as often as is necessary ,
i e until the body (of the Moon ) bec omes supple

. .
,
bro k en up pure dissolved coagulated This is

, , , .
done not with common fire but with that of the

, ,
S ages and at last you must see clearly that noth ing
,
remains undissolved Fo r unless the Moon or .
E arth is properly prepared and entirely emptied

of its soul it will not be fit to receive the S olar seed ;
,
but the more thorou ghly the E arth is cleansed of

its impurity and earthiness the more vi gorous it ,
will be in the fixation of its ferment This earth .
or Moon of the S ages is the trunk upon which

the solar branch of the S ages is engrafted This .
e art h w ith its w ater p u t re fi e s and is cleansed ; for

,
heat actin g on a dry substance causes whiteness
, , .
Azoth and fire wash Laton or earth and remove , ,
its opacity .
Obviously the Mystic who has no sense of the

, ,
g reed of g old in him who regards values

, as in relation
only to their ultimate products and finds the virtue ,
of all things to consist only in their uses m ay be ,
j ustified in his Hi gher Alchemy He reads the .
above quotation not literally but allegorically

, , ,
and paraphrases in accord with his perceptions ,
somewhat as follows
When the spiritual S oul is freed b y death from
the body the animal soul reverts to its own sphere
,
and is after w ards reincarnated the O peration taking ,
place as O ften as is necessary in fact until it has .

,
become so hi ghly evolved as to constitute an apt

matrix for the implanted germ O f the solar body .
And this is to be e ffected not b y means of the ter ,
r e s t rial but the celestial fire which is the Fire of the

, ,
Holy S pirit ; and at len gth it will come to pass after ,
many incarnations that the Lunar B ody or astral soul

,
will be purged of all impurities F o r unless the astral .

,
and the physical b y means of the astral is entirely ,
emptied of its soul which is the brute or passional l
nature and the cupidity of the lower mind it will

, ,
not be fit to receive the spiritual seed B u t the .
more completely the lower nature is purged the more ,
perfect will be the u n ion of the spiritual soul with

its P syche This P s yche is the stock upon which is
.
engrafted the spiritual branch bearin g seed fruit ,
whose seed is in itself a tree springing up as a Tree

,
Higher Alchemy of the Mystic to be the only possible

application of the Arcana The spiritual interpreta
.
tion infers the material in this world of relativity .
The one is based upon the other They are in apposi .
tion The saltin g of the earth is the work of the

.
Initiates of all ages They themselves have effected

.
the Higher Alchemy of the S oul or they possess ,
the ke y to the lower or chemical art for they ,
know the correspondence of thin g s spiritual and

natural If the Abbot of Glastonbury essayed the
.
Magnum Opus before he was himself prepared he ,
had only himself to blame that his vessels were

overturned b y the elemental forces he invoked
without understandin g ; for one in version is followed
b y another and the material can never take pre
,
c e de n c e of the spir itual without incurrin g great

risk of hurt Hence the admonition S eek ye first
.
,
the K in gdom of Go d an d all these things shall be

added unto you .
B u t w hat was found b y the despoilers included

only a manuscript and two small ivory vessels one ,
containing a red powder and the other a white

powder ; and these for the sum of o n e guinea passed
, ,
into the possession of E dward K elly who afterwards ,
allied himself to Dr Dee Then later on we find

. .
these two colleagues en g aged under the patronage ,
of K ing R udolph in makin g transmutation for

, ,
which work K elly obtained the distinctions O f a

Marshal That K elly was no Alchemist but only
.
,
a usurper and p ro fligat e user of the tre asure trove

of Glastonbury appears from the fact that t h e
,
ALC H E M Y 3 53
powder diminished by excessive proj ection became

, ,
exhausted ; it was squandered still further in futile

attempts to increase it ; and when the E mperor
(R udolph ) co m manded his guests t o produce it in
becoming quantity all experiments proved failures
, .
The impotence of the exhausted Alchemist

was attribute d to obstinacy and the guest w as ,
changed into a prisoner con fin ed in a dungeon

of Zo b e slau . To regain his liberty he promised
to manufacture the stone on condition th at he ,
was permi tted to return to P rague and take

counsel with Dr Dee To that city he was per
. .
m it t e d to go back but his house was guarded and

, ,
as fres h experiments in the composition of the trans

muting powder were abortive as ever the alchemist , ,
seized with rage made a futile attempt to escape

, ,
which ended in the murder of one of his guards

,
1 ”
.
T hi s in cident res ul ted in a secon d imprisonm ent ,
and although at the instance of Dr Dee Q ueen .

,
E lizabeth was pleased to claim K elly as h e r subj ect ,
the K ing of Hungary w ould not release him but ,
held him on the groun ds of the murder of one of

hi s o wn subj ects F rom this second incarceration
.
K elly attempted to escape by means o f a rope ,
but falling from a height he sustained inj uries whic h

led to his death at the age of forty tw o S ir E dward -
.
K elly w as born at Worcester on the l st August

O S
’
( ) 1
, 5 5 5 at
, about four o clock in the afternoon ,
and those w h o care to examine h is h oroscope w ill

1
E dwa rd K e lly Alche my an d the Alch e mists, b y L o uis
Figu ie r
observe that the c onj unction of Mars Uranu s and ,
Jupiter in the Midheaven is in sin gular conformity

with his strange and eventful career promisin g as ,
it does a rich windfall fraught with the dan ger of

the S word in the B alance " Nor is it possible
to overlook the si gnificance of the planet Neptune
in O pposition from the lower meridian with its ,
sinister indication of plots and schemes directed

against his person and reputation ; in which event
one sees that this exploiter Of treasure trove and
usurper of the supreme title of Ade p t u s came by
some of his own in the fin al settlin g of accounts .
That he was actually possessed of the P owder of

P roj ection and the method of P roj ection there ,
seems no reason to doubt for else he had not

,
been able to satisfy the numerous demands

of h is royal patron and newly made friends at -
P rague . B u t that he was not master of the art

and had no knowledge or means of increasing t h e
P owder of P roj ection or making more even when ,
it would have saved his life not to me ntion the

,
satisfaction of his own cupidity is also a matter

,
beyond all question His writings on the alchemical

.
art are chiefly valuable on account of their reference

to the writin gs of others There is however the
.
, ,
g reat probabilit y that the B o o k o f S t D u n s ta n as.

,
it is called and so mentioned b y Dr Dee in connec

,
.
,
tion with the powder found at the digging in

E n gland ,
is the ori ginal man u script of the Glaston
bury sage or at least founded upon it and so of
, ,
much value to the purpose of this inquiry There .

phenom ena produced by its means Wh en the .
learned are disp osed to accept P aracelsus at h is

w ord the w orld will be more generously disposed
concerning this great philosopher who stands in ,
sin gular distinction from the maj ority of Initiates

in his freedom from all ambiguity and obscurantism .
It is in the same S pirit of unfettered freedom of

thought that I have endeavoured to treat of some
aspects O f Occultism and allied subj ects w ith I , ,
trust no greater hurt to my reputation among

,
those whose opin ion I value .
TH E E ND
r
R i cha d Clay cfi S ons, Limi te d, Lo n do n
'
a nd B u n g ay
.
S OME P U BL I C AT I O NS
OF
WI LLIAM RIDER S ON, LTD .
MATTE R S P I RI T AND TH E C O S M O S
,
S o me S ug :
g e s tio n s as t o a B e tte r Unde rstan ding o f th e Wh e nce

an d th e Why of th e r i E xiste nce . By H . S TA NL E Y
R E D G R O V E , Au th o r of O n th e C alc ulatio n of Th e rmo
C h e mi cal C o nstants C ro wn 8 vo , c lo th gilt,
”
. 2s . 6d . ne t .
A n o th e r e vid e nc e of th e re v o lt th at se e ms
b e gradually rising
to
a
g i t
a nsth e m at e rialism o f th e la t e n ine te e nth c e n tury A s a stude nt .
o f sc ie nc e , th e auth o r m ay b e c o nside re d a s a t le a st an unp re udic e j d

v
ad o c ate f o r t h e re ality o f sp irit
”—
The S cots ma n . .
“
H is a rg u m e n ts are con vi n c ing w ith re sp e c t to th e wh o le or
a b so lute u
p pr o se of th e c o sm o s .
” -
The A ca de my .
Eo nclusio ns v b v
-
d at b y p ro ce sse s o f
’
“
Th e w rite r s ha e e e n a rri e
”—
re aso nin
g w h ic h are u ndo u bt e dly b o ld, ing e nio us an d o rig inal L i:ght . .
'
THE TA RO T O F THE B O HE M I A NS : Th e Mo st
An c ie nt B o o k in th e Wo rld ,
f o r th e E xclusive U se of
I ni tiate s . By BAP U S Tran slate d fro m th e Fre nch b y

.
A P . . M O R TO N . Ne w e ditio n , re vise d th ro ugh out, with

in tro du c ti o n b y A E VVA I TE C ro wn 8v o , o rnamental . . .
c lo th gilt, gilt t o s, 3 84 o f u l i llu st t d 6 5 n t

p pp p
,
r se y ra e , e . . .
P ro b bly th
a e mo st c o mp le te e xp o sitio n o f th e wh o le su bj e ct th at
be bt i d i n th e E nglish lang uag e
”
/ /
c an o a ne .
We ll illustrate d , and g ar b e d b e autifully .

-
T t c Thcosop zzst
'
M . E nc ausse
’
s v e ry c o nside ra bl e le arning ca nnot b e gainsaid .
Manche ste r C our ie r .

A P A C K O F 7 8 TA RO T C A RDS : E xq uisite ly drawn
an d c olo ure d ,
f ro m ne w and O riginal de signs by
P A M E L A C O L E MAN S M I TH . E ac h c ard h as a se
p ara t e
:
alle go r c al i m e ani ng . Th is is with o ut q ue sti on th e

fi ne st a nd m o st artistic
p ac k th at h as e ve r be e n
p r o duc e d . P ric e 6 3 . n e t, p o st f re e .
Th e m o st w o nde rf ul pa ck o f c ards th at h as e v b er e e n se e n s inc e th e

days w h e n G ring o nne ur illum ina te d th re e p acks f o r th e a mu se m e nt of
King C h arle s V I o f Franc e , in th e ye ar o f o ur L o rd I

.
— Arth ur
Ma ch e n in T P . .
’
s We e kly .
THE KE Y TO THE TA RO T : G iv in g th e hi sto ry o f th e
T aro t C ards, th e i r alle go ric al m e aning an d th e m e th o ds

of divinatio n f o r wh ic h t h e y are a da t
p e d . B y A R TH U R
E D WA R D WA I TE . R o yal 3 2 mo .
, c lo th il
g ,t 25 . ne t .
E sse ntial to th e inte rp re tatio n of th e Taro t C ards .
Th e C ards an d K e y will b e suppl e i d to ge th e r in ne at
b o x f o r 85 p o st f re e . .
Y O U R FO RTU NE I N Y O U R NA M E O R KA B A L I S TI C
AS TRO LO G Y . Ne w e ditio n ,
large ly re v ise d. D e my
”
i S E P H A R I AL
“
8V O, c lo th g lt,
6
9 pp .
,
as . 6d . ne t . By .
Th e fi rst e t his p o p ular w o rk o n K a alistic A stro lo gy h a ing

ditio n of b v
b b
e e n e n t ire ly so ld o ut, th e p u lish e rs arra ng e d w ith th e a uth o r f o r th is
v
c o rre c te d and re ise d e dit io n to m e e t th e p u lic de m and b .
A MA NUA L O F C A RTO M A NC Y , Fo rtune Te lling -

and
O c c ult D iv ina tio n i nc luding th e O rac le of H uman

D e stiny, C aglio stro s Mystic Alph ab e t o f th e Magi , & c , .
&c Fo urth e ditio n, gre atly e nlarge d and re v ise d, b y

.
G R AND O R I E NT . C ro wn 8 v o , c lo th il
g ,t 2
52 pp .
,
25 . 6d . ne t .
To th e c urio us in such matte rs th is b oo k w ill affo rd much inte re st

ing info rmatio n .
”
-
P a ll M a ll .
RA MA A ND MO S ES Th e Aryan C yc le and th e Mi ssio n
:
of I srae l . Translate d f ro m “
L e s G rands I nitiés of
E D O U A R D S C H U R E, b y F R O TH WE LL, B A C ro wn 8 v o , . . .
cloth, as ne t N B —This volume comple te s th e se rie s

. . . . .
WI TH THE A D E P TS An Adve nture a mo ng th e R o si

ui
c r c an s . By D r FR A NZ H A RTM ANN Ne w an d R e v i se d
. .
E ditio n . C rown 8110 , c lo th gilt, 1 8 0 pp 2 s 6 d n e t . . . .
I t is f ull o f th o ugh t o n th e h igh e r th ing s o f life , a nd at te

s e rio usly t o g ra
p ple with ma ny m yste ri e s o f th e life th at n o w is, as
as t h at w h ic h 13 to b e —Woolw zch o ne e r . .
TH E BOO K O F THE S I M P L E WAY . By L AO TZE

( T
“
h e O ld B o y A N e w T ran slati o n o f T h e T a o
“
T e h K ing With I ntro duc tion and C o m me ntary b y

-
.
WALTE R G O R N O LD , C rown 8v o , c lo th ,
2s ne t .
fi
/
L ao tze re mains a p rinc e am o ng hilo so ph e rs anc s st ill as
p — T ze
o o d r e ading a s h e w as so m e fi v e o r si x c e nturi e s B C Tzm e s
g . .
An e x
lle nt translatio n o f th e t e ach ing s o f th is an c ie nt sag e
ce
x b
.
As a n e dito r a nd e p o s ito r Mr O ld is o th w e ll inf o rm e d and symp a.

-
th e tic . Glasg ow H e r a ld .
O B E RMA NN . By E TI E NNE FI V E T DE S E NANC O UR .
T ranslate d f ro m th e F re nch, with Bi o graph ic al

C ritic al I n tro duc ti o n b y A R TH U R E D WAR D
C ro wn 8 vo , 6s n e t, o rname n tal c lo th, gilt to p s
. .
b
A S pirit ual Auto io graph y, ric h in th e in itatio n to th ink v -
w ith th e q
ue s t O f truth , a n d ye t f ull o f s pe culati e unre s t v
v
.
alue o f th is e ditio n is g re atly e nh an c e d b y t h e c ritic al ap pre c iatI O n
w h ich M r Waite h a s e n ric h e d a

”
. o o k th at de se r e s to b e m uc h b v
w ide ly kno w n Th e S ta n da r d
. .
An e x ce lle nt tran sla tio n .

”
—The Time s .
Mr Waite mus t b e w e ll kno w n a s a le arne d and e nc h anting Mysti

v b
.
e v e n t h o se w h o a re no t mys tic s o r e e n t hyrsu s e a re rs h o ld h im -
re s
pe c t. We f o re n o t surp rise d th at h e t re ats Ohe r m a n n
a re th e re
‘
b
A g re at o o k o f th e so ul, an d D e S e na n c o ur a s a man o f isio n
’ ‘
v '
b b
.
e lo ng ing a t h is e st to e te rnity — The D a i ly C hr om cle . .
W . RI DER S ON, Limite d, 164 Alde rsgate S tre e t, London, E C .

‘
.
P UB L I C A T I O NS OF
W illia m R id e r 81 S o n, Lt d .
THE NE W T H O U G H T L I B RA RY .
Crown C r im s o n c lo t h e x tr a , g i l t t op s 3 s . dot . ne t .
Th e Ne w T h o u g h t L i b r ar
y h as b e e n d e s ig n e d t o in c lu de o n ly
th e b e st w o r ks in t h is c la s s o f lit e ra t ur e . T h e fi r s t tw e l v v e o lu me s
are n o w r e a dy .
Ha v e g W i ll ?
yo u H o w t o D e e lo p a n d
a S t ro n v
S t r e n g t h e n Wi ll P o w e r Me m o r y o r a n y o t h e r F a c ult y o r A t , ,
t r ib ut e O f t h e M in d b y t h e E as y P r o c e s s o f S e lf H yp n o t is m ; By
C h a r le s G o df re y L e la n d F if t h e dit io n c o n t a in in g the .
,
c e le b r a t e d c o r r e s p o n de n c e b e t w e e n Ka n t a n d H u f e la n d a nd ,
an a ddit io n a l c h ap te r on P a r a c e ls us and h is Te a c h in g . P r ic e
3 8 . 6 d . ne t .
Th G if t o f t h e S p i r it
e A S e le c t io n f ro m t h e E s s a ys O f .
P re n t i c e M ulf o r d Re p r int e d f r o m t h e
“
W h it e C r o s s L i b ra ry ”
Wit h a n I nt ro duc t io n b y A rt h ur E dw a rd W a ite Th ird E dit io n

. .
. .
P r ic e 3 8 6 d n e t B o u n d in Re d La m b s k in , g i lt e d g e s 5 8 n e t
. . .
-
, . .
Th G if t o f U n d e r s t a n d i n g
e A f u rt h e r S e le c t io n f ro m .
t h e Wo rk s o f P r e n t ic e M u lf o r d Re p rin t e d f ro m t h e W h it e
“
-
Wit h a n I n t ro d uc t io n b y A rt h u r E dw a rd Wa it e
, .
C ro s s Lib r a r y . .
P r ic e 3 s 6 d n e t B o un d in Re d L a m b s k in , g i lt e dg e s , 5 8 n e t
. . .
-
. .
Es sa y s o f Pre n t ic e M u lf o r d . Th ir d S e ri e s . P ric e
3 8 . 6 d ne t . .
Es s a y s o f P r e n t ic e M u lf o r d . F o u rt h S e r ie s C o m p le t in g
b
.
t he e n t ire s e t O f t h e E s s ay s p u lis h e d in A m e r i c a un de r t h e t it le
Yo ur F o rc e s a n d H o w t o Us e Th e m P r ic e 3
”
of . 8 6 d ne t
. . .
he e f ur v lu m e c i u e by f h be E di i f h
T o nst t t t st t on o t E s s a ys Of P re ice nt
M u f rd pub li hed h E gl h l g u ge S peci l c re h bee k e e li m i
s o o s ar e e
l o t n ta to na t e
h err r d mi k e i h w hich h m eric edi i b u d
s in e n is an a . a a as n
t e o s an sta s W t t e A an t on a o n s .
T h e S c ie n c e o f t h e L a r g e r L if e . A S e le c t io n f r o m
t h e E s s a ys O f Ur s ula N G e s t e f e ld P r ic e 3 s . . . 6 d ne t . .
Ev e ry Ma n a K i n g , O r M ig h t in Min d Mas t e ry . B y O r is o n
S w e tt Ma rde n . P r ic e 3 8 6 d n e t . . .
C a t h e d ra l Ho u s e , Pate r no st e r Ro w , Lo n d o n , E C . .
4 W I L L IAM R I DE R S O N, Lim it e d .
Ne w E v id e n c e s i n P s y c h ic a l R e s e a r c h . By J
H ill W it h I n t r o duc t o ry No t e b y S ir O li e r L o dg e v
.
A rt h u r .
, F R S . . .
C ro w n S y o c lo t h g i lt , 224 p p , 3 s 6 d n e t
. . . . .
C h r is t ia n it y a n d S p i r it u a lis m (C h r is t i a n is m e e t .
S p i r i t u a li s m e ) B y L éo n D e n is Tr a n s la t e d b y H e le n D r ap e r
. .
S p e akm a n C r o w n 8v o 3 s 6 d n e t
w ri er c e d h S piri u li m ffer gib le pr f i m m r li y
. . . .
,
The t o nt t at t tan s of ta t a nd
hu c rrie b c k h pure C hri i d c ri e
n s a s o s oo o ,
t s a s us a to t e st an o t n s .
He d He r e a f t e r
re (Ap r e s la M o r t ) B e in g a S c ie n
a n . .
t ih o a n d Ra t io n a l S o lut io n o f t h e P r o b le m s o f Lif e a n d D e a t h ,
a n d o f t h e Na t u re a n d D e s t in y o f t h e H u m a n E g o in it s S uc c e s
s iv e L i e s v
Tr a n s la t e d b y G e o rg e G Fle u r o t f r o m t h e F r e n c h o f
v
.
'
L e o n De n i s S e c o n d e dit io n , r e is e d , c lo t h g ilt , c ro w n 8 v o , 3 5 2
.
p p , 3 8 6 d ne t
. . . .
Mo rs A D is c u s s i o n o f C e r t a in C o m m u n i
J a n ua V it ae P
c a t io n s p u r p o rt i n g t o c o m e f r o m Fr e de r ic W H Mye r s By
Wi t h I nt ro duc t io n b y S ir W F B arre t t , F R S
. . .
H A D alla s
. . . . . . . .
C ro w n 8 v o c lo t h g ilt , 2 s 6 d n e t ,
. . .
C llo q u ie s w it h
o a n Un s e e n F r ie n d . E dit e d b y
W a lb u r g a , L a dy P a g e t . C ro w n 8 v o , w h it e li n e n , 3 s . 6 d ne t . .
C o NT E NT s ei c r i
R n a A l i C di i — nat o n t a nt s t o ns o f Co m m ni u c i at o n ih h
W t
vi ib e i ric k e che H u m i ri i m
t
dv ce f W r ld
on e
I
. . .
l H sto al S t ta a n d t he A t he
P i ic S
an an s
re ch ev u i d S ecre S cie ie F r ci
n s . s . an o o .
Th e F n R ol t o n W an t o t s . a r and ol t s . t . an s
De a t h : It s C a u s e s a n d P h e n o m e n a B y H e re w a r d .
C a rr in gt o n a n d J o h n R M e a de r O rn a m e n t a l b lac k c lo t h , g ilt ,
. .
5 52 p p , 8 8 6 d ne t. . . .
P E A P A T l — P h i l gic l Th S E fi A pec f L ife d De h e ie n t i t at
Tr ce C l S u pe ded A i m i P r m ure B uri l O d Ag I S

R F C . R . y s o o a . e c s o an .
fi at o n , at l ts e i e nt i
C rri g
a ta s e
S udy T he r f h N ure f D e h (H My
an , py , s n n e a . e : c
t M ow n ) t at at e r e vs a r d n to n wn
T he ry f h N ure f D e h (J h R M e der ) er l C
.
y o y o e o a . o
o o t e G at o at o n . a . e n a o n c lu s w n s .
P A T 2 — H i ric l T h P hi l phic l A pec f D e h d I m m r li y Thsto t o at ta t

l g ic l A pec A rg u m e
an
rh f De h m m r li y
R . a : e o so a s o . e
e o o Th C m ma f s t o at . e o on nt s or I o ta t .
PA T 3 —P ch l gic l Th M m e f D e h D e h D— e cribed fr m B ey d nt o at at
y f S cie ce P ychic l R e e rch

on
V ei l D e h C i cide ce Te i m
R sy o o a : e o . s o
t he Th at st on n s
I r C m ic D i ffi cu i f C m m u ic i c lu i I de
. o n n s . e o s a a .
O n the nt a- C os lt e s o o n at o n . on s o ns . n x .
C a t h e d ra l Ho u s e , P ate r no s t e r Ro w , Lo n d o n , E C . .
6 W I L L IA M RI D E R 6: S O N , Li m it e d .
P y t h a g o r a s , a nd H is S ys t e m O f P h ilo s o p h y , (Th e D e lp h ic
Mys t e r i e s ) B y E do ua r d S c h ure
. Tra n s la t e d b v F Ro t h w e ll, . .
B A . C ro w n 8 y o , c lo t h , 2 8 n e t
. . .
He r P la t o ” Th e M
m e s a n d s t e r ie s of E g yp t a n d t h e
Mys t e ri e s o f E le us i s , b y E do uard c h ur e . Tra n s la t e d b y F .
Ro t h w e ll, B A C ro w n S y o , c lo t h , 1 s . . . 6 d . ne t .
Ra m a a n d M o s e s Th e A rya n C yc le a n d t h e Mis s io n o f .
,
I s rae l Tr a n s la t e d f ro m L e s G r a n ds I n it iés o f E do u a rd S c h u re
.
“
b y F Ro t h w e ll, B A
. C ro w n 8 y o , c lo t h , 2 8 n e t . . . .
N . B .
-
T hi v lu m e c m p le e
s o o t s t he s erie s.
W it h
.
t h e Ad e p t s An A dv e nt u re a m o n g t h e Ro s ic r u c ia n s
vi
.
B y D r . F ra n z H a rt m a n n . Ne w an d Re se d E d i t io n C ro w n 8 y o , .
c lo t h g i lt , 2 s 6 d ne t . . .
Th e S i m p le W a y
Bo o B y L a o t ze
k Th e O ld
o f t h e .
A Ne w Tr a n s la t io n O f Th e Tao Te h Ki ng ”
With “
-
I n t ro duc t io n a n d C o m m e n t a r y b y Wa lt e r G o rn O ld ,
.
C ro w n S y o , c lo t h , 2 8 n e t . .
Ob e rma nn B y E t ie n n e P iv e t de S e na nc o u r . Tr a n s la t e d .
f ro m t h e F re n c h W
i t h B io g r a p h ic a l a n d C ri t ic a l I n t r o du c t io n b
y
A rt h u r E dw a rd W a it e
,
C ro w n S y o 423 p p 6 8 n e t o rn a m e nt a l .
, .
, .
,
c lo t h g ilt t o p s
, .
Th e L if e L o u is C la u d e d e
o f S a i n t - M a r t in , th e
Un k n o w n P hilo s o p h e r , a n d t h e S ub s t a n c e o f h is Tr a ns c e n de nt a l
D o c t r ine . B y A rt h ur E dw a r d Wa it e , D e m y S y o , 46 4 pp , 6 8 n e t . . .
P s y c h ic F O U N D AT I O N O F A RE L I G I O N
P h i lo s o p h y , AS TH E
O F NAT U R A L C A U S E S B y V C De s e rt is W i t h I n t ro duc t io n . . . .
b y P r o f A R Wa lla c e , O M
. . LL D , F R S
. Ne w a n d . .
, . . . . .
c h e a p e r e d it io n , c lo t h g i lt , c r o w n S YO , 42 1p p , 3 8 6 d n e t . . . .
Th e Inf e r n o B y Au g us t S t r in db e r g Tr a n s la t e d b y t h e .
b
.
Re v C la u de F ie ld A n a ut o io g ra p h ic a l w o r k b y t h e c e le b ra t e d
S w e d is h a ut h o r , s im ila r in c h a r ac t e r t o O s c a r W ilde s
. .
De
’ “
P ro f u n di s C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt , 2 s 6 d n e t
. . . .
le c t W o r k s o f P lo t i n u s . Tr a n s lat e d f ro m t h e G re e k
S e .
A ne w e dit io n w it h P re f a c e a n d B ib lio g ra p h y b y G R S Me a d , . . .
B A ,
. . C ro w n 8 y o , 3 3 4 v iii p p , c lo t h , 3 s 6 d ne t xxx . . .
Th e m W is d o o f P lo t i n u s . A Me t a p h ys ic al S t udy , by
C J . . Wh it b y M D , . . 120 p p . c ro w n 8y o , c lo t h g ilt , 2 8 . ne t .
C a t h e d r a l H o us e , Pate rnoste r Ro w , L o n d o n , E C . .
W I L L I AM RI D E R 6c S O N, L im it e d . 7
Th e W o r ld W e L iv e In . By E . A B ra c k e t t , w it h
.
P o rt ra it Of t he A ut h o r . C ro w n 8 y o , 1 21 p p .
, c lo t h g ilt , g ilt t o p s ,
28 ne t
hi b k give m g l l c le r Of e i g Of L ife ee
. .
T u ar e x p o s l t lo n t he m n
hr ugh h pec c le Of be liever S piri u li
s oo s a s y a an n , as s
t o t e s ta s a in t a sm .
A lt e r n a t e S e x , o r t h e F e m a le I n t e lle c t in Ma n a n d
Th e
t h e Mas c lin e in W o m a n B y C h a rle s G o df re y L e la n d ,
v
.
A M H a r a rd
. . Ne w a n d C h e a p e r E dit io n
, C r o w n 8 v o , c lo t h ,
. .
2 s 6 d ne t. . .
Yo g a T r a n s f o r m a t io n
, A C o m p a ra t iv e S t a t e m e n t
o r .
O f t h e v a r i o us R e lig i o n s a n d D o g m as c o n c e r n in g t h e S o u l a n d it s
D e s t in y , a n d O f A kk a d ia n , H ind u , Ta o is t E g yp t ia n , H e b r e w , ,
G r e e k , C h r is t ia n , Mo h a mm e da n , J a p a n e s e a n d o t h e r Ma g ic By .
Willia m J Fla gg Ro ya l 8 v o , 3 7 6 p p , c lo t h g ilt , c h e a p e r e dit io n ,

. . .
6 8 ne t . .
O c c u lt S c ie n c e i n I n d ia a n d a m o n g t h e A n c ie n t s .
Wit h a n ac c o u nt o f t h e ir Mys t i c I n it iat io n s a n d t h e H i s t o ry O f

S p ir it is m B y L o u i s J ac o llio t Tr a n s la t e d f ro m t h e F r e n c h b y
Willa rd L F e lt Ro ya l 8 v o , 27 6 p p c lo t h g ilt , g ilt t o p s c h e a p e r
. .
. .
.
, ,
e d it io n , 6 s n e t . .
The Tra ns p a re l B y Ma b e l C o llin s , A ut h o r O f n t J e w e .
S m a ll c r o w n 8 y o , c lo t h , g ilt t o p s , 2 8
”
Lig h t eo n Th e P a t h , tc
b
. .
ne t B o un d in Re d L a m s k in , g ilt t o p s , 4 8 6 d n e t An e x -
. . .
i f P j l h i lo s o p h
’
p o s i t o n O a t a n a i s p y .
S c ie n c e a n d t h e I n fi n it e , or Th ro ug h a W i n do w in t h e
B la n k Wa ll B y S ydn e y T Kle in .
_
. . C ro w n 8 v o , 18 3 p p .
, c lo t h g ilt ,
2 s 6 d ne t ?
. .
Matt S p i r it a n d t h e C o s m o s
e r S o m e S ug g e s t io n s
, .
t o w ards a B e tt e r Un de rs t a n d in g O f t h e W h e n c e a n d W h y O f t h e ir
x
E is t e n c e B y H S t a n le y Re d g ro v e , B S c
. F C S . . . . .
A ut h o r O f O n t h e C a lc u la t i o n O f Th e r m o C h e m i c a l C o n s t a nt s -
.
C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g i lt , 2 s 6 d n e t . . .
A M a t h e m a t ic a l T h e o r y o f S p i r it B y H S t a n le y . .
Re d g r o v e , E S c Au t h o r O f M a t t e r , S p ir i t a nd t h e C s m o s ,
. .
”
i
A lc h e m y : A n c ie n t a n d Mo de r n ,
”
e tc L a r g e c ro w n S v o c lo t h .
,
g ilt 2 8 6 d ne t
. . . .
H I G H E R L I F E H A ND B O O KS .
Cr o w n S Y O . Un if o r m ly B o u nd i n Ha n ds o m e Dar k Gr e e n C lo th .
Gilt O r n a m e n t a l D e s ign a n d L e t t e r in g .
L if e d P o w e r f r o m W it h i n
a n By W J C o l ille , . v
x
. .
A ut h o r of
“
Th e L a w O f C o rr e s p o n de n c e s ,
”
E le m e n t a r y Te t
Bo o k o f Me n t a l Th e ra p e ut ic s , e t c , e t c
”
1 89 p p , 2 8 6 d n e t . . . . . .
C a t h e d r a l Ho u s e , Pate rno s t e r Ro w , Lo n d o n , E C . .
8 W I LL I A M RI D E R S O N, L im it e d .
Th e La w
t he R h y t h m ic B r e a t h .
o f Te a c h in g t h e
v
G e n e ra t io n , C o n s e r a t io n a n d C o nt ro l O f V it a l Fo r c e B y E lla .
Ade lia F le t c h e r 3 7 2 p p , 4 8 6 d ne t . . . . .
Pat h s t o Po w e r B y Flo yd B W ils o n , A ut h o r O f Ma n “

.
L i m i t le s s , Th ro ug h S ile n c e t o Re a li za t io n , Th e D isc o v e r y
” “ ” “
O f t h e S o ul 229 p p , 4 8 6 d n e t
. . . . .
T h r o u g h S ile n c e t o R e a liz a t io n ; o r ; T h e H u m a n
A w a k e n in g B y F lo yd B . . W i ls o n , A ut h o r o f “
P at h s t o
P o w e r,
” “
Ma n L i m it le s s , e t c . 19 0 p p , 3 s 6 d n e t. . . .
Th e D is c o v e r y o f t h e S o u l o u t o f M y s t ic is m ,
Lig h t a n d P r o g r e s s B y F lo y d B ils o n , A ut h o r o f .
‘
. W
P at h s t o P o w e r ,
”
Ma n L im it le s s , e t c 247 p p , 4 8 6 d ne t
”
. . . . .
M AG IC , A LC H E M Y A ND O C C U LT S C I E NC E .
C o s m ic S y m b o lis m . B y S e p h a r ia l . C ro w n 8 v o , 29 6 p p ,
c lo t h g ilt , 3 8 6 d ne t . . .
hi w r k e m b die c ruc ive y e m Of

T s l mb l g pp lied to
pr b e f cie ce h l h d re li g i i l be f u d be b k Of
o o s a o ns t t s st univ c rsa sy o o y a
l ms n I t W l to
b rbi g i ere Of e m i e l pr c ic l v lue
o o s p i Op an o n o n a oo
,
y .
a so n nt s t a nd n nt y a t a a .
Th Ta ro t o f t h e
e B o h e m ia n s Th e Mo s t An c ie nt .
Bo o k in th e W
o r ld , f o r t h e E c lu s i e Us e O f I n it ia t e s B y P a p us x v . .
Tr a n s la t e d f ro m t h e F re n c h b y A P Mo rt o n Ne w E d it io n . .
W
. .
Re v i s e d t h ro ug h o u t , w it h I n t ro d uc t i o n b y A E a it e C r 8v o , . . . .
c lo t h g ilt , g ilt t o p s , 3 8 4 p p , p r o f us e l i lls t d , 6 8 n e t

y . . . .
A Pa c k o f 7 8 Ta ro t C a rds E u is it e ly D r a w n a n d . xq
C o lo u re d f ro m Ne w a nd O r i g i n a l De s ig n s , b y P a m e la C o le m a n
S m it h E a c h C a rd h a s a s e p a ra t e a lle g o r ic a l m e a n in g Th i s is
v
. .
w it h o ut q
u e s t i o n t h e fin e s t a n d m o s t a rt is t i c p a c k t h a t h as e e r
be e n p ro d uc e d P r ic e 6 8 n e t i n n e a t lue b o x , p o s t f r e e
. .
,
b .
T h e Ke y t o t h e T a r o t G i in g t h e H is t o r y o f t h e Ta ro t . v
C a rds , t h e ir a lle g o r ic a l m e a n in g a n d t h e m e t h o ds O f d i in a t i o n f o r v
w h ic h t h e y a re a da p t e d B y A rt h ur E dw a rd Wa it e Ro ya l 3 2m o ,
. .
c lo t h g i lt , 2 8 ne t E s s e n t i a l t o t h e i nt e rp re t a t io n O f t h e Ta ro t
. .
C a rds . Th e C a rds a n d Ke y i n n e a t r e d b o x 8 8 p o s t f r e e . .
T h e P ic t o r ia l K e y t o t h e T a r o t B e in g a n E n la r ge d .
a n d Re v
18 e d E d it i o n o f t h e Ke y t o t h e Ta ro t , i t h s e v e n t y e ig h t W -
f ull p a g e Re p ro d u c t io n s O f t h e Ta ro t C a rds f ac in g t h e ir de s c r ip t iv e
-
b
m at t e r , a n d c o n s ide ra le a dd it io n a l m att e r d e a li n g s p e c ia lly w it h
b
t h e s u je c t O f Fo rt un e t e llin g b y m e a n s O f t h e Ta ro t By A E
-
. . .
W a it e C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt , g i lt t o p s , 3 4op p 5 8 n e t
. . . .
C at h e dra l Ho u s e , P ate rno s t e r Ro w , Lo n do n , E C . .

10 W I L L IA M RI D E R S O N, L i m it e d .
C h e ir o s L a n g u a g e o f t h e H a n d ’
A C o m p le t e P ra e .
t ic a l Wo r k o n t h e S c ie n c e s O f C h e iro g n o m y a n d C h e iro m a n c y , c o n
t a in in g t h e S ys t e m , R u le s a n d E p e r i e n c e O f C h e iro F if t y fi v e x -
v
.
F ull p a g e I llus t ra t io n s a n d o e r 20 0 E n g r a v in g s O f L in e s , Mo unt s

-
a n d Ma r k s Dra w in g s O f t h e S e e n Typ e s b y Th e o Do ré F if t e e nt h v
b v
. .
e d it io n , a r t i s t ic a lly de s ig n e d la c k a n d w h it e c o e r ,
g ilt t o p s , p r ic e 1 0 8 6 d n e t . . .
A lc h e m y A n c ie n t a n d M o d e r n B e in g a b r ie f ac c o unt .
O f t h e A lc h e m is t i c D o c t r i n e s , a n d t h e ir r e la t io n s t o Mys t ic is m o n
t h e o n e h a n d , a nd t o r e c e nt d is c o e r ie s in P h ys i c a l S c ie n c e o n t h e v
o th e r ; to ge t h e r W
i t h s o m e p a rt ic u la rs re g a r d in g t h e m o st no te d
A lc h e m is t s B y H S t a n le y Re dg ro v e , B S c
. . F C S W it h . . . . .
16 f u ll p a g e illus t ra t io n s
-
D e m y 8 y o , c lo t h g i lt , 4 8 6 d n e t . . . .
Yo ur Fo rt u n e in yo ur Na m e , o r Ka b
l is t ic A s a
t r o lo g y . Ne w a nd c he ap e r E di t io n . D e m y 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt ,
”
2 8 ne t . . By S e p h a r ia l .
Th e K a b a la o f N u m b e r s A H a n d o o k de a lin g w it h . b
t h e Tr a d it i o n a l I n t e r p re t at io n O f Nu m e r s a n d t h e ir P re dic t iv e b
V a lu e By S e p h a r ia l, A ut h o r O f A Ma n ua l O f O c c u lt is m ,
” “ ”
b
.
Ka a lis t ic As t ro lo g y , P ro g n o s t ic As t ro n o m i ,
“ ”
e tc , e tc . .
1 6 8 p p , c ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt , 2 3 n e t
. . .
Ge o m a nc y B y F r a n z H a rt m a n n , M D
. L a rg e c ro w n 8 y o ,
b ut 200 pp
. .
a o .
, c lo t h g i lt , w it h n u m e r o u s d ia g ra m s , 3 8 6 d ne t . . .
T hi b k R evi ed V er i 8 on of t he re i e
T at s G e m cy S d divi i g
by h w e ll k w Au ri P h ici w i g h li e Of h e ch
o n
d O ccu l i f
s oo is a s o an , or an -
n n ,
t st t st, o llo t t t
g Of C r e liu A g ripp
e -
no n an ys an an n e n s e a
in o n s a .
The H is t o r y o f M a g ic I n c ludi n g a c le a r a n d p re c is e .
x
e p o s it io n O f it s P ro c e s s e s , Rit e s a n d Mys t e r ie s B y E lip h as .
L e v i, A u t h o r O f Tr a n c e n de nt a l Ma g ic , Tra ns la t e d
“
e tc , e t c
b y A r t h u r E d w a rd Wa it e
. .
5 5 6 pp , m e d i u m S V O , c lo t h g ilt ,
b
. .
1 2 8 6 d ne t . E dit io n de L u e p r i n t e d o n ra g p a p e r ,
. . o un d x
in w h it e v e llu m , g ilt , 2 1 8 n e t . .
M E NT A L P AT H O L O G Y A ND T H E R A P E UT I C S .
He a lt h f o r Yo
it s P r i n c ip le s a n d
u ng a n d O ld ,
P r a c t ic e A n Un c o n e n t io n a l Ma n u a l
. B y A T S c h o fi e ld , v . . .
MD , E le m e nt a ry H yg ie n e , H yg ie n e
”
a ut h o r O f
F it f o r Wo rk , v
. .
f o r S c h o o ls ,
” ”
Ne r o u s n e s s , ”
H o w t o Ke e p
Fit , e t c C ro w n 8 v o , 27 2 p p , c lo t h g ilt , p r i c e 3 8 6 d n e t
. . . . .
C a t h e d r a l Ho us e , P at e rno s t e r Ro w , Lo n d o n , E C . .
W I L L IAM R I D E R 6: S O N , L im it e d . 11
E le m e n t a r y T e x t b o o k o f M e n t a l T h e r a p e u t ic s .
By W J C o lv ille , a ut h o r O f e t c , w it h
”
C re a t iv e Th o u g h t ,
“
v
. . .
D e m y 8 v o , p a p e r c o e r s , 8 op p , 1 8 n e t
'
I n t ro d uc t i o n . . .
Th e Ma s t e ry o f De a t h B y A O s b o rn e E a . . v e s . A ut h o r
Of Th e C o lo ur C ur e C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h , 2 8 n e t
”
. . .
T h e A rt o f Lu c k . B y A O s b o rn e E a e s v A uth o r of
v
. .
Th e C o lo ur C ure , e t c . 5 in x 4"in p a p e r c o e rs , 1
. . 8 . ne t .
P s y c h o —P a t h o lo g ic a l R e s e a r c h e s S t u d ie s in Me n t a l .
D is s o c i a t io n W it h Te t Fig ure s a n d 10 P la t e s B y B o r is S idis , x

b
. .
M A , P h D , D ire c t o r o f t h e P s yc h o P at h o lo g ic a l L a o r a t o ry o f
. . . .
-
Ne w Yo r k Ro ya l 8 v o , 3 29 p p , 8 8 6 d n e t . . . . .
A b n o r m a l P s y c h o lo g y B y I s a do r H C o r ia t M D , . . .
v
.
,
S e n io r A s s is t a nt P h ys ic ia n f o r D is e a s e s O f t h e Ne r o u s S ys t e m ,
B o s t o n C i t y H o s p it a l ; Ne u ro lo g is t t o t h e Mt S in a i H o s p it a l .
C r o w n 8 v o , c lo t h g i lt , 3 40 p p , 5 8 n e t . . .
C O NT E NT S
I ON S C I O U S —W h t
E X P L O R A T I ON t h e S ubc o n s ci o u s ?
.
TH E THE S UB C
A ut o m a t c W t ng T s t n g t h e E m o t i o n s A n ly s m g t h E m o t i o n s S leep D re m s
. OF . a is
I I D I S E A S E S O F T H E S U B C O N S C I O U S —L s e Of M e m ry R e t o r t i n Of L o s t
i ri i . e i . a e . . a .
M e m o rie s T h e S p li t t i n g Of a P e s na l t y P ych E pi lep t ic At t c k

. . o s s o . s a o
. r o i . s o -
a s .
RIDER S ’
M I ND A N D B O D Y H A N D - B O O K S .
T h e s e H a n d o o ks d e a l b
it h t h e s u je c t O f m e n t al a n d b o dily
- W b
h e a lt h in t h e n e w lig h t O f p s y c h o t h e r a p e u t ic s , m e n t a l h e a lin g a n d -
a u t o s u g g e s t io n
-
T h e f o llo w in g o lu m e s are n o w r e ady
. v
Na t ure
’
s H e lp t o H a p p in e B y J o h n W a r re n A c h o r n ,
s s .
MD . . S m a ll c ro w n 8 y o , 5 5 p p .
, c lo t h g i lt , 1 8 ne t , p ap e r 6 d ne t . . .
Ho w t o Re s t a n d b Re s te e d . B y G rac e D a w s o n . 46 p p .
,
re d p ape r co v e r, 6 d . ne t , c lo t h 1 8 . ne t .
B y G ra c e Daw s o n , u n if o r m
‘
T h e S e c r e t o f E fl i c ie n c y
‘
w it h t h e a b o v e , c lo t h , 1 8 n e t . .
Wh at H e a lt h P B y G ra c e D a w s o n A ut h o r O f
is H o w to ,
Re s t S m a ll c ro w n 8 v o 7 2p p 1 8 n e t
”
. .
.
, ,
Ne r v o u s n e s s A B r ie f a n d P o p ula r Re ie w o f t h e Mo r al . v
Tr e at m e n t O f D i s o r de r e d Ne r e s B y A lf re d T S c h o fi e ld , M D , v . . . .
S m a ll c ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt 88 p p 1 8 n e t , .
, . .
Th e Po w e r o f S e lf -
S ugge s t io n B y Re v
. S a m ue l .
Mc C o m b D D , . . S m a ll c ro w n 8v o , 72 p p .
, c lo t h g ilt , 1 8 ne t . .
Ho w K e e p F it t o . A n Un c o n e n t io n a l Ma n ua l v By
v
.
A lf r e d T S c h o fie ld , M D , . . . A ut h o r O f Ne r o us n e ss ,
e tc , e tc
. S m a ll c r o w n 8 v o ,
. c lo t h g ilt , 80 p p , 1 8 ne t . . .
C a t h e d r a l H o ii s e , P at e rno s te r Ro w , L o n d o n , E C . .
12 W I L LIA M RI D E R S O N, L im it e d .
F r o m P a s s io n t o P e a c e ; o r , Th e P a t h w a y O f t h e P ur
B y J a m e s Alle n , A ut h o r o f Th e Ma s t e ry o f De s t iny , F ro
“ ”
v
P o e rt y t o P o w e r ,
”
A s a Ma n Th in k e t h , e t c , e t c S m a ll c r o w
”
. .
8 v o , c lo t h g ilt , 7 2 p p , 1 8 n e t . . .
S t u d ie s i n S e lf - H e a li n g ; o r , C u r e b y Me dit a t io n .
p ra c t ic a l a p p li c a t io n O f t h e p r in c ip le s O f t h e t r ue m ys t i c h e alin g O
t he age s B y E r n e s t E Mu n da y
. S m a ll c ro w n 8 y o , 7 9 p p , c lo t . . .
g ilt 1 8 n e t , . .
T h e I n fl u e n c e o f t h e M in d o n t h e B o d y B y Dr .
P a ul D u b o is , P r o f e s s o r O f Ne u ro P at h o lo g y in t h e Un iv e r s it y 0 -
B e r n e , A ut h o r O f Th e P s yc h i c Tr e a t m e n t O f Ne rv o us D is o r de rs ,
“ ’
S e lf C o n t ro l, a n d H O W t o S e c u re I t , e t c Tr a n s la t e d f ro m t h
”
-
.
Fif t h F r e n c h E d i t i o n b y L B G a lla t i n S m a ll c r o w n 8 y o , 6 4 p p . . . .
c lo t h g i lt , 1 8 n e t . .
M a n , K in g o f M in d , Bo dy a n d C ir c u m s t a n c e . B
J ame s A lle n, A ut h o r O f As a
“
Ma n Th in k e t h , e t c , e t c
”
. . S m al
c ro w n 8v o , 7 0 p p , c lo t h g i lt , 1 8
. . ne t .
C ONT E NT S — F r rd Th I er W rld wa of T h u g h T h O u er W rld ts t Oi

hi g bi I S l very d F reed m di ly C di i P ver y M
o . e nn o o . e o
Ha
’
T Bo t
Re ig
t : ts it s t o ns
piri u mi i ue i
n s a an o . o n . o . an s
S t al Do C
n on . o nq st : no t s nat o n .
T H E O LO GY .
Th e C h r is t , a n d O t h e r S e r m o n s
Un e sc a p a b le
A n E p re s s i o n o f t h e Ne w Th e o lo g y B y Re v E dw a rd W L e w is
x . . .
M A , B D , O f G ra f t o n S u a re C o n g re g a t i o n a l C h u rc h , C lap h a m
. . . . q
S o m e V i e w s o f Mo de rn Th e o lo g y C r o w n 8 v o , c lo t h
”
A ut h o r O f .
3 s 6 d ne t. . .
S o m e Be t t T h in g f o r Use r By A S . . . L . S e c o nd I m
p re s s io n . D e m y l 2m o , c lo t h g ilt , 3 8 6 d n e t . . .
ONT E NT S F i t h
C P r c ic l M e r — A t att e r I T rue F u c i
F T ru h ts t t
w hich G e dere h d ge T P i Of V ie w T h
n on
R e la t i o n t L ife
ir
°
a : a a . a .
Th
L aw t B wo o nt s
T hreef ld C rd Of P r yer d P w er
on
H e l h H li e
o . e n a . . e
o o a . a t , o n ss an o .
A n A rt i s t s C re e d ; a n d Th e Re lig iO i
’
G o d t h e B e a u t if u l .
Of B e a ut y C o n t ra s t e d it h B uddh i s m By E P B S e con W . . . . .
E dit i o n (t r a n s la t e d int o J a p a n e s e a nd G e r m a n) Fo o ls c a p 8 v o .
2 s . 6 d . ne t .
Tra nsf o r m e d H in d u is m . B y t h e A ut h o r of Go d th
v o ls , f
’
B e a ut if ul . 2 c ap 8v o , 5 8 . ne t .
Wh e re is He a v e n ? M us in g s on th e L if e E t e r n al . B
B e a ut i f u l,
”
E m il P of Go d the A ut h o r
“
B e rg , . e tc . 16 1 pp .
f c a p 8 v o , art c a n v as , g i lt t o p s , 2 8 n e t
’
. .
'
C a t h e d r a l H o us e , P at e rno s t e r Ro w , Lo nd o n , E C . .
14 W I L L IA M RI D E R 6: S O N , L im it e d .
Th B r a h m a n s W is d o m
e V e rs e s t ra n s lat e d f r o m t h e
’
.
G e rm a n O f F r ie dr ic h Ruc ke rt B y E v a M Ma rt in S m a ll c ro w n .
W
. .
8vo . B o und i t h a r t is t ica lly de s ig n e d c o v e r in v io le t a n d le m o n
c lo t h , g ilt 1 8 6 d ne t
. . . .
NO o ccu l i t st h o lo ve be u ifu l ver e h u ld m i bu i g hi u i u v lu m e

s a t s s o ss y n t s n q e o .
F IC T IO N .
Th S C lu b B y E llio t t O D o nn e ll, A ut h o r o f
’
e o rc e ry .
B yw a ys O f G h o s t la n d , C r o w n 8 v o , c lo t h g i lt , f o ur f ull p a g e
”
e tc .
illus t ra t io n s 6 8 , .
Th e f t h e De a d
Go d s By in if re d G r a h a m , A ut h o r
o . W
Of
“
Ma ry, ”
Th e S t a r C h i ld, E zr a t h e M o r m o n , e tc .
C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g i lt , 6 8 .
Th e We ir d o f t he a nde W re r . By P ro s p e ro a nd
C a lib a n . C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt , 6 s .
Th e V a m
p ir e . By Re g in a ld H o dde r, a ut h o r of Th e
D a ug h t e r O f t h e Daw n , e tc .
, c ro w n 8v o , c lo t h g ilt , 6 8 .
In t o t h e Un s e e n . By G . H . L us t y , C ro w n 8v o .
, c lo t h
g ilt , 6 8 .
Th e Ra ke ’
s P ro gre s s . By Ma rjo r ie B o w e n , A ut h o r Of
Th e V ip e r O f Mi la n ,
”
e tc . C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt , 2 8 n e t . .
T h e P r ie s t e s s o f I s is . B y E do ua r d S c h u r e , A ut h o r O f
C r o w n 8 v o , c lo t h g ilt , Ne w C h e a p
”
Th e G re a t I n it ia t e s , e tc .
E dit io n , 2 8 ne t . .
B y F irt h S c o tt , A ut h o r O f Th e L a s t
“
Po ss e s s e d .
L e m ur ia n ,
” “
Th e R i de r o f a ro o n a ,
”
W “
Th e Tra c k O f Midn ig h t ,
’
C ro w n 8v o , c lo t h g ilt , 2 8 n e t . .
Ny r ia B y Mr s C a m p b e ll P r a e d , a ut h o r of Th e I ns a n e
“
. .
Ro o t , e tc . C ro w n 8 v o , c lo t h , 2 8 n e t . .
D r a c u la . A n e w E di t io n O f t h is c e le ra t e d a nd t h r illin g b
v a m p ire s t o r y . B y B ra m S t o k e r S m a ll c r o w n 8 y o , c lo t h g ilt , .
4 16 p p , 1 8 n e t
. . .
The J e w e l o f S e v e n St a rs . B y B ra m S t o ke r . Un if o r m
w it h D r a c u la , 1 3
”
. ne t .
Th e L a ir o f t h e W h it e Wo r m . B y B ra m S t o k e r
a ut h o r o f D r a c u la C ro w n 8 v o , . c lo t h g ilt , 3 24 p p , 6 c o lo ure d
.
illu s t ra t io n s , 6 s .
The D o o r Aja r , a n d O t h e r St o r ie s . B y V ir g in ia
M ilw a rd C r o w n 8 v o , c lo t h , 128 p p 1 8 ne t
r r ife e w e h L e ve —Th i ll
. . . .
C ONT E NT S —T h e D o o Aja —Th e K n —B t M s of Go d

—Th L i t t le S i lver B
e n t
i d A Mi r Third
. e a s e
e ox D as K n -
no .
C a t h e d r a l H o us e , P ate r nos te r Ro w , Lo n d o n , E C . .
W I L L IA M RI D E R 8: S O N, L im it e d . 15
Th e S o u l o t he Mo o r
f A Ro m a n c e . . B y S t ra tf o rd D .
J o lly 226 p p , . . c r o w n 8 v o , illu s t ra t e d , c lo t h , 2 8 . ne t .
A no ve l de li g W i h hyp ic i fl ue ce
a n t no t n n a nd o ccu l m et tam o rph i os s .
Th e L iv i n g Whe e l . By T . L . Un ia c k e . A Dr a m a in 5
Ac t s . C ro w n 8 v o , 3 8 . 6 d . ne t .
T is s t o h ry piri u l M rri ge p re e
f S r ge p ibi li ie
t nt s s t a n t s of u n io n be w e t e n
Of ce i y ep r ed h phy ic l b dy
a
h
o a a a s o ss
t o s e w ho a re ne ss t s a at in t e s a o .
T h e T w ic e - B o r n B y a n E x A s s o c iat e .
-
Of t he S o c ie t y f o r
P s yc h ic a l Re s e a r c h C r o w n 8 v o , c lo t h , 2 8 n e t . . .
F la x iu s : L E AV E S F R O M T H E L I F E O F A N I M M O RTA L . By
C h a r le s G o df re y L e la nd , A ut h o r O f Th e B r e it m a n n B a lla ds , e tc .
C ro w n 8 v o , 3 8 6 d n e t . . .
Th L if e a n d
e C o n io n o f A s e n a t h , n a r r a t in g h o w
f e ss
the A ll B e a ut if ul J
-
o s e p h t o o k h e r t o w if e C ro w n 8 y o , p a p e r
v
.
co e rs , 1 8 ne t E . . xq u i s it e ly p r in t e d o n h a n d m a de p a p e r -
.
THE L I B RA RY O F O C C U LT R E C O R DS .
C r o w n 8Y O , in Ar t ist ic a lly De sign e d B lu e Clo t h , Gilt L e t te r in g .
3 8 . 6 d . ne t pe r v o lu me .
hi L ibr ry de ig ed i c lude
T to S e lec i fr m h B e O ccu l d P ychic
t t st t
rie w hich l y c l i m l ri g i rdi ry m p
n
i pir i N fic i
s a is s n a on o e an s
S to to an a t o na f h t t sta
p l ce m g he e b k r e dy
ns n on
W i ll b give m g v lu m e
s a a o . O o e o na
e n a a a on t s oo s. T h f ll e o ow o s a re no w a
Th ro ug h t h e M is t s L e a v e s f r o m t h e A ut o b io g r a p h y o f
.
a S o u l i n P ara dise . Re c o rde d f o r t h e A ut h o r b y Ro b e rt J a m e s

Le e s 3 s 6 d ne t
. . . .
Th e L if e E ly s ia n B e in g m o r e Le av e s f ro m t h e A ut o .
bi o g r a p h y O f a S o u l in P a ra d i s e Re c o rde d f o r t h e A ut h o r b y .
R J Le e s
. . 3 49 p p , 3 8 6 d n e t
. . . . .
Th e C a r o f Ph o e b us . By R J . . Le e s . 3 88 p p .
, 3 s . 6 d . ne t .
Th e He re t ic . B y Ro b e r t J a me s Le e s . 5 66 p p .
,
3 8 . 6 d . ne t .
An As t ra l B r id e g r o o m . A Re in c arn at io n S t udy . By
Ro b e rt J a me s Le e s 40 4 p p , 3 8 . . . 6 d . ne t .
I d a L ly m o n d a n d He r Ho ur o f V is io n . By Ho pe
C ra nf o rd 3 8 6 d . . . ne t .
C a t h e d ra l H o u s e , P at e r no s t e r Ro w , L o n d o n , E C . .
16 W I L L I AM RI D E R s S O N, L im it e d .
THE S H I L L I NG L I B RA RY OF P S YC H IC A L
L IT E R A T U R E A ND I NQ U I R Y .
D e m y 8 v o , V o ls I, II, III, IV 1 8 ne t e ac h , p ap e r co v e rs ;
b
. .
,
1 8 . 6 d . ne t , n e a t ly o un d in g r e e n c lo t h .
By E D W A R D T . B E NN ETT ,
A s s i s t a n t S e c r e t a r y t o t h e S o c i e ty f or P s y c h ic a l R e s e a r c h ,
7882—79 02 .
I Th e S
. o c ie t y f o r P s y c h ic a l Re s e a rc h : I t s Ris e
a n d P ro gre s s , a nd a S ke tc h O f it s W o r k .
ll . Tw e n ty Ye a rs o f P s y c h ic a l Re s e a rc h : 1 882
19 0 1 .
III A u t o m a t ic S p e a k i n g a
. n d W r it in g : a St u dy .
W it h m a ny h it h e rt o Un p ub li s h e d C as e s and E x a m p le s .
IV . Th e D ir e c t Ph e no me na o f S p i r it ua l is m
D ir e c t W r it i ng , Dr aw i n g P a int i n g , , a nd M uS i c .
G LO B E S A ND M I R R O R S F O R C R Y S T A L G A Z I NG .
Me d i u m S ize G lo b e (a b o u t 235 m d i a m e t e r) 4 8 6 d p o s t f r e e in
b
/
.
q
. .
,
Un it e d Kin g do m ; a b r o a d 5 8 L a rg e r S ize g lo e s up e r i o r ualit y

b
.
, , ,
p o s t f r e e in Un it e d K in g do m , a ro a d 7 I n b o x w it h
‘
in s t r u c t io n s c o m p le t e .
H a n ds o m e E b o n i t e H ig h ly F in is h e d F a k ir Mi r r o r w it h C o v e r
, ,
c o m p le t e w it h f ull in s t r uc t i o n s 1 0 8 6 d n e t p o s t f r e e
, S m a lle r , . .
, .
d it t o , 5 8 . 3 d p o st f re
. e .
T HE O C C UL T REV IEW .
A Mo n t h ly J de v o t e d t o t h e I n v e s t iga t io n o f t h e
o urn a l
P r o b le m s O f L if e a n d D e a t h a n d t h e S t u dy O f t h e
Tr u t h s u n de r lyin g a ll R e lig io u s B e lie f s .
E D I TE D BY R AL P H S H I RL E Y .
A NNUA L S UB S C R I P TI O N :
B r it is h I s le s S e v e n S h illin g s , p o s t f r e
, e .
Un it e d S t a t e s C a n a da , 6 1 7 5 c e nt s . E ls e w h e re , 88 . or it s e q ui v a le n t .
A ME R I C A
I NT E R NAT I O NA L NE W S C O .
,
85 D U A NE S T R EE T , NE W YO R K .
I ND I A
A H . . W H EE L E R CO .
, C A L C U TTA .
TH E TH E O S O PH I S T ”
O FF I C E A D YA R , , MA D R AS .
C at h e d r a l H o us e , P ate rn o s t e r Ro w , L o n d o n , E C . .

AManualofOccultism 10843503 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AManualofOccultism 10843503 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M A N UA L O F

IT is not my intention in these pages to attempt

there is a deep substratum O f truth in what is usu ally

sure and de ﬁ nite means O f exploring them .

The ancient Hermetic philosophers were well

the worl d of c au s ation and that of effects They .

traced a connection between the noumenal and the

bodily condition between the spiritual and the

natural Th e y afﬁrme d all th is in a trite axiom :

concrete observations and became a scienc e which

they embodied in the Doctrine O f C orrespondences .

The hiero glyphic writings of t he Chinese E gyptians

and Assyrians are the outcome of this science ,

portions of which are current in our o w n though t

to traditional knowledge which associated the

g lyph for all that the name imports We call the .

a subtile correspondence between the day and the

ni ght and the passive female function We speak .

O f j ovial men and infer their connection with t h e

planet Jupiter ; and all our destructive and hurtful

source in the root ma m a (to strike ) because the ,

destruc tive element in nature is represented in our

This Doctrine of C orrespondences is at the root

presentation of the Univer sal Law which binds

creative artist are all un conscious interpreters of

beat . The s ybil t h e diviner and the seer are in

even closer touch with the G reat Life wh ile theyhave ,

less conscious enj oyment O f that intimacy Others .

there are who reach to the heart of thin gs by a clear

These are the Occultists the true masters of the ,

secret knowledge Here it is perhaps necessary to

mark the distinction which exists between occult

effort O f the trained intellect and the automatic

respective relations to the occult world .

The Occultist is one who intelligently and c on

c O O perate with nature and the spiritual intelligences

in the production of e ff ects O f service to himself

a close study O f the mystery and power of sound ,

number colour form ; the psychological laws

underlying all expression of faculty ; the laws of

spiritual a nd n atural a fﬁnity ; the law O f periodicity ,

of cosmic energy planetary action ; occult correspond

g ift of understan di ng an unusual de g ree

The Me di um or natural sensitive is one who holds

hi mself in negative relations to the interior worlds ,

and submits himself to the operation O f inﬂuences

to that O f discarnate intelli gences The medi u m .

c ul tivates an unusual degree of responsiveness to

The phenomena developed by this process O f

mena O f involuntary speech and automatic writing ;

clairaudience psychometry etc ; tra nc e with its

attendant phenomena O f unconscious cerebration ,

obsession and a variety O f physical effects of a

supernormal character In its hi ghest manifesta

the s ubj ugation of the passions and a process O f ,

intense reli gious aspiration mediumism is frequently

followed b y spiritual revelation and spontaneous

The various forms O f divination to which recourse

the exercise O f a faculty which is compounded of

the automatic faculty in conj unction with an em

The following pages are intended to place the lay

t h e le ss be found that every thin g necessary to an

the au th o r s p u rp o se to place so much information